Wiley Wireless Lan Radios Dec 2007

Wireless LAN Radios
System Definition to Transistor Design
Arya Behzad
John B. Anderson, Series Editor
IEEE Press Series on Microelectronic Systems

Stuart K. Tewksbury and Joe E. Brewer, Series Editors
IEEE Solid-State Circuits Society, Sponsor
IEEE PRESS
WILEY-INTERSCIENCE
A JOHN WILEY & SONS, INC., PUBLICATION
Wireless LAN Radios
IEEE Press Series on Digital & Mobile Communication
The IEEE Press Digital and Mobile Communication Series is written for research and
development engineers and graduate students in communication engineering. The
burgeoning wireless and personal communication fields receive special emphasis. Books
are of two types, graduate texts and the latest monographs about theory and practice.

Ericsson Professor of Digital Communication
Lund University, Sweden
Advisory Board
John B. Anderson Joachim Hagenauer

Dept. of Information Technology Dept. of Communications Engineering
Lund University, Sweden Technical University
Munich, Germany
Rolf Johannesson Norman Beaulieu

Dept. of Information Technology Dept. of Electrical and Computer
Lund University, Sweden Engineering,
University of Alberta,
Edmonton, Alberta, Canada
Books in the IEEE Press Series on Digital & Mobile Communication
John B. Anderson, Digital Transmission Engineering, Second Edition

Rolf Johannesson and Kamil Sh. Zigangirov, Fundamentals of Convolutional Coding
Raj Pandya, Mobile and Personal Communication Systems and Services
Lajos Hanzo, P. J. Cherriman, and J. Streit, Video Compression & Communications over
Wireless Channels: Second to Third Generation Systems and Beyond
Lajos Hanzo, F. Clare, A. Somerville and Jason P. Woodard, Voice Compression and
Communications: Principles and Applications for Fixed and Wireless Channels
Mansoor Shafi, Shigeaki Ogose and Takeshi Hattori (Editors), Wireless Communications in
the 21st Century
Raj Pandya, Introduction to WLLs: Application and Development for Fixed or Broadband
Services
Christian Schlegel and Lance Perez, Trellis and Turbo Coding
Kamil Zigangirov, Theory of Code Divison Multiple Access Communication
Arya Behzad, Wireless LAN Radios: System Definition to Transistor Design
Wireless LAN Radios
System Definition to Transistor Design
Arya Behzad
IEEE Press Series on Microelectronic Systems

Stuart K. Tewksbury and Joe E. Brewer, Series Editors
IEEE PRESS
WILEY-INTERSCIENCE
A JOHN WILEY & SONS, INC., PUBLICATION
IEEE Press
445 Hoes Lane
Piscataway, NJ 08854
IEEE Press Editorial Board

Mohamed E. El-Hawary, Editor in Chief
R. Abari T. Chen R. J. Herrick

S. Basu T. G. Croda S. V. Kartalopoulos
A. Chatterjee S. Farshchi M. S. Newman
B. M. Hammerli
Kenneth Moore, Director of IEEE Book and Information Services (BIS)

Catherine Faduska, Senior Acquisitions Editor
Jeanne Audino, Project Editor

IEEE SSCS-Liaison to IEEE Press, Stuart K. Tewksbury
Copyright © 2008 by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.
Published by John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Hoboken, New Jersey. All rights reserved.
Published simultaneously in Canada.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form
or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, scanning, or otherwise, except as
permitted under Section 107 or 108 of the 1976 United States Copyright Act, without either the prior
written permission of the Publisher, or authorization through payment of the appropriate per-copy fee to
the Copyright Clearance Center, Inc., 222 Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, (978) 750-8400, fax
(978) 750-4470, or on the web at www.copyright.com. Requests to the Publisher for permission should
be addressed to the Permissions Department, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 111 River Street, Hoboken, NJ
07030, (201) 748-6011, fax (201) 748-6008, or online at http://www.wiley.com/go/permission.
Limit of Liability/Disclaimer of Warranty: While the publisher and author have used their best efforts in
preparing this book, they make no representations or warranties with respect to the accuracy or
completeness of the contents of this book and specifically disclaim any implied warranties of
merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. No warranty may be created or extended by sales
representatives or written sales materials. The advice and strategies contained herein may not be
suitable for your situation. You should consult with a professional where appropriate. Neither the
publisher nor author shall be liable for any loss of profit or any other commercial damages, including
but not limited to special, incidental, consequential, or other damages.
For general information on our other products and services or for technical support, please contact our
Customer Care Department within the United States at (800) 762-2974, outside the United States at
(317) 572-3993 or fax (317) 572-4002.
Wiley also publishes its books in a variety of electronic formats. Some content that appears in print may
not be available in electronic format. For information about Wiley products, visit our web site at
www.wiley.com.
Wiley Bicentennial Logo: Richard J. Pacifico
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data is available.
ISBN 978-0471-70964-0
Printed in the United States of America.
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Contents
Preface ix
Acronyms xi
CHAPTER 1 802.11 Flavors and System Requirements 1

1.1 Definition 1
1.2 WLAN Market Trends 3
1.3 History of 802.11 6
1.4 802.11: b, a, or g? 8
1.5 802.11b Standard 10
1.6 802.11a Channel Allocation 13
1.7 802.11a and 802.11g: OFDM Mapping 14
1.7.1 Multipath Fading 14
1.8 802.11a/g: Data Rates 21
1.9 802.11a/g OFDM Packet Construction 24
1.10 802.11 System Requirements 24
1.10.1 Receiver Sensitivity 24
1.10.2 Transmitter Error Vector Magnitude 26
1.10.3 Transmitter Spectral Mask 28
1.11 Vector Signal Analysis 33
CHAPTER 2 Radio Receiver and Transmitter Architectures 43
2.1 Architectures 43
2.1.1 Superheterodyne Receiver 44
2.1.1.1 Choice of Intermediate Frequency in 47
Superheterodyne Receiver
2.1.2 Low IF Receiver 51
2.1.3 Direct-Conversion Receiver 55
2.1.4 Receiver Architectures: Summary 59
2.1.5 Superheterodyne Transmitter 60
v
vi CONTENTS
2.1.6 Low IF Transmitter 64

2.1.7 Direct-Conversion Transmitter 64
2.1.8 Polar Modulators 66
2.2 Process Choices: CMOS versus SiGe BiCMOS 67
CHAPTER 3 Analog Impairments and Issues 73
3.1 Receiver Sensitivity and Noise Figure 73
3.2 Receiver DC Offsets and LO Leakage 75
3.3 Receiver Flicker Noise 79
3.4 Receiver Interferers and Intermodulation Distortion 83
3.4.1 IP3, IP2, and P1dB 83
3.4.2 Tools for Analyzing Modulated Signal Distortion 96
3.5 Receiver Image Rejection 102
3.5.1 Superheterodyne Receiver 102
3.5.2 Low IF Architecture 104
3.5.3 Direct-Conversion Receiver 106
3.6 Quadrature Balance and Relation to Image Rejection 107
3.7 Quadrature Balance and Relation to EVM 109
3.8 Other Transmitter (Modulator) Impairments 116
3.9 Peak-to-Average Ratio and Relation to Linearity 121
and Efficiency
3.10 Local Oscillator Pulling in PLL 124
3.11 Phase Noise in PLL 126
3.12 Far-Out Phase Noise 130
3.13 Effect of Phase Noise on OFDM Systems 131
3.14 Effect of Frequency Errors on OFDM 132
3.15 Summary of Analog/RF Impairments 135
CHAPTER 4 Some Key Radio Building Blocks 137
4.1 Low Noise Amplifier 137
4.2 Mixer and its Local Oscillator Buffers 142
4.3 Power Amplifier 148
4.4 Fully Integrated VCO 153
4.5 Multifrequency (Stacked) Mixer 157
4.6 Open-Loop Transconductance Linearization Circuit 158
CHAPTER 5 Calibration Techniques 161
5.1 VCO Calibration 163
5.2 Automatic Frequency Control 165
5.3 Quadrature Error and Local Oscillator Feedthrough 172
Calibration
5.4 Bias Current Calibrations (R Calibration) 175
CONTENTS vii
5.5 Filter Time-Constant Calibration (RC Calibration) 176

5.6 Other Calibrations 177
CHAPTER 6 Case Studies 179
6.1 Case Study 1: A CMOS 802.11a Transceiver 179
6.1.1 Architecture and Circuit Implementation 179
6.1.2 Receiver 181
6.1.3 Transmitter 183
6.1.4 Phase-Locked Loop 186
6.2 Case Study 2: High Performance WLAN Transmitter 189
Utilizing Quadrature and LOFT Calibration
CHAPTER 7 Brief Discussion Of 802.11n and 197
Concluding Remarks
7.1 Need for 802.11n 197
7.2 802.11a/b/g/n MIMO Transceiver 202
7.2.1 Architecture and Circuit Implementation 203
7.2.1.1 Receiver 203
7.2.1.2 Transmitter 205
7.2.1.3 PLL and LO Generation 207
7.2.1.4 Calibration Techniques 209
7.2.2 Packaging Issues 211
7.2.3 Measurement Results 211
7.2.4 MIMO Case Study Conclusion 216
7.3 Concluding Remarks 217
References 221
Annotated Bibliography 223
Index 233
About the Author 241

Preface
This book provides a high-level overview of the design of radios for wire-
less local area network (WLAN) systems. In doing so, it spends a consider-
able amount of time describing the unique aspects of the WLAN system. It
is important to understand these unique aspects in order to be able to design
an optimal radio for this system. Only with proper high-level system under-
standing will a designer be able to trade off the ever-present challenges that
are to be made.
As a high level and concise overview, this book does not discuss in detail
any of the aspects covered. However, it enables the reader to grasp a good
understanding of the overall challenges faced in the design of radios for
WLAN systems.
The book covers a variety of topics, from communication system con-
cepts to transistor level circuit implementations and trade-offs. Therefore
depending on the reader’s area of expertise, he or she may find certain chap-
ters easier to follow than others. However, a system designer, for example,
should be able to have a good understanding of the challenges faced by the
circuit designer. Similarly, this book enables a circuit designer to be able to
comprehend the reasoning behind the block specifications that the system
designer has passed on to him or her. Given that current and future genera-
tion radios will require more and more system level calibrations, such an
understanding on both sides is essential to designing the next generation ra-
dios for WLAN applications.
This book is organized as follows. A quick introduction is presented in
this preface. Chapter 1 describes the various flavors of the 802.11 PHY
standard and the system and radio requirements associated with these PHY
standards. Various receiver and transmitter architectures that can be utilized
in designing WLAN systems is described in Chapter 2 and the various
trade-offs associated with these architectures are described. Chapter 3 out-
lines in fairly significant detail the analog impairments and issues associated
with implementing WLAN radios. Chapter 4 discusses transistor level im-
plementation of some key radio building blocks. Chapter 5 discusses sever-
al calibration techniques used in the design of WLAN radios. In Chapter 6,
ix
x PREFACE
two case studies are presented, one of the design of a full 802.11a WLAN
radio and another of a calibrated transmitter for a WLAN application. Final-
ly, a brief conclusion is presented.
Upon completing the study of this book, the reader should have a strong
high-level overview of the multitude of trade-offs that can be made in the
design of radios for the various flavors of WLAN systems. The trade-offs
made are a result of the complex interactions of the choice of radio architec-
ture, the choice of process technology, the choice of the calibration algo-
rithms utilized, and several other factors.
I acknowledge my colleagues at Broadcom for their contributions to the
many WLAN chips that have been discussed and referenced in this book,
including the folks on the RF design team, RF layout team, systems design
team, operations team, and central engineering team. I also thank Broadcom
management for supporting and authorizing the publication of this book. In
addition to the referenced published material in the book, some of the fig-
ures in this book are extracted from various presentations. I thank the au-
thors of these presentations: Rohit Gaikwad, Antonio Montalvo, David Su,
Jason Trachewsky, Tyson Tuttle, and Iason Vassiliou. I thank Klaas Bult for
his review of the book. Finally, many thanks to the staff at IEEE Press and
Wiley for their work on the manuscript.
And, of course, my great gratitude goes back to my parents and brother
for their lifelong love and support, and to my wife and children for their
love and for putting up with me and my schedule while I worked on this
book.
ARYA BEHZAD
San Diego, California
September, 2007
Acronyms
AACI Alternate adjacent channel interferer

ACI Adjacent channel interferer
AD Amplitude distortion
ADC Analog to digital converter
AFC Automatic frequency correction
AM Amplitude modulation
AP Access point
ASP Average selling price
AWGN Additive white Gaussian noise
BALUN Balanced-unbalanced (a single-ended to differential converter)
BPF Bandpass filter
BPF Bandpass filter
BT Bluetooth
BW Bandwidth
CCK Complementary code keying
CMOS Complementary metal-oxide semiconductor
CW Continuous wave
DAC Digital-to-analog converter
dBc Decibels relative to the carrier
DFT Discrete Fourier transform
DSB Double sideband
DSL Digital subscriber line
DSP Digital signal processor
DSSS Direct sequence spread spectrum
DUT Device under test
DVB Digital video broadcasting
EDGE Enhanced data rate for GSM evolution
EVM Error vector magnitude
EWC Enhanced wireless consortium
FCC Federal Communications Commission
FHSS Frequency hopping spread spectrum
FM Frequency modulation
xi
xii ACRONYMS
fpBGA Fine-pitch ball grid array

FSK Frequency shift keying
GI Guard interval
GSM Global system for mobile communications
HBT Heterojunction bipolar transistor
HD Harmonic distortion
HPF High-pass filter
HPVGA High-pass variable gain amplifier
IDFT Inverse discrete Fourier transform
IF Intermediate frequency
IMD Intermodulation distortion
IO Input/output
IP Internet protocol
IP2 Second-order intermodulation product
IP3 Third-order intermodulation product
I/Q In-phase/Quadrature phase
ISI Intersymbol interference
ISM Industrial—scientific—medical
LINC Linear amplification using nonlinear components
LNA Low-noise amplifier
LO Local oscillator
LOFT Local oscillator feed-through
LOS Line of sight
LPCC Leadless package chip carrier
LPF Low-pass filter
MAC Media access control
MCS Modulation and coding scheme
MEMS Micro-electro mechanical systems
MIMO Multi-in multi-out
MIMO Multi-in multi-out
MISO Multi-in single-out
NLOS Nonline of sight
OFDM Orthogonal frequency division multiplexing
OOB Out of band
P1dB 1-dB compression point
PA Power amplifier
PAD Power amplifier driver
PAPR Peak-to-average power ratio
PAR Peak to-average ratio
PCB Printed circuit board
PD Phase detector
ACRONYMS xiii
PD Phase distortion
PDF Probability distribution function
PFD Phase-frequency detector
PGA Programmable gain amplifier
PHEMT Pseudomorphic high electron mobility transistor
PHY Physical layer
PLCP Physical layer convergence protocol
PLL Phase locked loop
PPDU PLCP protocol data unit
PPM Parts per million
PTAT Proportional-to-absolute temperature
QAM Quadrature amplitude modulation
QoS Quality of service
RMS Root mean square
RSSI Received signal strength indicator
Rx Receiver
SAW Surface acoustic wave
SDM Spatial division multiplexing
SiGe Silicon germanium
SIMO Single-in multi-out
SNDR Signal-to-noise plus distortion ratio
SNR Signal-to-noise ratio
SSB Single sideband
STA Station
TCP Transmission control protocol
TIA Transimpedance amplifier
TR Transmit—receive
TSSI Transmit signal strength indicator
Tx Transmitter
UNII Unlicensed national infrastructure for information
VCO Voltage-controlled oscillator
VNA Vector network analyzer
VOIP Voice over internet protocol
VSA Vector signal analyzer
WCDMA Wideband code division multiple access
WEP WLAN encryption protocol
WLAN Wireless local area network
XO Crystal oscillator
ZIF Zero intermediate frequency
CHAPTER 1
802.11 Flavors and
System Requirements
1.1 DEFINITION
What is a wireless local area network (WLAN)? A WLAN system, shown

in its most general form in Figure 1.1, consists of a network hardware back-
bone, along with a series of detached components. These detached compo-
nents may include computer desktops, computer laptops, personal digital as-
sistants (PDAs), cell phones, gaming systems, security cameras, printers,
and appliances as clients. Using radio-frequency (RF) technology,1 the
WLAN system would then allow the clients to access local area network re-
sources while physically being detached from this network. At the same
time, the clients are capable of communicating with one another (typically
indirectly and through access points rather than peer-to-peer networks)
while physically being detached from one another. A WLAN system can
transmit data, video, and/or audio.
A WLAN system may be deployed as a stand-alone network or in tandem
with a wired network. As compared to a wired network, a WLAN system
offers several advantages and suffers some disadvantages.
On the positive side, a WLAN system allows mobility and flexibility. For
existing infrastructures, especially those with high user density (hotel
rooms, apartment complexes, etc.), it offers the lowest cost and most flexi-
ble method of connectivity. Whereas it may be inexpensive to install cate-
gory 5 (CAT5) wiring for new buildings, to do so in an existing building is
quite costly and inconvenient. Given the cost of WLAN chipsets at the cur-
rent time, it would be much more cost effective to install a simple WLAN
system than to run wires through such structures. At the same time, even if
CAT5 wiring is installed, for example, in every room in a newly constructed
home, it is often not exactly “at the right place.” Wireless LAN would offer
1
Of course an alternative wireless technology such as infrared signaling may be used, but the
most common WLAN systems today utilize RF technology. As a result the term “WLAN” is
almost exclusively utilized to refer to WLAN communications utilizing RF technology.
Wireless LAN Radios: System Definition to Transistor Design. By Arya Behzad 1

Copyright © 2008 the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.
2 CHAPTER 1 802.11 FLAVORS AND SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
PDA host 20
laptop LAN
host 18 base station connection 36 laptop
(BS) or access host 26
point (AP) 12
LAN
WAN network connection 38
BS or
connection 42 hardware
AP 16
34
LAN cell phone

BS or connection 40 host 28
AP 14
PC host 32
PDA host 30
cell phone
host 22 PC host 24
Figure 1.1 Example of WLAN network displaying various associated nodes and backbone
network.
the flexibility of connectivity anywhere in the home, without an a priori re-

quirement to determine the precise locations of the network taps.
On the other hand, a WLAN system is typically never as secure as a ded-
icated (for example, T1) or even shared (for example, cable modem) wire
connection. The mere fact that the medium is shared by potentially many
users and no physical connection is required to “tap” into the network
makes the WLAN network more susceptible to “hacking” and “spoofing.”
At the same time, various research studies have shown that many WLAN
users fail to properly activate the proper encryption options on their access
points and thereby make themselves susceptible to hackers.
Recent developments in encryption technology and standards as well as
recent software drivers that simplify the installation process of a protected
WLAN clients and access points, however, have significantly improved the
situation as compared to the early days of WLAN history.
In terms of communication speed, also, WLAN networks are typically a
generation or so behind their wired LAN counterparts. This is due to the dif-
ficulties associated with the medium of communication (air). For example,
in the indoor environment these challenges include propagation losses
1.2 WLAN MARKET TRENDS 3
through the air medium and through walls, multipath caused by reflections
from objects and people, and interference due to other wireless communica-
tion devices and interferers such as microwave ovens.
It should have become apparent by now that neither a wireless network
nor a wired network is capable of providing all the desired characteristics
and amenities. Quite often, therefore, an “optimal” network is one that is
constructed of a wired LAN “backbone” and is complemented by a WLAN
network that would provide flexibility and reconfigurability.
1.2 WLAN MARKET TRENDS
We will spend a few paragraphs discussing the WLAN market trends. The
objective here is to put into perspective the phenomenal growth this market
has experienced while emphasizing the extremely competitive nature of this
market. Thousands of pages of analyst reports are published annually on
this subject and we will make no attempt to cover the details that are cov-
ered in such reports. Further the WLAN market conditions are quite fluid
and change almost quarterly, and therefore the absolute numbers (and possi-
bly even trends) may not hold in the future.2
Wireless LAN has been one of the fastest growing segments of the semi-
conductor market. Despite the slow sales growth (or even decline) of semi-
conductors for the early 2000 years the WLAN chipset market has grown
quite significantly in those years. As seen in Figure 1.2a, the number of
WLAN users has grown quite rapidly, especially in the home market. The
enterprise has been growing fairly significantly but not nearly as quickly as
the home market. The primary reason for this is the concern of the enter-
prise customer about security. In the early days of WLAN, a major news
item about a few University of California—Berkeley Computer Science stu-
dents breaking the fairly vulnerable 48-bit encrypted WLAN encryption
protocol (WEP) did not help the confidence level of the enterprise cus-
tomers either. By using 128-bit encryption and further enhancements to the
security protocols, those issues have been addressed by the standard now
(more on this topic later). Of course, the encryption techniques will be con-
tinuously updated and strengthened as issues are discovered and as the
hackers improve the sophistication of their techniques.
Quality of service (QOS) has also been an issue that has held back the
adoption of WLAN by the enterprise as well as certain home users. Certain
WLAN applications require a guaranteed maximum latency and would need
2
Unlike, hopefully, the technical discussions in this book which should hold “forever”!
Thousands
Home
Enterprise
(a)
2006 to 2007:
Market benefits from
high volume, a more
gradual decline in
unit prices,and
Units (millions)
sector consolidation
$ millions
2002 and 2003:

Volumes take off as
WLAN goes mass
market and starts to
invade enterprise
networks
Volume Market
(b)
2002: Severe price

declines due to
volume ramp-up and
maturity of 002.11b
2003 & 2004: Price

declines less severe
due to introduction
$
of new products with

enhanced multimode
and security features
2005 to 2007: Price

declines bottom out
due to already very
low prices. New,
higher-value
products emerge
ASPs Decline (%)
Figure 1.2 (a) WLAN growth trend in home and enterprise markets, (b) WLAN chipset vol-
ume growth chart, and (c) historical decline trend in chipset average selling price. (Sources:
lightreading.com, newsweek.com.)
4
1.2 WLAN MARKET TRENDS 5
to be prioritized over other types of network traffic. An example of such la-

tency-sensitive packets is voice-over-Internet protocol (VOIP) packets.
VOIP is the standard used to do telephony over an Internet protocol
(IP)–based wired or wireless LAN. The resolution and proper implementa-
tion of QOS on the WLAN networks would therefore accelerate the adop-
tion and sale of WLAN devices.
Figure 1.2b shows the growth of the 802.11 chipset volumes and the mar-
ket values extrapolated to the year 2007. The rapid growth of chipset vol-
umes is apparent in this figure and at first may look like an extraordinary
business opportunity! However, before trying to put a startup company to-
gether to address this market, one needs to review Figure 1.2c. This chart
shows the rapid decline in the average selling prices of the chipsets caused
by the increase in volume. This steep price drop can be attributed to many
factors, such as increase in the selling volumes, very high levels of integra-
tion, the numerous players in the market and the resultant competitive na-
ture of the business. In the past few years, the extreme competitive nature of
the business has caused many of the smaller and some of the larger players
to exit the market segment all together.
Figure 1.2c shows how the average selling prices (ASPs) have dropped
very quickly early on as the volumes were ramping up. This period was
followed by some price stabilization and then further reduction in prices.
The stabilization points correspond to times in the market in which the
chipset vendors started offering new features and were therefore able to
demand higher prices. This phenomenon temporarily reduces the erosion
of price in the WLAN chipset market. For example, in 2003 the steep de-
cline in prices was slowed by the introduction of the 802.11g standard,
which allowed for much higher data rates than the traditional 802.11b
standard.
Of course, eventually prices will continue their downward trend. It is
therefore critical for the chipset industry to keep on innovating and offering
newer features. This is necessary in order to be able to offer newer higher
margin products as the older ones become commodity items and decline in
their profit margins.
A factor that can affect and slow down the reduction in the average sell-
ing prices is the addition of new features and new building blocks within the
chipsets. So the addition of such blocks into the chips allows the manufac-
turers of the chips to demand higher prices at the same time the end cus-
tomer would have a lower bill-of-materials cost.
In summary, this steep price decline and the extreme competitive nature
of the WLAN chipset market dictate one of the most important WLAN
chipset design requirements: design for low cost. Design for low cost, in
turn, translates into design in the lowest possible cost technology, highest
levels of integration, smallest possible die size, low packaging and testing
cost, and high yields. Since not all of these criteria can be simultaneously
satisfied, designers will have to make complex trade-offs to come up with
the lowest possible final product cost. Combined with other product require-
ments such as time to market and system performance, the designers are re-
quired to make many difficult choices early on in the design that could quite
likely result in a product being successful or a dud.
These trade-offs will be discussed in much more detail in the subsequent
chapters.
There are various WLAN standards, such as HyperLAN and the Institute
of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 802.11, but at this time, in
the United States, Europe, the Far East, as well as elsewhere in world, the
802.11 standard has become the standard of choice for WLAN and will
therefore be emphasized in this book.
1.3 HISTORY OF 802.11
In 1990, the IEEE 802 executive committee established the 802.11 working
group to create a WLAN standard. The standard specified an operating fre-
quency in the 2.4-GHz ISM (industrial, scientific, and medical) band and
began laying the groundwork for a cutting-edge technology. After seven
years, in 1997, the group approved IEEE 802.11 as the world’s first WLAN
standard with data rates of 1 and 2 Mbps. Having great foresight, the execu-
tive committee predicted the need for a more robust and faster technology.
Therefore, immediately, the committee began work on another 802.11 ex-
tension that would satisfy such future demands. Within 24 months, the
working group approved two project authorization requests for higher rate
physical (PHY) layer extensions to 802.11. The two extensions were de-
signed to work with the existing 802.11 medium access control (MAC) lay-
er, with one being the IEEE 802.11a—5 GHz and the other IEEE 802.11b—
2.4 GHz.
The IEEE 802.11 has gained acceptance over competing standards such
as HyperLAN and will be the emphasis of this book. The 802.11 is a specif-
ic standard that defines the MAC and PHY layers of a WLAN. The original
802.11 standard is a MAC standard plus a low data rate PHY which sup-
ports only 1- and 2-Mbps data rates. This first version of the standard oper-
ates at the 2.4-GHz ISM band and allows the vendors to choose between a
direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) and a frequency hopping spread
spectrum (FHSS) implementations. As mentioned above, 802.11b is a PHY
extension to the original 802.11 standard. It also operates at the 2.40-GHz
1.3 HISTORY OF 802.11 7
band and allows for higher data rates of 5.5 and 11 Mbps. It uses a tech-
nique known as complementary code keying (CCK).
The 802.11a is another PHY extension to the 802.11 standard. It operates
at the 5-GHz unlicensed national infrastructure for information (UNII) band
and allows for data rates of 6–54 Mbps. It uses a technique known as or-
thogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM; this technique will be
discussed in much more detail in later chapters).
The 802.11g was the next extension to the 802.11 standard. It operates at
the 2.4-GHz ISM band and allows for data rates ranging from 1 to 54 Mbps.
The 1- and 2-Mbps rates are operated in the DSSS mode whereas the 51–2 - and
11-Mbps rates are operated in CCK mode. Additionally, rates at 6 to 54
Mbps are operated in OFDM mode. The 802.11g standard borrows the
OFDM technique and data rates from the 802.11a standard but operates at
the 2.4-GHz ISM band. It can therefore operate at very high data rates while
being backward compatible with the 802.11b standard.
In addition to these standards, which have already been approved, the
802.11 committee has “working groups” to evolve and enhance the stan-
dard. Here are some examples:
앫 802.11e Tasked to improve QOS. The inclusion of a QOS protocol

is essential for tasks that require low latency such as VOIP.
앫 802.11i Tasked to improve encryption. A reliable and hard-to-break
encryption technique is essential for the wide adoption of WLAN by
the enterprise customer.
앫 802.11f Would allow for an interaccess protocol for easy communi-
cation between access points.
앫 802.11h Allows for dynamic frequency selection, and transmit pow-
er control. By utilizing dynamic frequency selection, interference be-
tween various users would be reduced, and therefore the effective ca-
pacity of the cell and therefore the network would increase. Further,
by utilizing transmit power control, the minimum required transmit
power would be utilized in communication between the access points
and the mobile units. This would also reduce cochannel interference
and therefore increase the network capacity.
앫 802.11n Allows for multichannel and higher data rate 802.11 in the
2.4- and 5-GHz bands. As of the date of the publication of this book, a
“pre-n” standard has been approved by the IEEE, but the final draft
has not yet been ratified. The pre-n standard utilizes optional higher
order constellations, wider bandwidths, and multi-in, multi-out
(MIMO) techniques to dramatically increase the data rate, effective
range, and reliability of the WLAN. The 802.11n standard is expected
to be fully backward compatible with the 802.11a and 802.11g stan-

dards. We will briefly discuss 802.11n in more detail in Chapter 7.
802.11: b, a, OR g?
The three commonly known versions of the 802.11 PHY are 802.11a,
802.11b, and 802.11g. As described earlier, the 802.11a and 802.11g stan-
dards offer much higher speed that 802.11b. However, the advent of
802.11a and g will not necessarily result in the demise of 802.11b in the im-
mediate future. There are applications that would require the lowest power
consumption and/or the lowest system cost, and in such cases a stand-alone
802.11b solution may still be the best solution in the immediate future. On
the other hand, most system vendors have migrated to 802.11g solutions,
which are backward compatible with 802.11b and allow the higher data
rates. As the cost of 802.11g solutions drop and their power consumption re-
duces, this trend will accelerate.
As an alternative to 802.11b and g, if the operator requires a higher data
rate, higher user density, and network capacity, he or she would have to
choose 802.11a because of the availability of a much wider spectrum at the
5-GHz band and the higher data rates offered by 802.1a.
For longer ranges and higher data rate applications the operator would
probably choose 802.11g. The 802.11g offers the added benefit of being
backward compatible with 802.11b, which has the largest existing base.
Many applications will probably eventually move to a multiband a/g so-
lution, which would by definition also be backward compatible with
802.11b solutions. This will happen as the cost of multiband solutions drops
as a result of further integration and possibly other factors.
Table 1.1 qualitatively shows the advantages and disadvantages of the
existing PHY standards. The highlights are listed below.
Currently, there is a much larger existing base for the 802.11b solution.
Of course, since 802.11g systems are backward compatible with 802.11b,
Table 1.1 Relative Advantages and Disadvantages of 802.11a, b, and g

Existing Data Lack of Spectrum Power System
Standard Base Rate Range Interferers Availability Consumption Cost
802.11b ++++ + ++++ + + ++++ ++++
802.11a + ++++ +++ +++ +++ ++ ++
802.11g ++ ++++ ++++ + + +++ +++
1.4 802.11: b, a, OR g? 9
they would be able to take advantage of the 802.11b existing base at lower
data rates.
In terms of data rate, the 802.11a and g have an advantage, with rates up
to 54 Mbps.
In terms of range of operation, the 802.11b and g have the advantage be-
cause they operate at the lower frequency of 2.4 GHz. Since typically prop-
agation losses are lower at lower frequencies, 802.11b and g systems would
be able to operate over longer distances as compared to their 802.11a coun-
terpart for a given transmit power and receiver sensitivity. The free-space
loss for cases in which the receiver-to-transmitter distance is much larger
than the wavelength is given by the relation
4 ␲d 4␲df
冢冣 = 冢ᎏ
c 冣
2 2
L= ᎏ
␭
where L is the propagation loss, d is the distance between the transmitter

and the receiver, ␭ is the wavelength of the RF signal, f is the frequency of
the signal, and c is the speed of light. Antenna gains, absorption losses, re-
flective losses, and several other factors are not taken into account in the
above equation. An indoor environment is much more complex to model or
predict than this formula suggests. The interested reader can refer to many
publications on this topic.
This simple equation, however, does show the relation between the trans-
mission frequency and the propagation losses. For example, at a distance of
10 m in free space and with the assumptions listed above, a 802.11g system
operating at 2.4 GHz would experience 60 dB of propagation attenuation,
whereas an 802.11a system operating at 5.8 GHz would experience 68 dB of
propagation losses.
The 802.11a has the upper hand when it comes to lack of interferers. This
is due to the smaller existing base at the 5-GHz band as well as the wider
available spectrum. Additionally, there are far fewer nonwireless LAN sys-
tems operating at the 5-GHz band. Such interferers include microwave
ovens, security cameras, and cordless phones.
From a spectrum availability point of view, the 802.11a has several hun-
dreds of megahertz of bandwidth available to it (although the exact frequen-
cies would depend on the country of operation). In most countries, on the
other hand, there is no more than 100 MHz available for users in the
802.11b or g bands.
From a power consumption point of view, 802.11b would win against the
other standards. This is because it utilizes the simplest modulation tech-
nique among the three and therefore does not require a high performance ra-
dio front end or a sophisticated signal processing baseband. In particular, an

802.11b modulated signal has a small peak to average ratio, and therefore
one can use higher efficiency (but lower linearity) power amplifiers on the
transmit side.
From a system cost point of view, currently 802.11b offers the lowest
system cost. However, the difference in the cost between 802.11g systems
and 802.11b systems has been reducing quickly, and today most users are
willing to pay the slightly higher cost of an 802.11g system for the signifi-
cant gains in throughput.
As an interesting marketing point, the number of 802.11g units shipped
in The first quarter of 2004 surpassed the shipped 802.11b solutions in that
same quarter.
1.5 802.11b STANDARD
As shown in Figure 1.3a, there are a total of 11 designated channels in the

802.11b/g band in the United States. These channels reside in the 2.4-GHz
ISM band. However, as shown in Figure 1.3b, there are only three nonover-
lapping channels that can operate under the 802.11b/g standard. Within a
given cell, if users operate simultaneously on overlapping channels, the in-
terchannel interference would increase, and the overall channel capacity
would decrease. The maximum allowed transmit power in the United States
for the 802.11b/g standard is 30 dBm or 1 W.3 This is quite a high transmit
power, and most 802.11b/g solutions today operate at significantly lower
transmit powers (in the range of 15 to 22 dBm transmit power). This is be-
cause the 2.4-GHz ISM band is adjacent to Federal Communications Com-
mission (FCC)–restricted bands. So when operating in the lowest and high-
est 802.11b/g channels, often the FCC spectral mask requirements
associated with these restricted bands is violated before the 802.11b/g mask
is violated. Clearly the more stringent of the two masks would set the maxi-
mum allowable transmit power.
Worldwide, there are a total of 14 total channels allocated to the
802.11b/g standard operating at the frequency range of 2.40 to 2.58 GHz.
The channels are 5 MHz apart. In the United States channels 1, 6, and 11 are
typically used to minimize overlap and therefore reduce interference be-
tween operating devices. However, as an example, it is possible for a very
high power transmitter operating in channel 1 to have an impact on the
3
Note that this is the average maximum transmit power. Due to potential for large peak-to-
average ratio in an OFDM signal, for example, the peak instantaneous power can be signifi-
cantly more than this.
1.5 802.11b STANDARD 11
2401 2412 2417 2422 2427 2432 2437 2442 2447 2452 2457 2462 2473
(a)
CH7 CH6 CH11
2401 2412 2423 2426 2437 2448 2451 2462 2473

(b)
Figure 1.3 IEEE 802.11b/g channel allocations. Note the overlap channels (a) as well as
the three distinct (nonoverlap) channels (b). The x-axis represents frequency in MHz.
throughput of channel 11. Different countries have differing regulations that

limit the use of certain channels for 802.11b/g in those countries. For exam-
ple, in Europe, channels 1 through 13 can be utilized for 802.11b/g opera-
tion but at a maximum transmit power of 100 mW. This is done in order to
reduce the interference with other ISM band devices.
As mentioned earlier, the original 802.11 standard only allows for 1- and
2-Mbps data rates. In doing so it allows the use of a technique known as
DSSS. This technique spreads the data over a wide bandwidth to gain im-
munity to interferers and multipath reflections. The technique is similar to
what is used for the IS-95 cellular code division multiple-access (CDMA)
standard.
As an alternative the original standard allows for a FHSS technique. This
technique is also designed to improve the immunity of the signal to interfer-
ers and multipath channel reflections but, as the name suggests, relies on the
carrier frequency to hop around at a pseudorandom center frequency basis.
The FHSS technique is similar to what is used in the Bluetooth (BT) stan-
dard.
The 802.11b extension to the standard allows for the introduction of
higher data rates of 5.5 and 11 Mbps. The 802.11b relies on CCK, a distinct
nonsystematic block code which offers both spreading as well as a minimal
amount of coding gain. In a sense it can be viewed as a special case of
DSSS.
As is typical for any system and any modulation, the signal-to-noise
(SNR) requirement for the higher data rates is higher than those for the low-
er data rates. As such the standard requires a minimum system sensitivity of
–80 dBm for the 1-Mbps data rate and a minimum system sensitivity of –76
dBm for the 11 Mbps. However, today, most systems are capable of deliver-
ing much better sensitivity numbers than the standard requires. A state-of-
the-art system today can achieve about –98 and –91 dBm “chip sensitivity,”
respectively, for the 1- and 11-Mbps data rates. The system sensitivity is
typically 1 to 2dB worse than the chip sensitivity for the 802.11b operation
due to losses of front-end components such as baluns, filters, switches, and
board traces at 2.4 GHz.
Table 1.2 summarizes the modulation types and the sensitivity numbers
for the various 802.11b data rates.
The 802.11b standard is, in principle and as compared to 802.11g and es-
pecially 802.11a, fairly easy to implement. The standard achieves a maxi-
mum of 11 Mbps over an equivalent noise bandwidth of 11 to 15 MHz de-
pending on the implementation. This results in a comparatively low spectral
efficiency of <1 bit/s/Hz. As a reference, note that a maximum spectral effi-
ciency of > 3 bits/s/Hz is achieved for the 802.11g and 802.11a standards.
Of course, in general, wireless communications are limited to much lower
spectral efficiencies than those of their wireline counterparts due to the
much inferior communication medium (channel). For example, digital sub-
scriber line (DSL) systems, gigabit Ethernet, or cable systems can achieve
spectral efficiencies in excess of 10 bits/s/Hz.
Additionally, the 802.1b modulation has a low peak-to-average power ra-
tio (PAPR). This is by no means a constant-envelope modulated signal (like
that of Bluetooth, for example), but neither does it have very large PAPR as-
sociated with the OFDM coding utilized in the 802.11a and 802.11g stan-
dards. The low PAPR characteristic of the 802.11b standard makes the mod-
ulation somewhat immune to nonlinearities in the signal path. This
characteristic in particular makes the implementation of the power amplifier
(PA) in the transmit path much simpler than those required for the 802.11a
and g standards.
Table 1.2 IEEE 802.11b/g Allowed Data Rates, Associated

Modulation Types, and Required Sensitivities
Sensitivity State-of-the-Art
Data Rate Requirement Chip Sensitivity
(Mbps) Modulation (dBm) (dBm)
1 D-BPSK –80 –98
2 D-QPSK –96
5.5 CCK –93
11 CCK –76 –91
Note: Obtained state-of-the-art sensitivity levels are also reported.
1.6 802.11a CHANNEL ALLOCATION 13
1.6 802.11a CHANNEL ALLOCATION
As mentioned earlier the 802.11g channel allocation is identical to that of

802.11b (Fig. 1.3). As such, there are only three nonoverlapping channels
available to the users.
One of the advantages of the 802.11a standard as compared to the
802.11g standard becomes apparent in Figure 1.4: There are currently a total
of 12 “nonoverlapping” channels available in the United States with propos-
als at the FCC to open up even more spectrum in the 5-GHz band as part of
an expanded unlicensed National Information Infrastructure (NII) spectrum.
The large number of channels available in the 802.11a band allow for much
higher overall cell and network capacity and less interchannel interference.
As can be seen in Figure 1.5, the statement about the 802.11a channels be-
ing nonoverlapping is not completely correct. The spectrum associated with
the information content of each channel is designed to be nonoverlapping
with its adjacent channels. However, because of imperfect filtering as well as
nonlinearities and spectral regrowth in the system, there is a limited amount
of spectral leakage from each channel which leaks into its adjacent channels.
The magnitude of this leakage is highly regulated by the spectral mask re-
quirements of the standard. The performance of the system in the presence of
adjacent channel interferers is also regulated by the standard (more on this
later).
In the United States the maximum allowed transmit power for the
802.11a standard is dependent on the subband (Fig. 1.5). In the lower, mid,
and higher 802.11a subbands, the maximum transmit power is limited to 16,
5150 51705180 5200 5220 5240 5260 5280 5300 5320 5350
Lower and mid U.S. 802.11a bands
5725 5745 5765 5785 5805 5825

Upper and mid U.S. 802.11a bands
Figure 1.4 Detail of IEEE 802.11a channel allocations in U.S. (total 12 nonoverlapping
channels). The lower, mid, and upper bands are shown. Note that no overlapping channels
are allowed.
23, and 29 dBm, respectively. The higher subband is primarily intended for
long-range outdoor communications.
Various countries allocate different frequency bands for the 802.11a stan-
dard. In general, 802.11a systems around the world (non-U.S.) operate in
the 4.92- to 5.70-GHz spectrum (Fig. 1.5). Recent proposals have world-
wide channels operating as high as 5.845 GHz. For various countries, not
only the dedicated frequency channels but also the maximum transmit pow-
er per channel as well as various other requirements vary. The interested
reader should refer to specific regulations of a given country.
1.7 802.11a AND 802.11g: OFDM MAPPING
The 802.11a and g utilize a technique known as orthogonal frequency divi-

sion multiplexing, or OFDM. Conceptually, OFDM has been around for a
long time. It has been used in a variety of applications for years. These in-
clude such applications as digital video broadcasting (DVB) and digital sub-
scriber line (DSL). OFDM does require a significant amount of signal pro-
cessing horsepower, and such horsepower until recently would consume
quite a bit of power consumption. Clearly a high power consumption
chipset would not be very suitable for portable applications.
Recent advancements in process technology and also low power design
techniques have enabled a dramatic reduction in power consumption of
OFDM-based modems. These modems are therefore now suitable for many
portable applications such as computer laptops. The push for reducing the
power consumption of OFDM-based modems, of course, continues. Further
reductions in power consumptions are enabling the integration of WLAN
systems in some of the most power-sensitive consumer application gadgets.
OFDM provides a good degree of immunity to multipath fading, which is
typically a major problem for high speed wireless communication, especial-
ly in an indoor environment. In order to comprehend the concept of multi-
path fading and its impact on high speed communications in an indoor envi-
ronment, a brief discussion of the topic is presented in the following section.
1.7.1 Multipath Fading

Multipath propagation, or in short multipath, occurs when signals reflect off
of various objects and even people and add constructively or destructively at
the receiver antenna. When the signals add destructively, they can signifi-
cantly impact the quality of the link. This can result in a significant reduc-
tion in the throughput of the system. Figure 1.6 depicts multipath when a di-
rect line-of-sight (LOS) path does exist. Figure 1.7 depicts a scenario in
1.7 802.11a AND 802.11g: OFDM MAPPING 15
U.S.
30 20 30 MHz 20 20 20 MHz
29dBm (800mW)
23dBm (200mW)
16dBm (40mW)
5180 5320 5745 5805 MHz
Worldwide (non-U.S.)
4920 4980 5040 5080 5500 5700 MHz
Figure 1.5 Associated power levels for U.S. IEEE 802.11a subbands. The additional world-
wide 802.11a subbands are also shown. Note that, although the main channels are nonover-
lapping, the channels can interfere with their adjacent channels (as shown) due to inadequate
filtering or spectral regrowth.
Access Point
→
a
(3)
(2) (1)
(1)
Scatterer Scatterer →
r
(3)
(4) φ
(2)
(4)
Station
(a) (b)
Figure 1.6 (a) Multipath in presence of a line-of-sight signal. (b) Vector space representa-
tion.
Base Station
(3)
(1)
(2) (1)
Scatterer Scatterer Scatterer (3)
(4) (2)
(4)
(1’) (2’)
(3’) →
a
Wireless Station
(a) (b)
Figure 1.7 (a) Multipath response in absence of a LOS signal. (b) Vector space representa-
tion. Note that the vector magnitudes have been scaled 2 : 1 as compared to Figure 1.6 to
simplify visualization.
which a direct LOS does not exist. Clearly, in the latter case, the resultant
received signal can be quite small.
Multipath fading is very much environment specific but typically does
not exceed about 20 dB in an indoor environment with carrier frequencies in
the few GHz range. As described above, multipath is a phenomenon caused
by the multiple arrivals of the transmitted signal to the receiver due to re-
flections off of “scatterers.” The gain and phase of these reflections can be
modeled as being somewhat random. Multipath is usually much more of a
problem if a direct LOS path does not exist between the transmitter and the
receiver. In this scenario, the change in the magnitude of the received vector
as compared to the mean value of the magnitude of the received vector is
small, resulting in a Ricean distribution (Figure 1.6). Figure 1.6b shows the
vector space representation of the multipath reception in the presence of a
LOS path. The vector represents the resultant vector from the LOS path (1)
and the multipath receptions (2), (3), and (4). The magnitude of vector rep-
resents the mean value of the possible resultant vectors. The area of the cir-
cle indicates the 50% contour for this Ricean distribution.4 It is clear from
this figure that a multipath response may not affect the decision variable sig-
nificantly in such a scenario.
4
Ricean and Rayleigh fading models are the most common fading models applied to analyze
propagation in indoor environments. The names of these fading models are derived from
their underlying probability distribution function (PDF) statistics. A Rayleigh fading typical-
ly occurs if there are several indirect propagation paths between the transmitter and the re-
Figure 1.7a displays the multipath channel in the absence of an LOS path.
Figure 1.7b shows the vector space representation of such a response. Vec-
tors (2), (3), and (4) represent the reflected signals at the receiver. Vector (1)
represents the intended LOS signal which has been interrupted and reflected
multiple times by the scatterers. Vectors (1⬘), (2⬘), (3⬘), and (4⬘) represent
the vectors used to find the resultant vector, a. It is clear that vector a is very
small in magnitude, resulting in a high probability of error at the slicer. For
large number of scatterers, the channel can be modeled to have a Rayleigh
distribution, with about 10% probability of a resultant vector with a magni-
tude less than half the magnitude of the mean. Note that in this case the
mean ±25% contour in the vector space is not a circle because of the asym-
metry of the Rayleigh density function about its mean value.
In a typical indoor environment (office, home, etc.) root-mean-square
(RMS) delay spreads5 of 50 to 75 ns can be observed. The worst case RMS
delay spreads in these environments can be as large as 150 ns. In order to es-
tablish a traditional high data rate communication in such an environment, a
very high symbol rate corresponding to a short symbol duration would be
required. The larger the value of the RMS delay spread as compared to the
symbol duration, the more intersymbol interference (ISI) would be generat-
ed. ISI can be corrected in the digital domain, but very high speed and typi-
cally high power consumption time-domain equalizers would be needed.
With an understanding of multipath, the benefits of OFDM coding can
now be discussed in more detail. OFDM coding is a technique that can be
quite powerful in reducing the effects of multipath on high speed communi-
cations.
With OFDM, the transmitted data are modulated onto multiple subcarri-
ers. This is accomplished by modulating the subcarriers’ phase and ampli-
tude. As such, the original high data rate stream is split into multiple lower
rate streams and then mapped on to the available subcarriers (which are
multiples of a given frequency) and then combined together using an in-
ceiver with none of the paths being a dominant path (i.e., with distinctively larger magnitude
than the others). In this situation, the received signal is comprised of the sum of multiple in-
dependent random variables and at the limit can be approximated as having a Gaussian distri-
bution function. In reality, Rayleigh fading is really a worst case in which no path dominates.
However, since Gaussian PDFs are very well understood and can easily be modeled mathe-
matically, they present a convenient mathematical tool for analyzing the worst case propaga-
tion characteristics. On the other hand, Rayleigh fading typically applies if a dominant prop-
agation path (such as a LOS path) between the transmitter and the receiver exists. In this case
the PDF is “centered” around the magnitude set by the dominant propagation path.
5
RMS delay spread is defined from the characteristics of the delay spectrum of a stochastic
process. It can be thought of as an indication of the delay between the earliest arriving “rays”
and the latest arriving rays.
verse fast Fourier transform (FFT) operation. In creating N parallel transmit

streams, the bandwidth of each stream is reduced by a factor N that can be
selected in such a way that the RMS delay spread of the channel is much
less than the symbol period. This results in a significant reduction in the ISI.
A well-designed OFDM system does not therefore require a time-domain
equalizer.
The transformations utilized by OFDM are the discrete Fourier transform
(DFT) and the inverse discrete Fourier transform (IDFT). The orthogonality
of the OFDM signal is obtained through the use of multiples of the subcarri-
er frequency over an integer cycle which is an inherent property of the DFT
and IDFT transformations.
In Figure 1.8 a single subcarrier is displayed in the frequency domain.
The OFDM signal is constructed by the summation of multiples of such sin-
gle subcarriers, as shown in Figure 1.8 (this is an example with five subcar-
riers). It is clear from this figure that the subcarriers are allowed to have
overlap not only with their adjacent subcarrier but also virtually with all of
the other subcarriers.
For those familiar with the CDMA technique utilized in many of today’s
cellular phones, the following analogy may be useful. The construction of
an OFDM signal with multiple sinusoidal subcarriers is somewhat similar to
the construction of a CDMA signal using orthogonal Walsh codes (Walsh
codes are a family of orthogonal codes which are based on “square waves”
rather than sinusoids). The main difference between CDMA and OFDM is
that in the case of CDMA the orthogonal Walsh codes are primarily used as
a means for multiple access,6 whereas the orthogonal sinusoids in the
OFDM coding are primarily used to gain immunity to multipath.
The fact that subcarrier overlaps are allowed enables the spectral effi-
ciency of an OFDM-coded signal to be increased. It is easy to see that with
no subcarrier overlap the same number of subcarriers (which is related to
the amount of data being communicated) would occupy a much wider spec-
trum. This would clearly reduce the spectral efficiency. This concept is
shown graphically in Figure 1.9 in a simplified diagram.
The obvious question that may arise is the potential interference caused by
the overlapping of the subcarriers. However, due to the inherent orthogonal-
ity of the subcarriers of the OFDM signal, the peak of each subcarrier occurs
at the null of all other subcarriers, as seen in Figure 1.8. Under ideal condi-
tions, this would mean that the subcarriers do not interfere with one another.
Unfortunately, under real-world conditions, various impairments could
cause the perfect orthogonality of the subcarriers to be violated. These in-
6
Note that CDMA also provides immunity to multipath due to the spreading of the signal.
f f
Figure 1.8 Construction of OFDM signal from its individual components (subcarriers).
Note the tight “packing” of the subcarriers and the spectral efficiency achieved. Also note
that each subcarrier’s peak occurs when the other subcarriers are at a null.
clude impairments such as phase noise, quadrature imbalances, distortion,

and uncorrected frequency offsets. The location of each subcarrier’s peak
would shift relative to the other subcarriers in such a way that the peak of
one subcarrier would no longer be aligned with the null of the other subcar-
riers. Such impairments would give rise to “intersubcarrier interference.”
These impairments and their impact on the OFDM signal and the overall
system will be studied in great detail in Chapter 3.
As any good engineer would guess, an OFDM-coded signal could not
have all these great properties without some trade-offs.
Probably the biggest “difficulty” with using OFDM-coded data is that it
tends to generate very large peak-to-average ratio (PAR) signals. The large
f
(a)
Increase in spectral efficiency
f
(b)
Figure 1.9 Increasing the spectral efficiency of the modulation by using the orthogonal
properties of the OFDM signal and packing the subcarriers and their associated data content
closer to one another.
PARs significantly complicate the design of the radio and the mixed-signal
blocks. The signal path will have to be designed with much more severe lin-
earity constraints than traditional non-OFDM modulations. In particular, on
the transmit signal path, the design of the power amplifier becomes quite
challenging. Not only is designing high linearity power amplifiers (required
by OFDM modulation) quite challenging, but such amplifiers have much
worse efficiencies than their nonlinear counterparts.
The topic of the high PAR OFDM-modulated signal and its implications
on the power amplifier design will be covered in more detail in Chapter 3.
Now that the general concept of OFDM has been introduced, some of the
specifics of 802.11a/g OFDM coding will be discussed.
The 802.11a/g OFDM signal is constructed from 52 total subcarriers, as
shown in Figure 1.10. These subcarriers are indexed from –26 to +26, with
the zeroth subcarrier eliminated. Out of the 52 subcarriers, 48 are dedicated
to carrying the desired data (payload), and 4 of the subcarriers are designat-
ed with the task of carrying the “pilot” information.
The subcarrier index numbers for the pilots are –21, –7, 7, and 21. The
pilot subcarriers are always modulated in binary phase shift keying (BPSK)7
format, which is a very simple but robust modulation. The pilot tones are
primarily used to help establish a robust “link” before the reception of the
desired data (payload) can begin. As such they allow the receiver to set the
proper gain, track and correct the carrier frequency offsets, adjust and cor-
rect the analog-to-digital conversion (ADC) sampling frequency offsets,
and so on. If these tasks are not done properly, the entire packet is likely to
be lost, and the effective throughput of the link is significantly reduced. The
BPSK modulation, due to its inherent simplicity, is quite robust to various
analog and channel impairments such as multipath distortion, phase noise,
and quadrature imbalances. This is the reason for transmitting the pilot sub-
carriers in BPSK format.
The 802.11a/g OFDM subcarriers are spaced 312.5 kHz apart and occupy
an overall channel bandwidth of 16.25 MHz,8 which occupies a baseband
bandwidth of –8.125 to +8.125 MHz. The zeroth subcarrier has been elimi-
nated in the 802.11a/g standard and is not used as a pilot or payload subcar-
rier. This fact has very important implications in the choice and design of
the radio architectures used for 802.11a/g solutions. This topic will be dis-
cussed in detail later in the book.
The channel-to-channel spacing in the 802.11a standard is 20 MHz. In
the 802.11g standard this spacing is set to 25 MHz. The difference between
7
BPSK is the simplest form of the phase shift keying (PSK) modulation family. It is also the
same as the simplest form of a quadrature amplitude modulation or QAM-2.
8
52 subcarriers × 312.5 kHz/subcarrier = 16.25 MHz.
1.8 802.11a/g: DATA RATES 21
–8.125 –.312 .312 8.125 MHz
–26 –1 +1 +26 Subcarrier Index
Figure 1.10 Construction of IEEE 802.11a/g OFDM signal from 48 data and 4 pilot subcar-
riers.
the occupied modulation bandwidth (16.25 MHz) and the channel-to-chan-

nel spacing is used to reduce the effects of adjacent channel interference
which occur due to imperfections in the transmitter and the receiver.
1.8 802.11a/g: DATA RATES
The various data rates allowed in the 802.11a/g OFDM mode are shown in
Table 1.3. As can be seen, the data rates range from 6 to 54 Mbps. The data
rates are varied from the highest to the lowest rates by changing one or both
of the following modulation-related parameters: (a) modulation order and
(b) coding rate.
The modulation order is the primary tool used to adjust the data rate for
802.11a/g. At the higher order modulations, for a given transmit power and
with everything else being the same, the spacing between the neighboring
constellation points on a constellation diagram is less than those of lower or-
der modulations. This makes the modulation much more susceptible to im-
Table 1.3 802.11a/g Data Rates, Modulation Types, Coding Rates, and Required
Sensitivity Levels Set by Standard
Sensitivity State-of-the-Art
Data Rate Requirement Chip Sensitivity
(Mbps) Modulation Code Rate (dBm) (dBm)a
1
6 BPSK –2 –82 –94
9 BPSK –3 –81 –92
4
1
12 QPSK –2 –79 –90
18 QPSK –3
4 –77 –87
1
24 QAM-16 –2 –74 –84
36 QAM-16 –3 –70 –82
4
2
48 QAM-64 –
3 –66 –76
54 QAM-64 –3 –65 –74
4
Note: Representative state-of-the-art sensitivity levels are also specified.

a
Using hard Viterbi decoding can improve the sensitivity of higher order modulations by as much as 2.5
dB.
pairments such as circuit noise, phase noise, and in-phase/quadrature phase

(I/Q) imbalance.
The code rate determines the amount of redundancy and hence robust-
ness built into the modulation. The closer the coding rate to unity, the less
the amount of redundancy built in, and the higher the data rate (the data are
not “wasted” for the sake of redundancy).
The coding rate is another tool utilized to adjust the data rate. Typically,
however, the change in data rates as a result of a change in the coding rate is
much smaller than that of changing the modulation order. This is because cod-
ing rates much larger than 6–5 do not provide enough redundancy to be useful
and are therefore not typically used in practice. Several examples of changing
the data rate by utilizing various coding rates are shown in Table 1.3.
In a real system, the control of the actual data rate selected by the link is
done through the media access controller. The goal of MAC is to establish
the fastest (but reliable) link possible. As such, it typically starts at the high-
est data rate and tries to establish a robust link. If it fails to do so, it will drop
the rate to a lower rate and retry. It will continue this process until it estab-
lishes a link or determines that no link can be established. Detailed discus-
sions of the MAC layer are beyond the scope of this book and the interested
reader can refer to the references.
The IEEE 802.11a/g standards require any system that claims compatibil-
ity to the standard to be able to maintain certain minimum sensitivity levels
(ranging from –65 to –82 dBm for the various data rates). The minimum re-
quired sensitivity level by the standard for the various data rates is listed in
Table 1.3. Today’s systems can significantly outperform the specifications
for sensitivity which have been set by the standard. Table 1.3 also shows ex-
amples of the capabilities of today’s state-of-the-art integrated solutions re-
ferred to the input of the chips. In general, the performance of the state-of-
the-art solutions is about 10 dB superior to those required by the standard. It
is important to note that several assumptions have been made in specifying
the sensitivity of the state-of-the-art solutions: (a) the sensitivity numbers
specified are referred to the chip input (i.e., the board losses, which can range
from 1 to 3 dB are not accounted for); (b) no “external” (nonintegrated) low
noise amplifiers (LNAs) are assumed in front of the receiver chip; and (c)
hard Viterbi decoding is assumed for the baseband section of the receiver.9
It is interesting to note the inverse relationship between the data rates and
the minimum sensitivity of the various modes of operation shown in Table
9
A soft Viterbi decoder would improve the performance numbers specified by as much as 2.5
dB for the higher data rates as compared to the numbers shown in Table 1.3. It will improve the
sensitivity for the lower data rates marginally, however, since at the lower data rates the sensi-
tivity is often limited by the problem of “detection” (i.e., whether there is a packet present).
1.8 802.11a/g: DATA RATES 23
1.3. As the data rates are increased (through increasing modulation order or
by using higher coding rates), the minimum sensitivity level suffers. Given
the explanation earlier, this should be rather obvious and is related to the
larger SNR required by the higher data rates. In other words, as the data rate
increases, a higher received power level is required in order to be able to re-
ceive the signal (assuming noise levels stay constant). The absolute level of
the SNR required for each data rate is dependent on various factors (soft
versus hard Viterbi decoding as an example) but is in all cases higher than
that of a lower data rate (all else being equal).
Although not shown in Table 1.3, it is a similar situation on the higher
end of the power range. The 802.11a/g standards do specify the minimum
high end power rate that the receiver should be able to receive (–30 dBm).
However, unlike the minimum power level requirements, at the high end the
power levels are not specific to each data rate. In reality, though, the higher
data rates are much more susceptible to “high power impairments” such as
nonlinearities in the receiver (and transmitter). So the receiver would quite
likely be able to tolerate much higher receiver power levels for a 6-Mbps
link than a 54-Mbps link. This should be obvious by considering the fact
that high power impairments such as nonlinearities cause the constellation
points on a constellation diagram to deviate from their ideal point and get
closer to the neighboring constellation points. Since for a given transmit
power the spacing between the constellation points on a high order modula-
tion is larger than that of a low order modulation, the low order modulation
would be able to handle much more nonlinearities before it causes an error.
As a side note, given our knowledge of the 802.11a/g and that the dura-
tion of each symbol is 4 ␮s, we should now be able to calculate each one of
the data rates listed in Table 1.3. For example, the 54-Mbps data rate can be
calculated as follows:
48 (data subcarriers) × 6 (bits/symbol for QAM-64)

× 3–4 (code rate) × 1–4 (␮s) = 54 Mbps
For the 6-Mbps data rate
48 (data subcarriers) × 1 (bits/symbol for BPSK)

× 1–2 (code rate) × 1–4 (␮s) = 6 Mbps
It is important to make one final point on Table 1.3. For 802.11g, this table
only shows the OFDM-related rates. As mentioned earlier, 802.11g is back-
ward compatible with 802.11b and as such is capable of operating at all the
lower data rates (11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps) at which 802.11b is capable of operating.
1.9 802.11a/g OFDM PACKET CONSTRUCTION
The physical layer convergence protocol (PLCP) layer allows for a common
MAC layer to be used for many 802.11 WLAN PHY substandards. The
construction of an 802.11a/g OFDM packet is shown in Figure 1.11. As
shown in the figure, the packet is comprised of four basic components. The
first piece of the symbol is what is known as the “short” preamble. The short
preamble is always 8 ␮s long in duration. During the short preamble, tasks
such as automatic gain control and coarse frequency offsets are calculated
and adjusted for in the baseband chip. The short preamble is followed by a
“long” preamble, which is also 8 ␮s long.10 During the long preamble, tasks
such as channel estimation, fine frequency offset adjustments, and timing
recovery are performed. Again note that the short and long preambles are al-
ways communicated in BPSK in order to maintain robustness.
The field that follows the preambles is called the “signal field.” It is here
that the information relating to the modulation order, coding rate, and pack-
et length is carried. The short and long preambles along with the signal field
constitute the PLCP protocol data unit (PPDU).
The actual payload (which carries the desired data to be communicated)
follows the signal field. So the PPDU plus the user data together constitute
the full packet.
Note that the PLCP preamble is made of 12 OFDM symbols, the signal
field is made of 1 OFDM symbol, and the user data are made of a variable
number of OFDM symbols.
1.10 802.11 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
We will now shift our focus and discuss some of the more important system
requirements for the 802.11 standard.
1.10.1 Receiver Sensitivity

We will start by discussing the receiver sensitivity requirements. In general
the receiver sensitivity is affected by many factors, including the design of
the radio and the baseband PHY layer.11 Examples of the latter case are the
choice of the Viterbi decoder (soft vs. hard), the design of the channel esti-
mator, and the gain control algorithm.
Note that both the short and long preambles are 8 ␮s in duration. However, the short pre-
10
amble is constructed of 10 smaller (800-ns) segments—hence the word short.

11
Purist radio designers find the latter to be hard to believe!
12 OFDM Symbols 1 OFDM Symbols Var. OFDM Symbols
Short preamble (8 μs) Long preamble (8 μs) Signal Field (4 μs)

800 ns
t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6 t7 t8 t9 t10 T1
Gain control, coarse frequency Timing recovery, Fine frequency Coding rate info, Payload (data)
offset correction offset correction, Channel Estimation modulation type,
Figure 1.11 Construction of IEEE 802.11a/g packet. The packet is made of the short and long preambles, the signal field, and the data
payload.
25
On the radio side, the factors impacting the minimum sensitivity levels
are related to the data rate selected. In general, under low data rate condi-
tions (e.g., 6 Mbps), the sensitivity of the system is primarily set by the re-
ceiver noise figure and cochannel interference.12 For the most part other im-
pairments such as quadrature imbalances would have minimal impact at the
sensitivity levels of the lower data rates.
The situation is quite a bit more complex at the higher data rates (such as
54 Mpbs), however. It is clear that noise figure and cochannel interference
will still impact the sensitivity levels, but other impairments such as phase
noise, quadrature imbalance, transmitter error vector magnitude (EVM),
center-frequency inaccuracies, filter corner inaccuracies, multipath, sam-
pling frequency inaccuracies, and gain control inaccuracies will also enter
the picture and impact the sensitivity levels. Once again, it is clear that the
higher data rates would require a higher SNDR (signal to noise plus distor-
tion level) to be able to operate properly and would therefore have a more
limited power range in which they can operate robustly.
The discussions of the previous few paragraphs assume that there are no
significant interferers present. Under interference-dominated conditions
(conditions in which the desired signal level is significantly smaller than an
interfering signal such as a large adjacent channel signal), the linearity of
the receiver will also become a factor in determining the sensitivity of the
system. Under interference-dominated conditions, a “smart receiver” would
need to be able to detect the interference condition (through the use of prop-
er RSSIs, for example) and set the front-end gain control accordingly. This
often translates into a trade-off between linearity and noise figure. In gener-
al, the gain of the front end would have to be set to the highest level possible
(corresponding to the lowest noise figure possible) while avoiding signifi-
cant nonlinearities in the receiver chain. So, in summary, in interference-
dominated conditions, in addition to the linearity of the receiver, all the fac-
tors mentioned above for the non-interference-dominated conditions are
important and must be considered in the design.
1.10.2 Transmitter Error Vector Magnitude

Another system requirement specified by the 802.11a/g standard is the
transmitter EVM, which, in general is a single scalar number that is an indi-
cation of the modulation quality of the signal. To calculate the EVM, one
needs to compare the actual symbols with their ideal impairment-free sym-
12
Cochannel interference is caused by users in adjacent cells operating at the same frequency
as the user. Since the user data in the adjacent cell is uncorrelated to the user data in the current
cell, this would cause a noiselike effect on the user and would degrade the sensitivity levels.
1.10 802.11 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 27
bols on the constellation diagram and compute the error vectors as shown in
Figure 1.12. The real symbol will have a different phase and amplitude as
compared to the ideal symbol constellation points. Systematic and deter-
ministic errors would simply offset the real constellation points as compared
to the ideal ones. Nonsystematic impairments such as noise, however,
would cause an “error ball” or “error cloud” of uncertainty in the constella-
tion points about the ideal constellation points.
Mathematically, for a given symbol, EVM is defined as
冪莦
M
冱 |Z(i) – R(i)|2
EVM = ᎏᎏ
i=1
M
冱|R(i)|2
i=1
Ideal symbol
Real symbol
Error vector
θ
Figure 1.12 Pictorial description of the concept of EVM for 16-QAM constellation dia-
gram. The detail (zoom in) of the EVM calculation applied to a single constellation position
is also displayed.
where Z is the measured signal, R is the reference (ideal) signal, M is the

number of measurements, and i is the measurement index. Various stan-
dards allow for some form of tracking of the symbols (such as timing recov-
ery and frequency offset corrections) before applying this equation to mea-
sure EVM. This definition can be extended to all the symbols of a
modulation by averaging over all these symbols.
It can be seen from the definition that the EVM is an estimate of the mag-
nitude of the error signal as compared to the magnitude of the ideal signal.
As such, it is clear that that the maximum value for the EVM is 1, or 100%,
and that the minimum value of the EVM is 0. It is clear that the smaller the
value of the EVM in percent, the higher the quality of the modulated signal.
The EVM can be expressed in decibels as 20 log(EVM). For example, 1%
EVM can be expressed as –40 dB EVM.
However, in some cases different standards specify the EVM definition
in slightly different terms. In the case of 802.11a/g OFDM rates the EVM is
defined as the RMS of the error vectors over all symbols. In contrast, in the
case of 802.11b/g CCK rates, the EVM is calculated using the peak values.
The EVM is affected by a variety of impairments. These include nonlin-
earities, phase noise, quadrature imbalances, and filter shapes and band-
width. The reason that the EVM is so commonly used as a measure of the
quality of the transmitter is that it is essentially impacted by many such im-
pairments. Of course, one should note that there are impairments that may
not impact the EVM as measured by a vector signal analyzer (VSA), and
conversely there are impairments that may impact the EVM as measured by
a VSA but may not have a significant impact on the packet error rate as
measured by the actual receiver. More on this point will be discussed later.
For the 802.11a and g standards, at 54 Mbps, the transmitter EVM (or
transmitter quality) is required to be a minimum of –25 dB. On the other
hand, there are no specifications given for a receiver EVM. The receiver is
completely specified by the specification of the sensitivity for a given data
rate. If there are impairments that would affect the receiver EVM, they will
quite likely be evident in the sensitivity measurements of the receiver, espe-
cially at the higher data rates, and this will impact only that receiver. On the
other hand, a problem in the quality of the transmitted signal can cause an-
other user (with potentially a perfectly good receiver) to be unable to oper-
ate at the proper data rate. This is the reason that the standard enforces the
EVM on the transmitter but not on the receiver.
1.10.3 Transmitter Spectral Mask

Another 802.11 system requirement on the transmitter side is the satisfacto-
ry passing of the spectral mask. To facilitate the discussion of spectral mask,
four observations need to be made here:
1. A linear system is one that faithfully replicates the input signal by a

constant multiplier (gain or attenuation) without the introduction of
any frequencies (harmonics, intermodulations, etc.) that did not exist
in the incoming signal. Of course, a constant value can be added to the
output. The relation Vout(t) = kVin(t) + c describes the transfer function
of a linear system, where k and c are constants. If a sinusoid of fre-
quency f1 is applied as Vin(t), the output spectrum will only have com-
ponents at f1 and possibly at the direct current (DC). No other frequen-
cy components will be present.
2. A nonlinear system, in contrast, is capable of generating frequencies in
the output spectrum that did not exist in the incoming signal. A nonlin-
ear system may, for example, be represented by the following transfer
function: Vout(t) = kV in2 (t) + c. If a sinusoid of frequency f1 is applied as
Vin(t), the output spectrum will have components at f1 and 2f1 and pos-
sibly at DC (this can be seen by applying basic trigonometric identi-
ties). In this example, if two sinusoids are applied at the input, one with
frequency f1 and another with frequency f2, tones at 2f1, 2f2, f1 – f2, and
f1 + f2 will be present at the output. It is clear that frequencies at the out-
put which did not exist at the input have been generated.
3. A constant-envelope modulation is a modulation that has no peaks
and valleys observed in the transient waveform of the modulated sig-
nal. In other words, the envelope of the carrier does not change with a
change in the modulated signal. This class of modulations includes
modulations such as FM (frequency modulation) and FSK (frequency
shift keying).
4. A nonconstant-envelope modulation is one that has peaks and valleys
in the transient waveform of the modulated signal. In this class of
modulations, the amplitude of the envelope of the modulated signal
can vary as a function of time. This class of modulations includes
modulations such as AM (amplitude modulation) and QAM (quadra-
ture amplitude modulation).
In general, all real systems are at least weakly nonlinear (i.e., perfectly lin-
ear systems do not exist in the real world). Also, in general, constant-enve-
lope modulations are significantly less spectrally efficient than their non-
constant-envelope counterparts. On the other hand, as will become apparent
by the argument below, nonconstant-envelope modulations are much more
forgiving of nonlinearities in the system.
All forms of modulations used by the 802.11 standard possess a relative-
ly high spectral efficiency and have a high PAR.
Now that we have some of the basics out of the way, we can discuss the
concept of spectral regrowth in more detail. When a modulated signal of
bandwidth W (constant envelope or not) is passed through a system with no

nonlinearities, a signal with the same W bandwidth is obtained at the output.
For example, assuming a “brick-wall”-shaped signal was applied at the in-
put of such a system, the signal at the output would maintain the same brick-
wall shape and bandwidth (and would of course have no harmonic outputs).
If the modulated signal is of the constant-envelope type and it is passed
through even a nonlinear system, it maintains its bandwidth.13
In reality, however, nonlinearities are ever so present. Therefore when a
non-constant-envelope signal (especially one with large PARs) is passed
through such a system, even- and odd-order harmonics of the input signal
are generated, creating harmonic distortion (HD) at the output. These com-
ponents are typically out of band and can be filtered out. However, if there
is more than a single CW tone present at the input, intermodulation (IM)
distortion terms will also be generated. Specifically, the odd-ordered inter-
modulation terms (IM3, IM5, IM7, etc.) are the ones that result in spectral
regrowth.
The concept of intermodulation distortion (IMD) will be discussed in
more detail in Chapter 3, but for now it suffices to note that IM terms can
generate spectral components that fall very close to the frequencies of the
input signal. For example, for a two-CW tone input with frequencies f1 and
f2, the problematic third-order IM products (IM3) fall at 2f1 – f2 and 2f2 – f1.
Since f1 and f2 are presumably very close in frequency, the 2f1 – f2 and 2f2 –
f1 terms will also fall fairly close to the requency range and will be difficult
or even impossible to filter out. It is easy to imagine with an input signal
with many CW input tones how the intermodulation terms would generate a
spectral intermodulation floor within the band of interest and its vicinity.14
A modulated signal with a nonconstant envelope for the purposes of this
discussion can be considered as a multitone CW signal with frequency com-
ponents across the modulated bandwidth.
Although these IMD terms are present within the bandwidth of the modu-
lated signal, their amplitudes are significantly smaller than the amplitude of
the desired spectral component of the modulated signal and can therefore
typically not be observed by looking at a simple power spectral density plot
13
Note that if a modulated signal with abrupt phase transitions that has constant envelope is
passed through a band-limiting operation (e.g., filtering), it will no longer have a constant en-
velope and will therefore require somewhat linear amplification in order to avoid the genera-
tion of spectral regrowth.
14
This intermodulation floor is sometimes referred to as the spectrum “grass” or FFT grass.
This is because, in looking at the FFT results of such a multitone simulation, the FFT bins of
the area immediately outside the bandwidth of interest will show FFT components that have
grown above their normal levels.
or a spectrum analyzer output (they do certainly take a hit on EVM, howev-

er). These intermodulation components, however, will result in the creation
of undesirable spectral components (as observed on a spectrum analyzer or
a power spectral density plot) in the immediate vicinity of the modulated
signal. These undesirable spectral components generated by the passing of a
nonconstant-envelope modulated signal through a nonlinear system is com-
monly referred to as spectral regrowth.
With the description provided in the previous paragraphs it is easy to un-
derstand why large PAR signals are more susceptible to IMD and hence can
create large spectral regrowth components as a result of passing through a
nonlinear system.
To summarize, when a modulated signal is passed through a nonlinear
system, its bandwidth is broadened by odd-order nonlinearities. This is
caused by the creation of mixing products between the individual frequency
components of the modulated signal spectrum.
In a typical system, spectral regrowth is typically of concern in the trans-
mitter side. Within the transmitter, spectral regrowth is typically caused by
the most nonlinear component of the transmit chain. This component is al-
most always the power amplifier.
Spectral regrowth can cause several problems in a system. In a full-du-
plex system, for example, a client’s transmitter can generate enough out-of-
band power due to spectral regrowth to saturate the client’s own receiver
(note that a transmitter in a typical full-duplex system can be transmitting
power levels that are orders of magnitude larger than what the receiver is
trying to receive, and therefore it is fairly easy to saturate this receiver). Of
course, WLAN systems, in particular 802.11, are not based on a half-duplex
operation, and therefore this particular potential impairment caused by spec-
tral regrowth is not an issue for a WLAN system.
A similar issue can be observed when spectral regrowth of one transmit-
ter causes the desensitization of the receiver of a different system in the
same communication appliance. For example, the transmitter of a WLAN
system operating at 2.4 GHz can desensitize the receiver of a wireless
CDMA cellular receiver in a cell phone hand set.
Another problem caused by spectral regrowth is to create interference
with adjacent channels. Typically, the spectrum is a very precious commod-
ity. The channels are therefore typically packed together in order to maxi-
mize the efficiency of the spectrum usage. Excessive spectral regrowth can
therefore cause interference with the adjacent channels (this is the primary
concern with spectral regrowth in stand-alone 802.11 applications such as
computer laptops). This is the primary reason why the standards and the
FCC require conformance to a spectral mask.
Take the case of the 802.11a spectral mask requirements as an example.

As discussed earlier, the 802.11a modulated signal is comprised of 52 to-
tal subcarriers with modulated data around each of these subcarriers. Also,
as stated earlier, such a signal possesses a very high PAR. As this signal is
passed through a nonlinear system, these subcarriers can nonlinearly inter-
act with other subcarriers, creating intermodulation components. The data
content of each subcarrier can even nonlinearly interact with itself, causing
IMD. All of this can cause spectral regrowth. So an ideal brick-wall fil-
tered OFDM-modulated signal (with a bandwidth of 16.25 MHz) could
look like what is shown in Figure 1.13 after it goes through a real trans-
mitter with a much wider bandwidth. As shown in Figure 1.13, the
802.11a spectral mask requires that the spectrum of the transmitted signal
be more than 20, 28, and 40 dBc below the peak of the modulated signal
at offset frequencies of 11, 20, and 30 MHz, respectively, away from the
center of the band.
Finally, it is important to note, that the spectral regrowth due to the non-
linearities (of typically the power amplifier) should be the limiting factor in
achieving the (close-in) spectral mask requirements of a well-designed sys-
tem which has a fairly high transmit power requirements (such as the
802.11). However, many other factors can cause spectral mask violations.
These include insufficient baseband analog or digital filtering of the digital-
ly generated modulated signal, the quantization noise levels of the digital-
to-analog converters, and the phase noise of the RF phase-locked loop
(PLL).
16.25 MHz
−26 −25 −2 −1 1 2 25 26
802.11a/g TX spectrum mask

−20
312
kHz −28
−40 dBc
−30 −20 −11 −9 fc 9 11 20 30 MHz
Figure 1.13 IEEE 802.11a/g channel construction from OFDM subcarriers and required
transmitter spectral mask.
1.11 VECTOR SIGNAL ANALYSIS 33
The subject of spurious emissions is also closely related to the issue of

spectral masks. For example, the 802.11 standard specifies that the transmit-
ter local oscillator (LO) feedthrough15 should be limited to less than 15 dB
below the level of the desired transmitted signal power for the 802.11a and
802.11g standards. For the 802.11b standard, the level of LO feedthrough
needs to be at least 25dB below the desired signal level. It is important to
note that quite often LO feedthrough can exceed the standard specified lim-
its without affecting the transmitter error vector magnitude (see next sec-
tion). However, excessive LO feedthrough can cause problems on the re-
ceiver side, especially for direct-conversion receivers (by generating
large-baseband DC offsets).
Another type of spurious emissions is synthesizer-generated and LO-gen-
erator-type spurs. For example, the synthesizer can have an excessively large
reference feedthrough which can easily violate the spectral mask of the sys-
tem and/or cause interference with other users that are operating at the adja-
cent channels. Another example would be the case of the first or second LO
of a superheterodyne transmitter leaking to the output and violating an FCC
mask for a restricted band. As a final example, quite often in direct conver-
sion systems, the voltage-controlled oscillator (VCO) frequency is selected
to be different than the output frequency of the transmitter in order to reduce
the pulling effects on the VCO. In such cases the VCO frequency can leak to
the output and potentially violate the FCC limit in a restricted band.
The FCC requirements can be divided into two main categories: conduc-
tive requirements and radiative requirements. Conductive measurements are
performed by connecting a cable to the antenna port of the device under test
and measuring the power spectral density of the transmitted signal at vari-
ous frequencies out of the 802.11 bands. On the other hand, radiative re-
quirements are conducted by measuring the received power at various fre-
quencies at certain defined distances and with specified antennas. The
interested reader can refer to FCC documents for more details.
1.11 VECTOR SIGNAL ANALYSIS
A very powerful tool in analyzing a digitally modulated signal is a VSA. A

VSA is even more useful in analyzing digitally modulated signals that are
15
The subject of LO feedthrough will be discussed in more detail in Chapter 4. For now, it is
sufficient to note that LO feedthrough is the continuous wave (CW) tone observed in the
middle of the transmitted band as observed at the RF output. The two most common sources
of LO feedthrough are DC offsets in the baseband analog circuitry of the transmitter and, in
the case of direct-conversion transmitters, direct LO coupling to the output of the transmitter.
further mapped by OFDM. This is because in many cases the impact of im-
pairments on an OFDM-modulated signal would be quite different (and of-
ten more complicated) than a similar impairment’s impact on a “single-car-
rier”-based (i.e., non-OFDM) modulated signal. Further, typically the
impact of various impairments on single-carrier-based modulated signals is
more intuitively clear. We will elaborate on this issue in much more detail
in Chapter 4.
Vector signal analysis is a tool to relate analog impairments to system re-
quirements. In its simplest form one would look at the constellation diagram
of the digitally modulated signal as shown in Figure 1.14. This figure shows
a very high quality 64-QAM (an array of 8 × 8 blue constellation points)
802.11a signal, with an EVM of approximately –40 dB.16 The high quality
of the modulation is apparent in the tightly packed dots at the intersection of
the circles. As described earlier in discussing the concept of the EVM, these
tightly packed dots are an indication that the actual received symbols are
quite close to their ideal values. As the signal quality degrades, the dots get
larger and “fuzzier” and turn into “balls,” as seen in Figure 1.15. At the ex-
treme the various constellation balls start intruding on the adjacent neighbor
constellation balls, causing packet errors and degrading the link quality.
Note that the black dots in Figure 1.14 in the center left and the center right
are associated with the 802.11a pilot tones, which are always transmitted in
BPSK format.17 In particular, these constellation points are quite useful in
identifying certain kinds of impairments in the system. More details on this
topic will follow later in this book.
So, by looking at a constellation diagram, one can recognize a “good”-
quality signal such as that shown in Figure 1.14. But what if the constella-
tion diagram shows a signal with a relatively poor quality (e.g., that of Fig.
1.15)? How would the designer go about finding the problem and remedy-
ing it? How would one determine if the problem is due to spurs, phase
noise, quadrature imbalance, and so on? This is where, especially in the case
of an OFDM-mapped signal, further signal analysis tools and diagrams
would be useful.
Figure 1.16 shows an example of an 802.11a-modulated signal (the
same signal of the constellation diagram of Fig. 1.14) viewed on a VSA.
16
Note that the 802.11a/g standard requires an EVM of only –25 dB for a a/g 64-QAM trans-
mitted signal; therefore the constellation shown here is 15 dB better than what the standard
requires.
17
The pilot tones are always transmitted in BPSK format. The pilot tones are used to establish
the initial link (establish frequency offsets, set packet gain levels, etc.). It is therefore imper-
ative to obtain the highest amount of immunity to impairments present in the system and in
the channel and establish a robust link for the payload to be properly decoded.
Figure 1.14 Constellation diagram for 802.11a signal with very low (good) EVM (~ –45
dB). This constellation diagram is obtained by feeding the output of a laboratory-class trans-
mitter to a VSA.
Figure 1.15 Constellation diagram for 802.11a signal when quality of signal is marginally
acceptable for 54-Mbps transmission. The EVM of this constellation is ~ –27 dB. Note the
“fuzzy” balls that have replaced the well-defined constellation points of Figure 1.14.
In this case, however, the VSA is set up to display the EVM in decibels
versus the subcarrier index.18 In other words, this is an alternative way to
view the same signal. As will be shown, this method of observing the sig-
nal will shed more insight into certain impairments that may be affecting
the system.
The key insight is that a quick glance at Figure 1.16 can provide signifi-
cant amount of information about the existence (or lack of) analog impair-
ments in the system. Figure 1.16 shows a signal with excellent quality (very
low EVM) across all of the subcarriers. Some examples of signals that are
impaired in various ways are given in the following figures. The spectrum
flatness and group delay associated with this near ideal signal is shown in
Figure 1.17.
Figures 1.18a and 1.19b show a signal which has a significant CW spur
present at subcarrier 13 (frequency offset of +4 MHz). As can be seen, the
EVM for this subcarrier is significantly degraded as compared to other sub-
carriers. Also note that, by looking at the constellation diagram alone, it
would not be possible to pinpoint the reason for the degraded performance.
On the other hand, by looking at the plot of the EVM versus the subcarrier,
it is quite clear that a large narrowband interference is the source of the de-
graded EVM. Many sources can contribute to large spur levels. These in-
clude harmonics of the crystal oscillator, reference spurs of the PLL, and
harmonics of the master clock frequency used in the digital domain of the
chip.
Figure 1.20 shows a signal which has fairly significant impairments on
the lower index subcarriers.19 This situation, for example, can arise from ex-
cessive flicker noise in the baseband circuitry or as a result of cutting off the
low frequency subcarriers by a high pass filter with too high of a corner fre-
quency. The EVM hit can come from the magnitude attenuation due to fil-
tering at the low index subcarriers and/or the group delay variations due to
the pole(s) associated with the high pass filter. This situation is not uncom-
mon on 802.11a direct-conversion receivers that use some form of high pass
filtering to reject the DC offsets.
Figure 1.21 shows a signal which has significant impairments on the
high order subcarriers. This situation is the dual of that described in the
previous paragraph but is caused by low pass filters with the poles placed
18
Recall that the 802.11a signal is constructed of 52 subcarriers ranging from index –26 to
+26 with subcarrier index 0 eliminated. The subcarriers are spaced 312.5 KHz apart.
19
Note that the EVM floor in this case is different that the previous examples due to the fact
that a different device under test (DUT) was used for this measurement.
Subcarrier Index
Figure 1.16 EVM versus subcarrier index for constellation plot of Figure 1.14 obtained on
a VSA.
GD
ABS
Subcarrier Index
Figure 1.17 Spectrum flatness (ABS, dB) on the left y-axis and group delay variation (GD,
ns) on the right y-axis of signal of Figure 1.14.
Figure 1.18 Constellation diagram of otherwise excellent quality 802.11a signal with
large CW spur. In this case the burst power (of the OFDM signal) is –5 dBm and is cen-
tered at 5.24 GHz, and the CW spur has a power level of –35 dBm and is at 5.244 GHz.
Measured EVM is –31.6 dB. Notice the out-of-place constellation points on the constella-
tion diagram.
too low. Again, the EVM hit can be due to the magnitude attenuation of
the higher order subcarriers (and associated SNR degradation) or due to
excessive group delay variations associated with the poles of the high pass
filter being placed too low in frequency. A similar situation can arise if a
constant group delay variation exists between the I and the Q channels of
the received signal. This results in a subcarrier-dependent quadrature im-
balance which, if uncorrected, would result in worse EVM at higher sub-
carriers. The plot of Figure 1.21 represents such a case where a significant
delay difference exists between the I and the Q channels. As explained fur-
ther in Chapter 3, this condition may arise due to mismatches in the ana-
log baseband sections of a receiver. A plot of the amplitude variation of
this signal over the subcarrier as well as the group delay variation is shown
in Figure 1.22. The constellation diagram for this signal is shown in Figure
1.23. It is again clear that, by looking at the constellation diagram alone, it
would be quite difficult, if not impossible, to determine the type of im-
pairment impacting the system.
Subcarrier Index
Figure 1.19 EVM versus subcarrier for constellation diagram of Figure 1.18. Note the
large degradation in the EVM level at the frequency of the spur. Also notice the “leakage” of
the EVM degradation effect on the adjacent subcarriers.
Subcarrier Index
Figure 1.20 EVM versus subcarrier plot of 802.11a signal that shows fairly significant im-
pairments on lower index subcarriers.
39
Subcarrier Index
Figure 1.21 Plot of EVM versus subcarrier index for 802.11a signal subject to significant
group delay mismatch between I and Q channels.
GD
ABS
Subcarrier Index
Figure 1.22 Plot of spectrum flatness (ABS, dB, left y-axis), and group delay (GD, ns,
right y-axis), versus subcarrier index for 802.11a signal of Figure 1.21.
Figure 1.23 Constellation diagram of signal of Figure 1.21.
The examples mentioned above should provide a good perspective on the

capabilities of a VSA. Often, the problems could be even further analyzed to
very accurately pinpoint the source of the problem. At the very least, this
kind of analysis provides the proper hints that the engineers can then use to
debug their system. Several more examples of various impairments and
methods of debugging them using a VSA will be presented throughout the
book.
CHAPTER 2
Radio Receiver and
Transmitter Architectures
2.1 ARCHITECTURES
The choice of radio architecture has a significant impact on many aspects of

the operation of the system, and it is one of the most important decisions
that the system architect has to make. In general, the decision is dependent
on many factors, as will be described in some detail in the following pages.
These factors include the modulation bandwidth, the existence of informa-
tion at the center of the modulation, the process technology available, the
capability and power consumption of analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog
converters (ADCs, DACs) available to the system architect, the risk toler-
ance of the project, the degree of integration required, the area required, the
power consumption required, the performance required, the degree of local
oscillator feedthrough (LOFT) acceptable, the amount of LO reradiation ac-
ceptable, the quadrature accuracy required, the magnitude of a potential sig-
nal at the image frequency, the magnitude of interferers, and, of course, the
comfort and experience of the designers with the various architectures. Of
course, some of the factors mentioned are more relevant to the receiver ar-
chitecture, some are more important on the transmitter architecture, and
some impact both the receiver and transmitter architecture.
In general, there are three types of common receive and transmit architec-
tures available to the system architect: direct conversion [also known as
zero intermediate frequency (IF) or homodyne], low IF, and superhetero-
dyne. Each one of these architectures has its own inherent strengths and
weaknesses, and many of the potential issues with each architecture can be
overcome with clever architecture or circuit design techniques. Some of
these techniques will be discussed in some detail in the following pages.
In the following sections, we will first investigate the receiver architec-
tures and then look at the transmitter architectures. For each receiver and
transmitter we will first examine the superheterodyne architecture, which is
the architecture that has been around for the longest time and even today the

44 CHAPTER 2 RADIO RECEIVER AND TRANSMITTER ARCHITECTURES
most common architecture in use (if all radios produced today are included;
not just the WLAN radios). Then we will discuss the low IF architecture,
which is a common choice for certain applications (typically those that have
a fairly narrow modulation bandwidth). Finally we will discuss the direct-
conversion architecture, which is the architecture of choice for many appli-
cations. It is important to note that within these categories some variants
exist; however, most, but not all, radio architectures can be generally cate-
gorized as one of these three architectures.
2.1.1 Superheterodyne Receiver

Figure 2.1 displays a general superheterodyne receiver architecture with an
example frequency planning applied to the 802.11a standard.20 The signal
flow is as follows: The signal is received at the antenna and then passed to
a band-select ceramic or surface acoustic wave (SAW) filter. This filter
has the task of rejecting any large out-of-band interferers as well as any
image signal in order to avoid the desensitization of the RF front end and
in particular the LNA. The signal is then amplified by the LNA and sent
to a second filter whose primary task is the rejection of the signal at the
image frequency as well as any noise present at the image frequency. The
image-rejected and band-selected signal is then passed to the RF mixer,
which down converts the entire RF band to an IF (in this case 1280 MHz).
The RF PLL frequency is selected such that the desired channel falls at the
predefined IF frequency (1280 MHz in this case). Now that the signal is
down converted to a fixed IF and properly centered, a fixed channel-select
filter (in this case a SAW filter21) selects the desired channel (or possibly
a few channels) while rejecting all the other channels in the band. This sig-
nificantly reduces the linearity requirements of the blocks that follow the
SAW filter.
The level of the signal is then adjusted through the IF programmable gain
amplifiers (PGAs) and passed on to the second set of down-converting mix-
ers. Often at this stage the signal is split into the in-phase and quadrature-
phase components by using an LO that has quadrature outputs (sine and co-
sine). The LO frequency is often chosen (as in this example) to take the IF
signal directly to baseband (centered around 0 Hz).22 Any further filtering
that may be required is implemented at the baseband frequency at this point,
and further gain control is performed as necessary to set the signal level to
20
Blocks associated with duplexing and switching are not shown in this simplified block dia-
gram.
21
SAW filters typically have very good selectivity but suffer from relatively high losses.
22
In some cases the signal is translated to a low IF center frequency rather than DC.
2.1 ARCHITECTURES 45
RF Image IF
Ceramic Reject SAW PGA ADC I
DIGITAL
FILTER
LNA PGA 6-54Mbps
PGA ADC Q
4920-5805 4920-5805 1280
MHz MHz MHz sin cos
RF IF
PLL PLL
3640-4525 1280
MHz MHz
fbb = fif − fLO2 fif = frf − fLO1
f
fbb fif frf (signal path)
f
0 (DC ) fLO2 fLO1 (LO path)
Figure 2.1 (a) Block diagram of “typical” superheterodyne 802.11a receiver. (b) Frequen-
cy translation in superheterodyne receiver (negative frequencies and image rejection not
shown).
the desired signal range of the ADC. The signal is then sampled by the ADC
and passed on to the digital baseband for further processing.
It is worth discussing some important aspects of the selection and use of
the filters in the superheterodyne architecture in more detail:
앫 The band-select filter acts to prevent the desensitization and possible

saturation of the LNA. Often the LNAs are designed with a tuned in-
put matching and load impedance. In such cases and in a relatively in-
terference free environment, the band-select filter may be eliminated.
When the band-select filter is to be used, the designer needs to be
aware of the direct impact of this filter on the noise figure of the sys-
tem (since there is no gain before this filter). Typical band-select fil-
ters for WLAN have a loss of 1.5 to 3 dB, but this number can vary
significantly depending on the specific requirements and the amount
of selectivity required. Note that in some cases the image-reject filter
is eliminated.23 In such cases, the band-select filter would also act to
23
This filter may be eliminated for a variety of reasons, including to save cost or area or to
avoid having to go off chip and back on chip again.
reject any signals present at the image frequency (more on the concept
of image below).
앫 The image-reject filter is primarily responsible for eliminating any
signal or noise present at the image frequency. A question that may
arise is that if the band-select filter is present in the system and acts to
reject any interferers at the image frequency, why would a second
dedicated image-reject filter be required? The answer to this question
will become apparent when one realizes that the LNA may have a fair-
ly broadband noise output and therefore have a significant amount of
noise at the image frequency. It can easily be shown that, if the follow-
ing assumptions hold, then, the noise figure (NF) of the system will in-
crease by 3 dB as compared to a case where a lossless image-reject fil-
ter is used:
1. The noise at the output of the LNA has a white spectral density
(i.e., it is flat versus frequency).
2. No image-reject filter is used (even if a band-select filter is used).
3. The noise is dominated by the LNA and the components that pre-
cede it.
Typically, the assumptions above are only partially true, and a real im-
age-reject filter is not lossless. As a result, eliminating an image-reject
filter would degrade noise figure by an amount less than 3 dB.24
앫 If a high linearity LNA can be used in the system, typically the band-
select filter is eliminated. In such cases the image-reject filter would
act as the band-select filter also, but with much less degradation of NF
(since it comes after the LNA, which has gain).
앫 The channel-select filter (in this case the SAW) has a high degree of
selectivity. In the case of a WLAN system, such a filter is capable of
selecting the desired channel only. This is because the channel band-
width is fairly high. For example for 802.11g, the SAW filter would
be required to have a Q of approximately 1280 MHz/16 MHz = 80. In
some applications, however, selecting one channel at the IF may not
be possible due to the high Q required.25 In such cases further low pass
filtering at the baseband frequency would be required.
24
This concept is also the source of the terms single-sideband (SSB) noise figure versus dou-
ble-sideband (DSB) noise figure. In a typical mixer, the DSB NF is 3 dB less than its SSB
NF. It is also important to note that in cascaded NF calculations, the SSB NF should be used
for superheterodyne and low IF architectures, and DSB NF should be used for direct-conver-
sion receivers. This fact should become clear upon the completion of the receiver architec-
ture discussions.
25
This would clearly depend of the bandwidth of the channel as well as the selected IF.
앫 The baseband filters may be required to supplement the action of the

IF channel-select filter. Even if the IF channel-select filter can exclu-
sively select the desired channel, the baseband low pass filters may be
required to filter out the broadband noise present at the output of the
baseband components. Without such filtering, the ADC could alias the
noise at the out-of-band frequencies and degrade the SNR.
앫 Even in the presence of the band-select and image-reject filters, the RF
components that precede the channel-select filter need to have a high
degree of linearity in order to be able to deal with the existence of
multiple channels and therefore large signal swings at their input.
2.1.1.1 Choice of Intermediate Frequency in

Superheterodyne Receiver
An image signal is one that would fall on top of the desired signal after the
mixer’s frequency translation action. As an example, for the superhetero-
dyne receiver of Figure 2.1, in order to tune into the 4920-MHz band, and
with an IF of 1280 MHz as shown, the RF PLL would have to tune to 3640
MHz (since 4920 MHz – 1280 MHz = 3640 MHz). In this case the image
frequency would fall at Fim = Frf – 2Fif = 2360 MHz. It is important to note
that if the image signal (or noise) is not properly filtered or otherwise reject-
ed using an image-reject mixer, it would mix with the desired signal and it
would not be possible to remove it using any postprocessing.
It should also be clear that the choice of the IF in a superheterodyne ar-
chitecture is a very key decision. This decision should be made with many
considerations, including the following:
앫 What is the power level of a potential interferer in the image band?

The relative strength of the interferer as compared to the minimum de-
sired signal is quite important and should be kept to a minimum.
앫 What type of interferer is present at the image band (is it CW, spread
spectrum, etc.)? Certain kinds of modulated signals have more sensi-
tivity to specific types of interferers.
앫 Is the desired incoming band of signals broadband in nature? Choos-
ing the proper IF for a broadband input signal is more challenging,
since the designer needs to make sure than the image for none of the
desired channels would cause problems. In general, the IF needs to be
selected to have a frequency larger than the difference between the
highest desired channel frequency and the lowest desired channel fre-
quency (assuming a contiguous band of desired signals). In our exam-
ple, the IF needs to be selected to have a frequency greater than 5805
MHz – 4920 MHz = 885 MHz. If this criterion is not observed, one of
the channels in the band of interest would be the image for another
channel. In our example, had we chosen the IF to be 300 MHz and we
wanted to select the 5180-MHz channel, the image frequency would
have fallen at 5780 MHz. Since the band-select filter and the image-
reject filter need to allow the entire band to pass through, they would
have not rejected the image, and the image would have fallen in the
desired band. Note that, often, the image frequency is selected as a
lower frequency than the RF in order to simplify signal processing and
reduce power consumption.26
앫 Should the system be designed with a high side LO or a low side LO?
The answer lies in the presence of large interfering image signals with
each choice.
앫 How high should the IF be? In general, the higher the IF, the easier for
the band-select and image-reject filters to reject the image. However,
at the same time, it would become more difficult for the IF band-select
filter to select the desired channel (a higher Q would be required for a
given channel bandwidth).
There are several other important factors than enter the equation. These
include issues such as the availability and cost of commercial filters at the
desired band27 and the presence of large interferences at the IF (which can
couple directly to the IF stage).28
By now it should be clear that the choice of the IF for a superheterodyne
receiver requires consideration of many factors and should not be taken
lightly.
It is important to note that several variants to the basic superheterodyne
architecture have been proposed and are in use. One such architecture is the
“sliding IF” architecture as shown in Figure 2.2. In this architecture, instead
of a fixed IF, a sliding IF is chosen. The IF is therefore generated by divid-
ing the RF LO frequency by an integer multiple. The IF therefore changes
26
One exception to this rule is the case of cable tuners. The desired channel can range from
approximately 50 to 850 MHz. Clearly there are no suitable IF present below 50 MHz. In
such cases an “up–down” approach is often used where the first IF has a frequency higher
than the incoming frequency.
27
If the IF filter is to be designed from off- or on-chip inductors and capacitors, the queue of
the available components at the IF and their potential size should also be considered.
28
It should be noted that typically tunable high Q front-end filters are not available. (Note:
“Q” is an abbreviation for quality and is a measure of the selectivity of the filter.) Therefore
the discussions above center around fixed-frequency RF filters. The presence of tunable high
Q filters would significantly impact the choice of radio architectures and simplify the design
of the active blocks that follow such a filter. An area of active research which holds promise
for possibly enabling tunable high Q filters in the future is microelectromechanical systems
(MEMS).
LORF LOIF (I)
PGF
× RX_1
LNA
RF_IN DAC Offset
×
5 GHz DAC Control
× RX_Q
PGF
LOIF (Q)
Figure 2.2 Block diagram of “sliding IF” superheterodne 802.11a receiver. The frequency
of the RF LO is an integer multiple of the IF LO. This architecture avoids the need for two
PLLs for the superheterodyne receiver (Su et al., 2002).
as a function of the selected channel (hence the term sliding IF). In other
words, for any given selected channel, the RF LO is operating at a frequen-
cy that is harmonically related to the frequency of the IF LO. This technique
eliminates the need for a second (IF) PLL but makes channel selection at the
IF more difficult. As a result most of the channel selection would have to be
implemented using baseband filters.
The following highlights the advantages and disadvantages of the super-
heterodyne architecture as compared to the other receiver architectures:
앫 On the positive side the superheterodyne architecture:

1. Is well known and well understood. It provides a reasonably good
performance. Implementing a superheterodyne architecture is rela-
tively low risk.
2. Can achieve a reasonably low power consumption.
3. Allows a reasonably flexible frequency plan (choice of the IF is
somewhat flexible subject to the constraints discussed above).
4. Avoids DC offset problems associated with the direct conversion
and in some cases the low IF architectures. There are three primary
reasons:
(a) There is a significant amount of gain before the signal hits the
baseband section. Therefore, from a gain budgeting point of
view, less gain at baseband would be required. This reduces the
potential issues associated with gaining up offsets associated
with device mismatches and potentially saturating the follow-
ing stages.
(b) The self-mixing is typically not an issue. Self-mixing is a

process in which the LO signal can couple to the RF port and
mix with itself causing a time-variant DC offset. In a super-
heterodyne architecture the RF LO self-mixing is out of the band
of interest for the desired signal and is easily rejected by simple
high pass filtering [alternating current (AC) coupling as an ex-
ample]. On the other hand, the IF LO self-mixing does create
DC offsets that fall in the band of interest. However, as com-
pared with the other architectures, this LO is running at a rela-
tively low frequency and therefore the amount of coupling from
the LO port to the RF port would be significantly less in magni-
tude, resulting in smaller amount of DC offsets at baseband.
(c) Due to the IF stage filtering, the final down-conversion mixer
does not see large interfering signals, which can result in large
DC offsets at baseband. DC offsets generated due to large in-
terferers by the components before the IF filter will typically be
rejected by the AC-coupling stages utilized in such stages.
5. Avoids issues associated with the even-order harmonics as a result
of large incoming interferers at the antenna. Some of these issues
are DC related as described in the previous paragraph.
6. Achieves superior quadrature balance as compared to the alterna-
tive architectures. This is primarily due to the fact that the quadra-
ture signals for this architecture are generated at the IF rather than
the RF. Therefore the impact of parasitic mismatches in the genera-
tion and distribution of the in-phase and quadrature-phase signals
are less. To the first order and assuming no auto-IQ calibration is
used, if one can generate an IQ signal with a phase accuracy (stan-
dard deviation) of 2 degrees at 5 GHz, they would be able to gener-
ate a phase accuracy of approximately 0.5 degrees at 1.25 GHz.
Better quadrature matching is also achieved due to the fact that the
signal shares a common path over a larger portion of the receiver
chain as compared to a direct-conversion or low IF receiver.
앫 On the negative side, utilizing a superheterodyne architecture:
1. Results in a design that is expensive and large as compared to the
alternative architectures.
2. Requires many discrete and external components. This shortcom-
ing and the previous one are the primary reason for designers mov-
ing away from this architecture for integrated solutions.
3. There is an image problem to be reckoned with. Since the image
frequency is typically far away from the desired signal, it often
falls at a frequency which is not even regulated by the same stan-

dard and it may therefore be more difficult to design for. Further
there may be interferers at certain parts of the world but not others.
Therefore a design that is intended for the global market should in-
vestigate the frequency allocations for various countries.
4. In general, it would be difficult to design a multimode superhetero-
dyne receiver that performs the channel selectivity at the IF. For a
multimode receiver, the channel bandwidth and selectivity would
need to be programmable. This is not possible to do with single dis-
crete filters such as SAWs. It is also difficult to do a reasonable job
on silicon due to the limited queue of the passive devices at the IF.
The alternative would be to use multiple parallel filters and use the
proper one depending on the required mode of operation. However,
this would be quite expensive and bulky. Alternatively, in the case
of a multimode superheterodyne receiver, the channel selection
would therefore have to be performed at baseband with program-
mable baseband filters (opamp-RC or Gm-C). This takes away
from some of the advantages of the superheterodyne architecture.
5. As discussed in the section on the choice of the IF, finding a suit-
able IF in the case of a broadband input may be challenging.
It is important to note that the above disadvantages are general statements.

Many of the disadvantages of the superheterodyne architecture can be over-
come (for certain applications and with certain trade-offs) with smart archi-
tectural and circuit design techniques. However, the general statements hold
and are valid.
2.1.2 Low IF Receiver

An alternative architecture to the superheterodyne is the low IF. This archi-
tecture is fundamentally similar to the superheterodyne approach. However,
as the name suggests, a low (i.e., close to baseband) frequency is chosen for
the IF. As a result of this choice, some fundamental changes are required in
the way the receiver is assembled. The low IF approach can be viewed as an
architecture with characteristics somewhere between a superheterodyne and
direct conversion. Therefore one would expect that the low IF architecture
would share some of the advantages and disadvantages of the superhetero-
dyne and direct-conversion approaches.
One fundamental difference in the lineup arises from the fact that due to
the low IF, a (fixed-frequency) front-end RF filter would be incapable of re-
jecting any interferers present at the image frequency. As a result, image-re-
jecting mixers or filters would have to be used instead. Also note that the
choice of the low IF is not arbitrary. The low IF has to be chosen large
enough in order to avoid aliasing of the signal at baseband. This requires the
low IF to be at least half the bandwidth of the RF. The choice of the IF for
the example of Figure 2.3 was set based on this criterion. More discussion
on this topic will follow later.
As shown in Figure 2.3, in the low IF approach (illustrated for a hypo-
thetical 802.11a system), the signal is received from the antenna and passed
on to a channel-select filter.29 The signal is then amplified by an LNA be-
fore being sent to quadrature mixers. The in-phase and quadrature-phase
outputs of the mixers are then passed on to low pass baseband filters for
channel selection. The output of the filters are passed on to baseband PGAs
and then sent to the ADCs. The final down conversion to baseband and ac-
tual image rejection are performed in the digital domain. Because of this
fact, the entire baseband analog blocks as well as the ADC would have to
have a large enough dynamic range (more that would otherwise be required)
to be able to handle the potentially large image signal that may be present at
their inputs. This requirement for a higher dynamic range typically trans-
lates into more power consumption.
In an alternative low IF implementation, as shown in Figure 2.4, the sig-
nal out of the RF quadrature mixers is passed on to complex bandpass fil-
ters. These filters act to reject the image, before passing on the signal to the
remainder of the baseband analog circuits and the ADC. This reduces the
dynamic range requirements (and therefore power consumption) on these
blocks but at the same time increases the complexity and the power con-
sumption of the filters:
앫 On the positive side, the low IF architecture:

1. Eliminates the IF SAW, IF PLL, and image-filtering components
of the superheterodyne architecture.
2. Allows for a high order of integration.
3. Relaxes the image rejection requirements as compared to a super-
heterodyne architecture. This is because in a low IF architecture the
channel present at the image frequency is likely under the regulation
of the same standard as the desired channel. As such, often, strict
guidelines exist on the maximum power level that the (closely
spaced) image channel will have. In contrast, in a superheterodyne
architecture, with its high IF, the image frequency can often have a
29
Blocks associated with duplexing and switching are not shown in this simplified diagram.
Also note a balun is not explicitly shown but assumed in the block diagram before the LNA.
This balun converts the single-ended signal to a differential signal.
RF
Ceramic PGA ADC I
DIGITAL
FILTER
LNA 6-54Mbps
PGA ADC Q
4920-5805
MHz
sin cos sin cos
RF 10 MHz
PLL
4910-5795
MHz
fbb = fif − fLO2 fif = frf − fLO1
f
fbb fif frf (signal path)
f
0 (DC ) fLO2 fLO1 (LO path)
Figure 2.3 (a) Block diagram of low IF 802.11a receiver. The low IF frequency has to be
chosen to accommodate various trade-offs. In this implementation of low IF receiver the bur-
den of image rejection is passed on to the digital mixers and filters. (b) Frequency translation
in low IF receiver (negative frequencies and image rejection not shown).
RF
Ceramic PGA ADC I
DIGITAL
FILTER
LNA 6-54Mbps
PGA ADC Q
4920-5805
MHz
sin cos sin cos
RF 10 MHz
PLL
4910-5795
MHz
Figure 2.4 Block diagram of another low IF 802.11a receiver. In this version of the imple-
mentation of the low IF receiver the burden of image rejection is primarily handled in the
analog domain. Note the complex bandpass analog filters compared to the simple low pass
analog filters of the alternative low IF implementation of Figure 2.3.
very strong amplitude level. No matter how strong the image com-
ponent amplitude is, the receiver should be able to operate properly.
4. Reduces DC offset problems associated with the direct-conversion
architecture. However, it is not as robust as a superheterodyne ar-
chitecture in regards to DC offsets. Unlike a superheterodyne ar-
chitecture, there is limited amount of gain at the RF stages before
reaching the low IF section. As such, the DC offsets at the low IF,
whether due to self-mixing or mismatches, will be amplified by the
large gain present at the low IF chain. On the other hand, canceling
the generated DC offsets using high pass filters (e.g., AC coupling)
is easier than an equivalent direct-conversion system. This is be-
cause the low IF is chosen such that there is minimal modulation
information content close to DC (in the direct-conversion scheme
and ignoring the effect of frequency offsets due to the crystals,
“DC” would be exactly in the middle of the band).
앫 On the negative side, utilizing a low IF architecture:
1. Requires the generation of the quadrature signals at the RF. This is
more difficult to do than at the lower frequencies in which the su-
perheterodyne architecture would generate its quadrature signals.
2. Requires higher performance (and hence power hungry) ADC
and/or high dynamic range (and therefore power hungry) bandpass
filters.
3. An additional set of second (low frequency) mixers are required.
These mixers may be implemented in the digital domain (but
would require the higher performance ADCs).
4. Flicker noise may be a problem, especially in complementary
metal–oxide–semiconductor (CMOS) implementations. This is pri-
marily due to the fact that the signal has not been significantly am-
plified before reaching the high flicker noise region of the receiver
(i.e., the low IF components). Clearly flicker noise is much more of
an issue for low IF than for superheterodyne but less so for low IF
than direct conversion.
5. In certain applications [such as cellular Global System for Mobile
communications (GSM)], the choice of a low IF (often 100 kHz)
may cause a slow RF PLL settling in the system if an integer-N
PLL is used. This is because in an integer-N PLL, the lowest fre-
quency that is to be resolved is directly related to the loop band-
width of the PLL. So to resolve a low IF, the loop bandwidth (BW)
of the RF PLL may need to be reduced. This may have an undesir-
able impact on the settling behavior of the RF PLL.
So is a low IF architecture suitable for a WLAN system? There have been

publications using a low IF approach for WLAN receivers; however, this ar-
chitecture is not the most popular one for WLAN. The primary reason for
this is that the wide bandwidth for the WLAN modulation causes the IF for
the low IF architecture to be relatively high. As a result the power consump-
tion of such a solution is typically higher than an equivalent direct-conver-
sion architecture. We will discuss the reasons for this in more detail after in-
troducing the direct-conversion architecture.
Note that the low IF architecture is a very popular choice for narrowband
modulated signals such as Bluetooth (with typical low IF of 2 MHz) and
GSM (with typical low IF of 100 kHz).
2.1.3 Direct-Conversion Receiver

Another alternative to the superheterodyne architecture is the direct-conver-
sion or zero-IF architecture. As shown in Figure 2.5b (show spectrum trans-
lation) and ignoring frequency inaccuracy issues with the reference (e.g.,
RF
Ceramic PGA ADC I
DIGITAL
FILTER
LNA 6-54Mbps
PGA ADC Q
4920-5805
MHz
sin cos
RF
PLL
4920-5805
MHz
fbb = frf − fLO
f
fbb frf (signal path)
f
0 (DC ) fLO
(LO path)
Figure 2.5 (a) Block diagram of direct-conversion (or zero IF) 802.11a receiver. (b) Fre-
quency translation in direct-conversion receiver (negative frequencies not shown).
crystal oscillator), the RF-modulated signal is directly translated to base-

band (i.e., zero IF). As seen in this figure, after down conversion, “DC” falls
in the middle of the modulated signal. This has consequences which will be
discussed shortly.
An example of such an architecture applied to the 802.11a standard is
shown in Figure 2.5. Note that the signal flow in this architecture is very
similar to that shown in Figure 2.3 for a low IF receiver. In this example, the
signal received from the antenna is passed through a band-select filter.30
Then the signal is amplified by the LNA and passed on to the quadrature
mixers. The frequency of the RF PLL driving the quadrature mixers is se-
lected in such a way that the down-converted signal would fall directly at
baseband (i.e., fLO = fRF). In this example the down-converted signal is low
pass filtered and amplified by the PGAs before being passed to the ADCs.
The idea of direct-conversion receivers has been around for a very long
time. In practice, however, the earlier generation designs were often plagued
with various problems. As a result, until several years ago, not many produc-
tion direct-conversion receivers were in commercial use. In contrast, the ma-
jority of WLAN transceivers shipped today utilize a direct-conversion re-
ceiver. There are several techniques utilized in today’s receivers which
enable the successful use of a direct-conversion architecture. Given the pop-
ularity of this architecture for WLAN designs, the remedies for the short-
comings of the direct-conversion architecture are described below.
The advantages and disadvantages of a direct-conversion receiver are
outlined as follows:
앫 On the positive side, the direct-conversion architecture:

1. Similar to the low IF architecture, eliminates the IF SAW, IF PLL,
and image-filtering components of the superheterodyne architecture.
2. Allows for the highest level of integration.
3. Offers the lowest cost. This is probably the strongest reason in fa-
vor of adopting a direct-conversion architecture (assuming that all
challenges associated with the architecture as outlined below can
be worked out).
4. “Avoids” the image problem. This is because the “image” is the
signal itself. Therefore, at any given time the power level of the im-
age is no more than the power level of the desired signal. Further
the image has information content associated with the desired sig-
30
Blocks associated with duplexing and switching are not shown in this simplified diagram.
Also note that a balun is not explicitly shown but assumed in the block diagram before the
LNA. This balun converts the single-ended signal to a differential signal.
nal. It is important to note that accurate quadrature balance is still

important in a direct-conversion receiver, so that proper EVM lev-
els can be maintained. More on this topic later.
5. Can be low power. Some early examples of direct-conversion re-
ceivers were higher power that their superheterodyne counterparts.
However, recent examples of WLAN receivers using direct-con-
version architectures show some of the lowest power consumptions
reported using any architecture.
6. Can be high performance. Earlier designs with direct-conversion
architecture were not as high performance as the superheterodyne
ones. However, recent publications of WLAN receivers describe
direct-conversion receivers with excellent performance numbers.
앫 On the negative side, utilizing a direct-conversion architecture:
1. Requires the generation of the quadrature signals at the RF. This is
more difficult to do than at the lower frequencies in which the su-
perheterodyne architecture would generate its quadrature signals.
Utilizing proper matching design and layout techniques as well as
possibly some form of quadrature calibration allows the designers
to overcome this shortcoming.
2. If LO reradiation is of concern,31 the LO generation circuit can be
designed in such a way that the VCO runs at an offset (or harmonic
or subharmonic) frequency relative to the incoming RF signal. This
strategy does not completely eliminate the LO reradiation problem,
but it reduces the mechanisms by which it could occur. For exam-
ple, with a brute-force approach such as that of Figure 2.5, the LO
frequency is exactly the same as the desired frequency (e.g., 5240
MHz) and can reradiate out through direct VCO coupling to the
LNA inputs. However, if the LO is synthesized using a “harmonic”
approach, the VCO can run at 2620 MHz, and it can then generate
the required 5240 MHz after the VCO stage.
3. Even more so than the low IF architecture, flicker noise can be a
problem, especially in CMOS implementations. This is primarily
due to the fact that the signal has not been significantly amplified
before encountering the high flicker noise region of the receiver
(i.e., the baseband section). Fortunately in the case of a WLAN
31
LO reradiation is the process by which the LO frequency which falls at the center of the in-
coming received signal for a direct-conversion receiver reradiates (transmits) back through
the antenna. LO reradiation can be caused by several phenomena such as asymmetric layout,
poor reverse isolation of RF blocks, excessive LO-to-RF coupling paths, and coupling of the
VCO signal through the package to the LNA inputs (if fVCO = fLO).
system, the wideband nature of the modulated signal reduces the

flicker noise problem. This is because the flicker noise primarily
impacts the inner subcarriers of the modulated signal, and for a
good design, the higher frequency subcarriers are often dominated
by thermal noise. In contrast, an otherwise equivalent narrow-
bandwidth-modulated signal down converted to baseband would be
impacted by flicker noise on average more significantly. This is
one reason why CMOS Bluetooth and GSM-based receivers sel-
dom use a direct-conversion architecture.
4. It can be significantly impacted by DC offsets. Unlike a super-
heterodyne architecture and similar to the low IF architecture, there
is a limited amount of gain at the RF stages before hitting the low
IF section. As such, the DC offsets at the baseband frequency,
whether due to self-mixing or mismatches, will be amplified by the
large gain present at the baseband chain (60 to 80 dB of baseband
gain for typical direct-conversion WLAN receivers is not uncom-
mon). On the other hand, canceling the generated DC offsets using
high pass filters (e.g., AC coupling) is more difficult than an equiv-
alent direct-conversion system. This is because, in the direct-con-
version scheme and ignoring the effect of frequency offsets due to
the crystals, DC would be exactly in the middle of the band. There-
fore, eliminating the DC components using any kind of high pass
filtering has the potential of cutting off information content includ-
ed at the center of the baseband-demodulated channel. The good
news is that in the case of the WLAN OFDM signal the zero-order
subcarrier (which would fall exactly at DC in a direct-conversion
receiver) is eliminated in the standard exactly for this reason. Even
then, the bandwidth of the high pass-filter(s) (HPFs) should be se-
lected carefully. Too low of a HPF corner would causes slow tran-
sient response. Too high of a HPF corner could cause eating into
the lower order subcarriers. The wide bandwidth of the WLAN sig-
nal helps in this case the same way that it does with the flicker
noise problem. For WLAN receivers, smart schemes have been de-
vised and published that allow for an excellent performance despite
the potentially large DC offsets at baseband.
5. Even-order nonlinearities and amplitude-modulated signals can
cause problems in a direct-conversion receiver. Filtering in the trans-
mitter, channel impairments, or the modulation itself can cause the
received signal to include AM. This AM, in conjunction with the lim-
ited second-order intermodulation performance of the RF front end,
can be translated into baseband and cause the corruption and EVM
degradation of the received baseband signal. This phenomenon is

typically called AM detection. AM detection can also be caused by
even-order nonlinearities in the baseband blocks themselves.32
6. Even-order nonlinearities can cause problems in a direct-conversion
receiver in an additional way. Unlike a superheterodyne receiver
where the IM2 component ( f1 – f2) of the RF signal would fall out of
band, in this case these two components can mix with each other and
at least partially fall in the band of interest and degrade the perfor-
mance of the receiver. Therefore the design of a RF front end with
high IIP2 is desirable. It is important to note that narrowband inter-
ferers in this case can cause an additional (undesirable and time-
varying) DC signal which can be fairly easily rejected by the HPFs.
However, broadband interferers can create broadband baseband in-
terference that can interfere with the desired signal. Normally the
IIP2 of a receiver is dominated by the mixer (due to the high gain of
the LNA and AC coupling between LNA output and mixer output).
However, there are interactions between the DC offsets and the
even-order nonlinearities that can cause the baseband blocks to con-
tribute to this problem. Assume that a baseband amplifier with infi-
nite IIP2 can be designed (clearly not possible in reality).33 Such an
amplifier would still possess DC offsets at its input and finite odd-
order nonlinearities. By going through the power series expansion of
such an amplifier, one can see that even-order nonlinearities are gen-
erated. The magnitude of the even-order nonlinearities would be a
function of the amount of DC offsets and the magnitude of the odd-
order nonlinearities in the amplifier.
2.1.4 Receiver Architectures: Summary

So what architecture should one utilize? There is no ubiquitous answer to
this question. The choice of the proper receiver architecture is dependent on
many factors, including the required system level trade-offs, modulation
type, background and expertise of the designers with the various architec-
tures, and risk tolerance.
32
Although the baseband signals typically have a high second-order intercept point (IIP2),
they are preceded with the LNA and mixer at the front end, which amplifies the signal signif-
icantly. This large signal along with the finite IIP2 of the receiver baseband blocks can then
cause AM detection.
33
The IIP2 of a baseband amplifier can be made to be very high by using symmetric layout
techniques and large-size devices. These same techniques usually do not apply to high fre-
quency blocks due to the excessive parasitic capacitances they create.
A general trend, however, is the move to direct-conversion and low IF re-

ceivers and away from superheterodyne architectures. This trend is driven
by the push for low cost, high integration designs with minimal external
components. In the case of WLAN, the majority of the designs are of the di-
rect-conversion type due to the wideband nature of the modulation used.
Table 2.1 summarizes the advantages and disadvantages of the various
receiver architectures that have been discussed in this chapter.
2.1.5 Superheterodyne Transmitter

Now that we have discussed the various receiver architectures, we need to
understand the choice of the transmitter architectures. The duals of many of
the advantages and disadvantages that apply to the receiver architecture do
apply to the transmitter. Here we will present a summary of these advan-
tages and disadvantages and only discuss in more detail cases which are
specific to the transmitter.
Figure 2.6 display a typical superheterodyne transmitter. In this trans-
ceiver the baseband digital bits are received from the digital PHY block and
Table 2.1 Summary of Advantages and Disadvantages of Various Receiver Architectures

Applied to WLAN
Receiver
Architecture Advantages Disadvantages
Superheterodyne Good overall performance Expensive, large
Usually low power Many discrete, external components
Flexible frequency plan Image problem
Avoids DC problems Difficult for multimode (need
multiple IF filters)
Direct conversion Lowest cost Quadrature RF down conversion
Can achieve very good required:
performance and low power DC problems; AM suppression, LO
for WLAN self-mixing, DC offsets and 1/f
Eliminates IF SAW, IF PLL, noise (CMOS)
and image filtering Typically requires offset or 2 × LO
Integration to avoid coupling
Avoids image problem
Low IF Eliminates IF SAW, IF PLL, Quadrature RF down conversion
and image filtering required
Avoids DC problems Requires higher performance ADC
Integration or BB filters
May require offset LOGEN
Typically higher power consumption
for WLAN applications
LPF
−8 to 8 MHz
Baseband I in DAC
LO IF I BPF BPF
1.28GHz PA out
4.92-5.805GHz
LPF LO IF Q
−8 to 8 MHz LO RF
Baseband Q in 3.64-4.525GHz
DAC
Figure 2.6 Block diagram of superheterodyne 802.11a transmitter.
passed on through the DACs to generate the appropriate I and Q analog

baseband signals. The signals are then passed through the proper low pass
filters. These filters act to reject any high frequency aliasing caused by the
DAC that may act to violate the spectral mask of the standard. The orders of
these filters are set by spectral mask requirements, the oversampling rate of
the DAC, and the characteristics of the digital filters preceding the DACs.
In this example the filtered I and Q signals are passed on to quadrature up-
converting mixers running with LO signals at 1.28 GHz and then combined
together to generate the single-sideband-modulated signal at the IF (1.28
GHz). The signal is then typically passed through a bandpass filter which acts
to reduce the spurs and can reject any residual DAC aliasing that may have
not been completely rejected by the digital and analog baseband filters. The
IF filtered signal is then passed on through the RF mixer which generated the
RF signal at 4.9 to 5.805 GHz depending on its LO frequency. Depending on
the application another stage of filtering may be applied here before passing
the signal through a power amplifier or power amplifier driver.
One reason for the need for so many filters in this architecture is the mul-
tiple up conversions. Every time there is a mixing action, one needs to be
aware of any image components that may be created (this image component
may be an image signal or, as is frequently the case, image band noise). If
the in-band noise or out-of-band noise of the transmitter is of importance,34
it would be critical to reject the image noise prior to up conversion. Other-
wise due to a reason similar to the phenomena described in the superhetero-
dyne receiver case, the transmitter SNR can suffer by as much as 3 dB.
34
The in-band noise of the transmitter would be of importance if the transmitter performance
is being set by the SNR of the transmitter. This is rarely the case. However, the out-of-band
noise of the transmitter may be of importance due to spectral regrowth and spectral mask is-
sues. Further the out-of-band noise of a transmitter is almost always of importance in full-du-
plex applications where the transmitter leakage signal into the receive band can desensitize
the receiver. The out-of-band noise of the transmitter is also of importance in multiradio ap-
plications (e.g., WLAN in a WCDMA cell phone).
One very important advantage of a superheterodyne architecture as com-

pared to a “brute-force” low IF and especially direct-conversion architecture
arises from the fact that the VCO frequencies are such that they inherently
are not operating near the operating frequency of the power amplifier. This
is important because if the VCO operates at or near the frequency of the
power amplifier the VCO can be “pulled” (more on this later), causing a sig-
nificant degradation in transmitted signal quality. The pulling effect typical-
ly becomes more of an issue at higher frequencies (where it is difficult to
provide sufficient isolation) and higher PA output levels.
Another advantage of the superheterodyne architecture is that it elimi-
nates the LOFT signal in the output caused by the direct coupling of the LO
to the RF (this issue will be discussed in more detail later).
It is important to note that, although the superheterodyne architecture has
a natural immunity to VCO pulling, the choice of the IF can impact the de-
gree of resilience of the VCO to the PA pulling. Ideally, the VCO frequen-
cies should be chosen such that the PA output frequency is not harmonically
related to the VCO.
So, in summary, the superheterodyne transmitter has a good perfor-
mance, is reasonably low power,35 offers flexible frequency planning, can
achieve a very good quadrature balance, can reject extraneous spurs due to
extended filtering, and has a high degree of resilience to PA pulling.
On the other hand, a superheterodyne transmitter is comparatively expen-
sive and large, requires many discrete components, is not very suitable for
multimode applications due to the narrowband nature of the IF filter, and
provides restricted IF choices for applications with broadband transmitter
output requirements.
An example of a modified superheterodyne transmitter architecture is
shown in Figure 2.7 (Su et al., 2002). In this architecture, the quadrature
baseband signals are applied to a bank of quadrature up-converting mixers
which up convert the signal to the IF. The signal is not combined at the IF
but rather is amplified by variable-gain amplifiers as independent quadra-
ture signals. The I and Q signals are then applied to a pair of quadrature RF
mixers which up convert the signals to the desired RF before combining
them to generate the image-rejected output signal. This combined signal is
then applied to the RF power amplifier or power amplifier driver block.
There are several differences between this method and the traditional super-
heterodyne architecture that are worth mentioning.
First, as can be seen, the external and bulky filters have been eliminated,
allowing for a much more compact implementation of this architecture as
35
The fact that this architecture requires driving off chip filters, typically with low input and
output impedances, increases the required power consumption, however.
LORF(I) LOIF(I)
x TX_I
x −
PA x
RF_OUT − LOIF(Q)
5GHZ
x
x +
x TX_Q
LORF(Q) LOIF(I)
Figure 2.7 Block diagram of “sliding IF” superheterodyne 802.11a transmitter. Similar to
the receiver, the frequency of the RF LO is an integer multiple of the IF LO (Su et al., 2002).
compared to a traditional superheterodyne architecture. The image issues

are resolved by utilizing image-reject mixers and maintaining the signals in
quadrature form baseband all the way to the desired RF. The accuracy of the
single-sideband-modulated signal (and therefore the transmitter image re-
jection) in this architecture is primarily set by the first up-conversion quad-
rature mixers. Since these mixers operate at much lower frequency than the
RF, very good transmit image rejection can be achieved. The second set of
image-reject mixers allow for the elimination of the IF filtering of the side-
band.
Second, this architecture eliminates the need for an independent PLL for
the IF stage. The RF is selected to operate at an integer multiple of the IF.
As such, the PLL generates the required LO RF signal, and a divided ver-
sion of that signal is used as the low IF.
As can be seen, this architecture eliminates some of the shortcomings of
the traditional superheterodyne architecture while maintaining some of the
advantages of that architecture. However, with everything else being the
same, it would be larger than an equivalent direct-conversion transmitter
with its six up-converted mixers and associated LO buffers (as compared to
two mixers with their associated buffers for the direct-conversion transmit-
ter).36 Further this architecture would likely burn more power than the
36
In a direct-conversion transmitter in which the VCO is designed to operate at a different
frequency than the PA, additional mixers are typically utilized. These mixers add to the area
and power consumption of such a direct-conversion architecture. However, they are not in
the signal path and, if designed properly, do not contribute to any significant EVM degrada-
tion.
equivalent direct-conversion transmitter due to its need for the typically

power hungry LO buffers.
2.1.6 Low IF Transmitter

The dual for the low IF receiver is the low IF transmitter. The low IF trans-
mitter operates very similarly to a direct-conversion transmitter but requires
full image-reject mixers. As compared to the direct-conversion transmitter,
it has the advantage that DC baseband offsets do not translate into an in-
band LOFT (although they could create out-of-channel LOFT which may
violate spectral mask requirements and may be difficult to filter). Further,
the RF output for a low IF transmitter operates slightly offset from the out-
put frequency of the VCO, and this provides some (but typically not much)
resilience to VCO pulling. In practice, in most cases, the complexity associ-
ated with the low IF transmitter is not worth its advantages and is seldom
used for WLAN applications.
Low IF transmitter architectures are more popular for narrowband sig-
nals. Often, when low IF architectures are utilized, the first stage of up con-
version is performed in the digital domain such that a high degree of image
rejection can be maintained.
2.1.7 Direct-Conversion Transmitter

An example of a direct-conversion transmitter is shown in Figure 2.8. In this
example, the baseband I and Q signals are applied to the DACs and passed
through the antialiasing filters (recall that these filters help satisfy the spec-
tral mask requirements as explained in the superheterodyne transmitter sec-
tion). The filtered signals are then applied to quadrature up-converting mix-
LPF
−8 to 8 MHz
Baseband I in DAC
LO RF I
4.92-5.805GHz PA out
4.92-5.805GHz
LO RF Q
−8 to 8 MHz
Baseband Q in DAC
LPF
Figure 2.8 Block diagram of direct-conversion transmitter.

ers before being combined and being applied to the power amplifier or pow-
er amplifier driver.
As the dual of the direct-conversion receiver, this transmitter offers the
lowest overall cost and eliminates the IF bandpass filter, the IF PLL, and the
requirements for image filtering. As such it offers the highest degree of inte-
gration. This architecture can be made to have low power consumption and
high performance.
On the other hand, this architecture requires a quadrature RF up conver-
sion of the baseband signals. As described in Section 2.1.3, obtaining high
accuracy quadrature LOs running at the high RF is difficult.
Probably the biggest issue with a traditional direct-conversion transmit-
ter is the fact that the VCO operates at the same exact frequency as the
power amplifier (or power amplifier driver). The power amplifier can cou-
ple to the VCO by various means (through bond wires of the package,
through the substrate, through the finite reverse isolation of the LO
buffers, etc.) and pull the VCO, causing a degradation in modulated signal
quality.37
The solution to the VCO pulling inherent in a direct-conversion transmit-
ter is the use of an offset LO frequency. In this mechanism, the LO is gener-
ated at a different frequency than the RF (i.e., the VCO runs at a different
frequency than the PA). The desired RF is then generated by multiplying or
dividing the generated LO by an integer or fractional number (e.g., 2, 1–2, 2–3).
From a VCO-pulling point of view, the best solutions are those in which the
VCO frequency and the PA frequency are not harmonically related (e.g.,
Fvco = 2–3 Frf). Of course it can be argued that even in this scheme, the second
harmonic of the PA falls at the same frequency as the third harmonic of the
VCO; however, the amount of coupling in these cases is typically signifi-
cantly smaller than the other cases.
Note that using fLO ⫽ fRF does require some additional signal process-
ing on the LO signal and would therefore add some size and power con-
sumption to the solution. However, given the risk of potential VCO
pulling, it is indeed rare to find a direct-conversion transmitter design in
which fRF = fLO.
Another typical problem with the direct-conversion transmitter is the DC
offsets contributing to the LOFT in the middle of the desired transmitted
band. Various standards have certain requirements on the maximum amount
of LOFT allowed, and these requirements need to be met. In a direct-
conversion transmitter, DC offsets of the baseband blocks can generate
37
VCO pulling is fairly easy to detect and verify in the lab by performing a set of experiments
(including reducing the transmitter output power by various means to identify the location
and mechanism for coupling).
LOFT. Further the LO can couple at the RF directly to the output signal and
create LOFT. The ways to work around the LOFT problems in a direct-con-
version transmitter is the use of good layout techniques as well as LOFT
calibration algorithms.
In summary, similar to the receiver case, the choice of the transmitter
architecture is a function of many factors. These include the degree of risk
tolerance required, the experience of the designers on the various architec-
tures, modulation type and characteristics, package type, substrate resistiv-
ity, whether or not a power amplifier is being integrated, the choice of
process technology, and the desired transmitter output power level. It is
important to note that for time-duplexed systems (like WLAN) it is quite
beneficial to use the same architecture for both the receiver and the trans-
mitter; otherwise two different LO frequencies would be required during
transmit and receive. Therefore, either two PLLs or a fast-settling PLL
would be required.
2.1.8 Polar Modulators

The transmitter architectures discussed in previous sections utilize quadra-
ture (or Cartesian) inputs. In other words, any point on the constellation dia-
gram (which can be represented by a vector in the signal space) is represent-
ed by the magnitude of the I and Q signals (Fig. 2.9). In this class of
transmitters, the signal information at baseband is contained in I and Q in-
puts, with each of the rails utilizing its own mixer. The up-converted and Q
signals are combined at IF or RF to generate the modulated signal.
The constellation points (and therefore modulated data) can also be rep-
resented utilizing polar coordinates as shown in Figure 2.9. In the signal
space, the magnitude component of the signal, ␤, is given by
||␤|| = 兹I苶2苶
+苶Q2苶
And the phase component of the signal is given by
冢冣
I
␣ = tan–1 ᎏ
Q
A transmitter that generates the RF signal utilizing polar baseband informa-

tion is known as a polar modulator or polar transmitter. In this scheme, typ-
ically, the phase signal is fed to a DAC which controls the input of a PLL.
This PLL is then used as a phase–frequency modulator. The output of this
PLL is fed into a highly nonlinear but very efficient power amplifier. The
amplitude information which is obtained through a different DAC adds the
2.2 PROCESS CHOICES: CMOS VERSUS SiGe BiCMOS 67
(a)
Q
β
α
(b)
I
Figure 2.9 (a) General QAM-16 constellation diagram. (b) Representation of any of the
points in the constellation diagram using Cartesian or polar coordinates.
amplitude modulation to the power amplifier.38 The biggest advantage of a

polar modulator is that it utilizes a highly efficient PA.
Polar modulators are the subject of very active research. In general, uti-
lizing polar modulators for wide-bandwidth signals as well as signals that
have a large PAR is quite challenging. WLAN OFDM signals are both very
wide bandwidth and also possess a very large PAR. Therefore, at the date of
publication, no commercial WLAN ICs utilize polar modulation. The inter-
ested reader can refer to the technical literature for more details on polar
modulators.
2.2 PROCESS CHOICES: CMOS VERSUS SiGe BiCMOS
Let us briefly discuss the choice of process technology with a particular em-
phasis on the choice between CMOS and silicon germanium (SiGe)
38
Various schemes can be utilized for this purpose. For example, the supply voltage of the
PA can be modulated using a high efficiency DC–DC converter.
BiCMOS. There have been numerous discussions, publications, conference

panels, and so on, on this topic with little uniform consensus. Further, al-
though there may seem to be consensus on certain aspects at a given time, at
a different time, based on the performance and cost of the two processes, a
different popular opinion may emerge.
Despite the statements in the previous paragraph, certain factual state-
ments can be made:
앫 Bipolar (SiGe) transistors are better for most (but not all) RF applica-
tions.
1. They offer a higher transconductance for a given DC (gm/I),39 lower
flicker noise (1/f noise), and a higher breakdown voltages times fT.40
2. Bipolar SiGe devices typically offer better modeling and therefore
often more reliable first-cut designs and faster time to market.
There are two fundamental reasons for this. First, short-channel
MOS devices are inherently much more complicated devices than
the state-of-the-art bipolar devices and therefore often require non-
physical, numerically fit models to describe their operation. Sec-
ond, quite often foundries offering the state-of-the-art CMOS
processes target their models to digital designers and therefore do
not spend as much resources or attention on the characteristics of
their devices that apply to analog and RF design (these include
characteristics such as flicker noise, thermal noise, Monte Carlo
models, and nonlinearities). The SiGe foundries often directly cater
to the analog/RF designer, and therefore not only spend more time
modeling their devices but often design their devices for the partic-
ular needs of the analog/RF designer.
앫 The CMOS process does offer some advantages:
1. CMOS offers a lower gm/I than the bipolar process. This character-
istic is useful for applications such as current sources where the de-
39
A high gm/I is often needed in analog/RF design where high gain and low power consump-
tion are desired.
40
Ft is the frequency at which the current gain of the transistor in the common emitter (or
common source) configuration with the collector (or drain) AC grounded drops to unity. In
other words, the maximum frequency at which the transistor can provide current gain. The
high breakdown voltage multiplied by fT (or fmax) is a very important device characteristic for
power amplifier applications. Although the CMOS scaling is allowing CMOS devices to
achieve extremely high fT , at the same time the maximum operating voltage of these devices
is being reduced due to issues with device stress and breakdown. Power amplifiers typically
require simultaneous high breakdown voltage and high fT , that is a characteristic at which
SiGe and especially GaAs processes excel.
vice can amplify its own noise and degrade SNR of the system. The
low gm/I may be useful in VCOs also. The reason is that typically a
large tail current source is needed in order to achieve a large swing
and therefore low phase noise. However, the noise added by the
cross-coupled devices near the zero crossing point is proportional
to their transconductance and therefore a large signal gm (Gm) “just
large enough” to ensure oscillation is desired. There are examples
of other particular applications in which a lower gm/I is desirable.
2. It can be argued that CMOS devices have higher linearity than
bipolar devices, especially in the velocity saturation region.41 How-
ever, it can also be argued that since the bipolar devices have a
higher fT and gm for a given DC, the excess gain and bandwidth can
be used along with feedback techniques in order to linearize the de-
vice. So once again there is no simple answer.
3. CMOS devices offer a higher input impedance at low frequencies.
This is quite useful for many baseband and low frequency circuits
and also for biasing high frequency circuits. However, for a similar
application, typically the total input capacitance (the capacitance
seen looking into the gate) of a CMOS device would be larger than
the total equivalent input capacitance (the capacitance seen looking
into the base) of a bipolar device. Therefore at higher frequencies,
often the input impedance of the CMOS device would be lower
than the equivalent bipolar device.
4. The triode operation of the MOS device can be quite useful in cer-
tain applications. The MOS device can replace an otherwise very
large physical (poly) resistor in a fraction of the area. Further a MOS
device can be used as a variable resistor in certain applications.
5. MOS devices make good voltage switches and can be switched
quite fast. The low frequency high impedance of the MOS devices
and their switching capability make them ideal for mixed-signal
and switched-capacitor circuits (e.g., ADCs, switch-cap filters).
Bipolar devices make for poor voltage switches as, once forced
into saturation, their reverse recovery time is quite long.
앫 Highly integrated transceivers today have significant digital content. It
is clear, therefore, that there is a need for CMOS devices in such trans-
ceivers.
41
Bipolar devices inherently have an exponential I/V characteristic and are therefore inher-
ently quite nonlinear. CMOS devices with long channel lengths have a second-order I/V
characteristic. Short-channel CMOS devices which normally operate in the velocity satura-
tion region approach a linear I/V characteristic. However, often other sources of nonlinearity
associated with short-channel devices can kick in and reduce the linearity of the device.
앫 One may conclude from the foregoing statements that BiCMOS

should then be the process of choice. However:
1. A BiCMOS fab is not as readily available, especially for fabless
companies (although this is slowly changing)
2. There is a cost premium associated with a BiCMOS process. It may
be argued that the cost of a SiGe bipolar wafer (say with a 0.35␮
CMOS option) is no more than that of a CMOS wafer (say 0.18␮
straight CMOS process). The issue here is that one is paying a
penalty in the performance of the digital devices and therefore it is
not a fair comparison. In fact, the state-of-the-art CMOS process is
often two or more generations ahead of the state-of-the-art SiGe
BiCMOS process in terms of the CMOS devices. Given that digital
applications crave for the best CMOS transistors, they often opt for
the best (reasonably priced) digital process to help improve their
performance and/or reduce their power consumption.
3. At various times, it has been argued that CMOS will be taking over
the world and wiping BiCMOS out.
4. For certain standardized applications it may not be worth the extra
premium to pay for BiCMOS, and simply meeting the standard may
be good enough. In reality, whether or not this statement is true
would depend on the market segment one is addressing. Certainly
for some consumer-based markets, especially if power consumption
is not a primary concern and if one is addressing the bottom and
cost-sensitive part of the market, it would make sense to meet the
bare minimum requirements and reduce the cost to the extent possi-
ble. However, if one is, for example, targeting the enterprise market
where very high performance is expected and mediocrity is not tol-
erated, it may be necessary to obtain the highest performance possi-
ble. In such cases reducing cost would be a secondary objective.
For desktop and laptop computing needs, several leading suppliers have
shown single-chip “vanilla” CMOS WLAN solutions with essentially all
transceiver components integrated other than possibly the high power am-
plifiers. Interestingly, for the much more power-sensitive embedded market
(e.g., WIFI for cellular phones), two trends are emerging. Certain vendors
are perusing single-chip radio + MAC + PHY all-CMOS solutions and us-
ing an external SiGe or GaAs power amplifier and integrating the two chips
in one package. Others are partitioning their solution differently: single-chip
CMOS PHY+MAC and a separate SiGe BiCMOS PA + radio. The two
chips are then integrated in one package. Like any other engineering prob-
lem, each approach has its merits and disadvantages.
In summary, it is generally accepted that for high frequency applications,

in terms of pure performance, CMOS is not the process of choice. However,
for many applications, with the help of a digital signal processor (DSP),
many of the shortcomings of the CMOS process can be corrected for. As a
result, for many applications a “high performance” and high yield CMOS
solution is achievable and comes at a lower cost than its SiGe BiCMOS
counterpart.
CHAPTER 3
Analog Impairments and Issues
In this chapter we will consider various analog impairments and physical

constraints present in real radio systems and evaluate their impact on the
system performance.42 We will also evaluate the interrelation between these
impairments, the choice of the radio architecture, and the choice of the
process technology.
We will start by examining the receiver impairments. We will then transi-
tion and discuss the transmitter impairments. We will finally consider and
discuss impairments relating to the VCO/LOGEN/PLL circuitry.
3.1 RECEIVER SENSITIVITY AND NOISE FIGURE
At the circuit level, one of the most important characteristics of a receiver is

its noise figure. There are several definitions for the noise figure, and it can
be easily shown that these definitions are equivalent. The noise figure can
be defined as
冢冣
SNRin
NF = 10 log ᎏ
SNRout
Since the SNR at the output can never be larger than the SNR at the input
(real circuits can only add noise; they cannot take away noise!), the mini-
mum NF achievable is 0 dB (ratio of 1). This can only occur if the circuit
under test adds absolutely no noise to the signal. In practice, this can never
happen and NF is always a number greater than 0 dB.
From a system perspective, the receiver NF is directly related to the sys-
tem sensitivity.43 The lower the NF of a system, the lower (i.e., better) its
sensitivity will be. Quite often, the standards do not specify the required NF
42
Some system designers affectionately refer to the radio block as the “impairment genera-
tor” block!
43
Sensitivity of a system is defined as the signal power level at which it can receive the re-
quired modulated signal at an error rate (bit error rate or packet error rate) determined by the
standard.
74 CHAPTER 3 ANALOG IMPAIRMENTS AND ISSUES
of the receiver. Instead, they specify the minimum required sensitivity for
the various data rates allowed in the standard. In order to understand the re-
lationship between the receiver NF and the system sensitivity, it is best to go
through an example.
The 802.11a/g requires the sensitivity of the system to be better than –83
dBm for the 6-Mbps rate and better than –65 dBm for the 54-Mbps rate. At
the same time, a typical (realistic) OFDM system requires approximately 20
dB of SNR44 in order to be able to generate less than 10% PER (packet error
rate, the limit required by the 802.11 standard to set the sensitivity levels).
The equivalent required SNR for the 6 Mbps is approximately 5 dB.
With the information on minimum required SNR and the required sensi-
tivity at hand, one could calculate the required NF of the system (in deci-
bels):
NF = sensitivity – kT – 10 log(BW) – SNR (3.1)
where k is the Boltzmann constant and T is the absolute temperature in

kelvin. Therefore kT represents the thermal noise floor, which is approxi-
mately equal to –174 dBm/Hz at room temperature. Here, BW is the band-
width of the modulated signal45 and SNR is the required signal-to-noise ra-
tio required at the input of the PHY slicer.
For a 6-Mbps data rate in a 802.11a/g system, the required SNR is 5 dB
and the channel bandwidth is 16.3 MHz. Therefore,
NF = –83 – (–174) – 10 log(16.3 × 106) – 5

= 13.8 dB
Of course note that this is the overall required NF for the entire system, in-
cluding any board losses (a cascade NF equation can show that these losses
directly add to the NF of the receiver). In a typical 5-GHz band, the front
end losses can be 2 to 3 dB. Therefore the NF of the receiver would have to
be in the range of 11 dB. Today, this is a fairly simple number to achieve.
State-of-the-art CMOS radios in production today offer a NF in the range of
3.5 to 5.5 dB and a chip-referred sensitivity of approximately –93 dBm.
44
It can be shown that the theoretical minimum number required for the 54-Mbps OFDM rate
is 18 dB. In practice, various imperfections cause the minimum required SNR to be larger
than 18 dB. Also note that this minimum SNR assumes a soft Viterbi decoder. A hard Viter-
bi decoding scheme would require 2 to 3 dB more SNR.
45
In reality BW should be the bandwidth of the narrowest filter in the receiver chain before
any effect that can cause noise folding. In a well-designed system, often this bandwidth is se-
lected to be equal to the bandwidth of the modulated signal.
3.2 RECEIVER DC OFFSETS AND LO LEAKAGE 75
This is an example of a case in which simply meeting the standard is not

good enough. A product that barely meets the standard would not be com-
petitive in the market.
Note that it would not be a fair comparison to compare the sensitivity
numbers of standards with different modulation bandwidths. As evident
from Equation 3.1, reducing the channel bandwidth has a very significant
impact on the sensitivity of the system when all other factors are kept con-
stant. For example, in the cellular GSM, systems are achieving sensitivity
levels well below –100 dBm. However, this is primarily because the modu-
lation bandwidth is 100 kHz. This would translate into an “inherent” sensi-
tivity advantage of 10 log(16.3 × 106) – 10 log(100 × 105), or 22 dB, as
compared to the 802.11a/g standard (all else being the same). Further some
proprietary 802.11 implementations use the narrow-banding technique in
order to offer better sensitivity. Again, there is no magic to this approach.
The radio performance has not changed. These solutions simply trade off
data rate (and throughput) for range.
3.2 RECEIVER DC OFFSETS AND LO LEAKAGE
Another set of receiver-related impairments are issues related to DC offsets

and LO leakage. In some aspects these impairments are related, since the
leakage of the LO into the input port of the mixer can cause DC offsets,
while this same leakage into the antenna port can cause LO reradiation.
Relatively small values of DC offsets can cause corruption of the base-
band-modulated signal, while large values of DC offsets can cause the satu-
ration of the following stages.
On the other hand, LO leakage back to the antenna would cause reradia-
tion of the LO, which may violate the standard’s requirements or FCC re-
quirements. In a direct-conversion receiver, this LO would typically be at
the center of the receiver desired band. In a low IF or superheterodyne re-
ceiver, the LO would typically fall on an adjacent band or an entirely differ-
ent band. In either case, these radiations would be governed by the standard
or the FCC since they would cause interference with other users.
Several ways by which DC offsets or reradiation can be created are
shown in Figure 3.1. Coupling through path 1 would cause the LO to leak to
the RF port of the mixer and can therefore create a DC offset. Coupling
through path 2 is even more problematic than through path 1 since the LO at
the RF port of the mixer is now amplified by the gain of the LNA and would
therefore create DC offsets with larger amplitudes. A large received inter-
fering signal as shown in path 3 can couple to the LO port and mix with it-
4 3
LNA
1
2
LO
Figure 3.1 Simplified receiver front end depicting various LO paths that may result in gen-
eration of DC offsets at mixer output. For example, one source of signal corruption is due to
large interferers self-mixing at the mixer (path 3) creating undesirable baseband components.
This is much more of a problem for direct-conversion receivers. The path for LO reradiation
through the antenna is also shown.
self and therefore also create DC offsets. The DC offset due to path 3 can be
time variant because it is a function of the large incoming interferer. Finally,
path 4 shows the coupling path that would cause LO reradiation. Note that
the reverse isolation of the LNA would typically help reduce the LO reradi-
ation problem, unless the coupling path is through some other path (e.g.,
through the package parasitics). It is also important to note that the LO leak-
age radiated through the antenna can reflect off of moving objects and be re-
ceived at the antenna and cause a potentially strong time-varying DC offset.
Note that there are other mechanisms that can create DC offsets, includ-
ing the even-order nonlinearities of the mixer, which will be discussed in
more detail later.
These impairments and their impact on the system performance relate
very strongly to the choice of radio architecture. First, in a direct-conversion
receiver the LO is operating at a higher frequency than in a superhetero-
dyne,46 resulting in lower mixer port-to-port isolation. Further all parasitic
coupling paths are stronger at higher frequencies. Therefore, with all else
being equal, the amount of capacitive couplings would be larger in a direct-
conversion receiver resulting in larger DC offsets. Further, all of the above
mentioned impairments that result in DC offsets can impact a direct-conver-
sion receiver quite severely. Recall that due to lack of significant amount of
46
A “low injecting” LO superheterodyne architecture is assumed (i.e., one at which the LO
frequency is lower than the RF frequency). A low injecting superheterodyne architecture is
the most commonly used one. A high injecting superheterodyne architecture would have
larger parasitic couplings at the RF sections than a direct-conversion architecture.
3.2 RECEIVER DC OFFSETS AND LO LEAKAGE 77
RF gain in a direct-conversion architecture, the baseband chain is required

to possess a significant amount of gain. Therefore any DC offsets present at
the output of the mixer (whether created due to LO leakages, nonlinearities,
or device mismatches) would be amplified by this large gain and would
likely saturate the following stages. Further the DC offsets lie in the center
of the desired modulated signal and can corrupt this desired signal. It is of-
ten required, therefore, that these DC offsets be removed. Several schemes
have been proposed for removing these DC offsets. These typically include
some form of high pass filtering or the injection of a correction DC signal in
the signal path. Most schemes cancel most or all of the DC offsets in the
analog domain. Others rely on digital signal processing for removing some
or all of the DC offsets. If a digital scheme is used, it is important to ensure
that the analog baseband signal path will not be saturated by the DC offsets
and that the ADC has sufficient excess dynamic range for large DC offsets.
For most practical WLAN direct-conversion receivers, the DC offsets have
to be canceled in the analog domain. This is because of a very high amount
of gain in the receive signal path and the potential for clipping due to DC
offsets.
As described above, not only the amount of DC offsets generated in a su-
perheterodyne receiver would be smaller than those of a direct-conversion
receiver, but also their impact on the system performance is typically in-
significant due to the lower gain of the receive chain at the baseband fre-
quencies.
Similar factors limit the LO reradiation in a direct-conversion receiver.
The fact that the LO operates at a higher frequency that the superheterodyne
receiver47 causes larger coupling of the LO to the antenna port and therefore
a larger LO reradiation. However, the fact that the LO reradiation is in the
center of the desired channel may translate into looser specifications im-
posed by the standard or the FCC. If a band-select filter is not used between
the antenna and the LNA, and depending on the choice of intermediate fre-
quency, a superheterodyne receiver may have the most severe LO reradia-
tion specifications. However, if a band-select filter is utilized, the reradiated
LO signal would be significantly attenuated by this filter. With a band-se-
lect filter, a low IF receiver would probably impose the most stringent re-
quirements on the LO reradiation specifications (since the frequency of the
LO is quite high and the limited Q band-select filter cannot attenuate the LO
signal).
For the most part the same remedies can be applied to solving the DC-
offset-related issues as well as the LO reradiation issues.
47
Again a low side-injecting superheterodyne architecture is assumed.
Good matching and layout are critical to reducing asymmetries than can
translate into DC offset generation and differential leakages. However, even
with the best reasonable layouts, for a direct-conversion receiver, some
form of DC offset compensation should be used.
Two popular approaches exist for DC offset cancellation at baseband.
The first approach relies on sampling the offsets at low gain settings (such
that the receive chain is not saturated) and compensating the offsets at the
proper points through the receive chain with high resolution DACs.48 In this
scheme, the system relies on the high absolute accuracy of the baseband
gain settings to calculate and apply the proper DC offset cancellation value
as the baseband gain settings change during the receiver operation. If the
DC offsets are a function of temperature, the DC correction process has to
be repeated periodically or by monitoring a temperature sensor. The advan-
tage of this scheme is that in normal operation there are no actual high pass
filters in the receive chain and therefore the EVM of the inner OFDM sub-
carriers is not adversely impacted. The disadvantage of this technique is that
it is an open-loop scheme which relies on certain assumptions. As long as it
can be guaranteed that the assumptions would hold under all operating con-
ditions, this scheme works well.
An alternative approach to solve the baseband DC offset problems in a
direct-conversion receiver is to use some form of a HPF. The HPFs can be
implemented in a variety of ways, including simple AC coupling and DC
offset cancellation loop. In either case, the proper placement of the location
of the HPF pole is critical. The filter poles cannot be placed too high in fre-
quency, since this would result in the attenuation of the low index subcarri-
ers. If the HPF pole is placed too high in frequency, it may cause a severe
degradation in the EVM of the lower subcarriers due to significant group
delay variation at the lower OFDM subcarriers. At the same time, the filter
poles cannot be placed too low in frequency, because this would result in
very slow transient response. Given the limited amount of time present in
the 802.11 preambles and the many actions that need to be taken during this
time, it is important that any transients in the system settle quickly. Since no
single pole location may be able to settle both these requirements simultane-
ously, an “agile” HPF pole may be required. Such an agile pole would jump
to a high frequency during preamble (the preamble is quite robust to impair-
ments) in order to allow for fast settling and then jump to a low frequency
during the payload in order to preserve the payload content. The advantage
of the HPF method of DC rejection is that it relies on a DC offset cancella-
48
Alternatively offset values can be estimated at multiple gain settings for higher accuracy
offset cancellation at the expense of longer calibration time.
3.3 RECEIVER FLICKER NOISE 79
tion scheme that is continuously tracking DC offsets and canceling them.

On the other hand, the HPFs will impact the quality of the inner OFDM sub-
carriers and can cause degradation in overall performance. The degree of
the EVM degradation would depend on many factors, including the number
of HPF poles in the baseband section, the location of the poles, and whether
agile HPFs are used.
If HPFs are used for DC cancellation purposes in the receiver baseband
section, the optimal system performance (especially in the presence of fre-
quency offsets) may require the use of a mixed-mode automatic frequency
control loop. More will be discussed on this topic in Chapters 6 and 7.
In order to improve the LO reradiation issue in a direct-conversion re-
ceiver, in addition to the good layout techniques mentioned, the use of a
high reverse isolation LNA would be useful (assuming the coupling is
through the LNA).
3.3 RECEIVER FLICKER NOISE
Another receiver impairment is the flicker, or 1/f, noise. Flicker noise is a

form of noise which, like the other forms of noise, limits the SNR of the re-
ceiver. However, unlike thermal noise, flicker noise has a low pass charac-
teristic, as the example in Figure 3.2b depicts. Assuming a flat frequency re-
sponse for the received desired channel, the SNR of the received signal
would have a high pass characteristic. For an OFDM-modulated signal
(with flat frequency response) subjected to strong flicker noise, this would
translate into the lower indexed subcarriers having a lower SNR than the
higher indexed subcarriers.
Figure 3.2b shows an example of the characteristics of flicker noise typi-
cal of a CMOS process. In this example, the intersection of the point where
the thermal noise floor crosses the flicker noise line is called the flicker
noise corner. For a “typical” CMOS process this corner frequency can be
around 100 kHz (as shown in this example). However, this corner is a func-
tion of several major factors which can easily change the corner frequency
by an order of magnitude. These factors include the thermal noise floor (the
lower the thermal noise floor, the higher the flicker noise corner frequency)
and the amount of flicker noise (the higher the amount of flicker noise, the
higher the flicker noise corner frequency).
It is also important to note that, although another name for flicker noise is
1/f noise, flicker noise does not always have a 1/f frequency dependence.
The value for the flicker noise exponent would determine the slope of the
flicker noise as a function of frequency. Typical values for this exponent
RF
Ceramic PGA ADC I
DIGITAL
FILTER
LNA 6-54 Mbps
PGA ADC Q
4920-5805
MHz
sin cos
RF
PLL
4920-5805
MHz
(a)
V 2/Hz
10–14
1
ᎏᎏ
–15
f
v苶苶苶2i 苶, e苶q苶 10
ᎏ
⌬f
10–16
10–17
10–18 f
10 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 Hz
(b)
Figure 3.2 (a) Direct-conversion receiver architecture block diagram showing relatively
low amount of gain before hitting high flicker noise baseband section. (b) example of flicker
noise characteristics. (Figure 3.2b after Gray and Meyer, Analysis and Design of Analog Inte-
grated Circuits, Wiley, New York, 1994.)
range from 0.5 to 1.5. A general relation for a MOS field-effect transistor
(MOSFET) flicker noise voltage referred to the gate of the device is given
by
⌬f苶
K苶
v苶苶2i苶,苶e苶q苶 = ᎏn
CoxWLf
where K is the flicker noise coefficient, Cox is the gate oxide unit capaci-
tance, W is the width of the device, L is the length of the device, f is the fre-
quency of interest, and n is the frequency exponent (often equal to or close
to unity). Note that this is a very simple relation that shows the behavior of
the device flicker noise as a function of device and process characteristics.
3.3 RECEIVER FLICKER NOISE 81
However, flicker noise in a MOSFET device is a very complicated phenom-

enon and is an area of active research. For example, it is generally accepted
that the dominant mechanisms causing flicker noise in NMOS devices are
surface defects and scattering phenomena (the so-called number fluctuation
theory). However, the dominant mechanisms causing flicker noise in a
PMOS device are bulk crystal defects (the so-called mobility fluctuation
theory).49 So it is not unexpected that PMOS devices have a significantly
different flicker noise magnitude and characteristic than NMOS devices. As
it turns out, for modern CMOS processes, PMOS devices typically have
much lower flicker noise than their NMOS counterparts. It is interesting to
also note that “native” devices50 often have lower flicker noise characteris-
tics than a similarly sized normal device in the same process.
Also note that the foregoing equation indicated that the input referred
flicker noise of a MOSFET device is bias independent. In reality, especially
for short-channel MOSFET devices, this is not the case. Also, note that the
exponent n may have a value other than unity.
It is clear from the foregoing that the designer has many knobs to adjust
in designing a CMOS circuit in order to improve the flicker noise perfor-
mance of the circuit. However, often trade-offs have to be made (size, pow-
er consumption, bandwidth of circuit, etc.) which limit the capability of the
designer in reducing the impact of flicker noise. Furthermore fairly high
flicker noise levels are part of the practical characteristics of today’s modern
CMOS processes.
In general the above equation gives a first-order indication of the parame-
ters that are available to the designer in order to reduce the flicker noise of a
device, but for more accurate estimates more sophisticated equations and
device modeling need to be used. The more advanced CMOS device models
such as BSIM4 have many more parameters in order to obtain a better fit for
the flicker noise of the MOSFET devices.
In contrast to CMOS devices, bipolar devices often have much lower
flicker noise corners. Modern bipolar processes exhibit flicker noise cor-
ners in the range of 10 to 1000 Hz and are therefore much preferred to
CMOS devices from a flicker noise point of view. One possible explana-
tion for the low flicker noise corner of bipolar devices as compared to
49
This difference between NMOS and PMOS devices seems to make sense given that it is
generally believed that NMOS devices are surface channel devices where the carriers have
more interaction with the Si–SiO2 surface states, while PMOS devices are buried channel de-
vices interacting primarily with the lattice. Typically carrier operation below the surface re-
sults in much less flicker noise.
50
Native devices are devices that have not been subjected to the threshold adjust implant and
therefore have the native threshold voltage of the process. This native threshold voltage is of-
ten close to 0 V, making the device behave almost like a depletion device.
CMOS devices is that state-of-the-art bipolar devices are inherently verti-

cal devices (i.e., the transistor action occurs in the vertical dimension: see
cross section in Figure 3.3a), whereas MOS devices, especially NMOS de-
vices, are much more of surface devices (i.e., the transistor action occurs
on the surface of the device underneath the gate: see Fig. 3.3b). Since dur-
ing the processing of the wafers often processing debris “floats” to the top
and gets trapped at the surface, this causes many more surface defects in
the MOS device processing. These defects in turn give rise to higher flick-
er noise.
How does the flicker noise impact the choice of the receiver architecture?
In a superheterodyne receiver, due to the high amount of total gain at the RF
and IF stages, the signal is well amplified before encountering the high
flicker noise blocks of the baseband circuits. So, in general, flicker noise is
not a big issue for a superheterodyne architecture. In contrast, in a direct-
conversion receiver such as that of Figure 3.2a, a minimum amount of gain
is available at the RF front end. As such the flicker noise of the baseband
blocks (mixer switching devices, filters, PGAs, ADCs, etc.), especially in a
Emitter Base Collector
n
p
(a)
Gate
Oxide Gate
Source Drain
N+ x N+
L P
Body
(b)
Figure 3.3 (a) Simplified cross section of bipolar junction transistor. Primary “transistor
action” occurs in the vertical dimension. (b) Simplified cross section of N-MOSFET. Pri-
mary action occurs in the horizontal dimension.
3.4 RECEIVER INTERFERERS AND INTERMODULATION DISTORTION 83
CMOS implementation, can add significantly to the noise level of the low
frequency content of the modulated desired signal.
Another factor that determines the extent of the impact of the flicker
noise on the received signal quality in a direct-conversion receiver is the
bandwidth of the desired channel. For a desired signal with a wide band-
width, the NF (and therefore SNR) would degrade for the lower frequency
content, but averaged over the wideband, the signal quality may not be sig-
nificantly impacted. For a narrowband signal, on the other hand, the entire
bandwidth of the signal may be in the flicker-noise-dominated region of the
spectrum, and an appreciable impact on the average NF of the system will
be observed.
It is instructive to take a numerical example for a couple of standards.
First consider the 802.11a signal. When down converted to baseband in a
typical direct-conversion receiver, the highest frequency content of the de-
sired signal is at 8.125 MHz. With a typical flicker noise corner of, say, 400
kHz, only the lowest two OFDM subcarriers will be impacted by this flicker
noise, and on average only a marginal hit to the NF will result. On the other
hand, consider the same receiver receiving a GSM/EDGE-modulated signal,
whose highest frequency content after down conversion to baseband is 100
kHz (since the RF signal bandwidth in GSM/EDGE is 200 kHz). Clearly the
average NF of this system is quite severely impacted by the flicker noise.
This is one fundamental reason (among others) why most GSM receivers
use a low IF architecture with the IF at about 150 kHz rather than a direct-
conversion architecture.
3.4 RECEIVER INTERFERERS AND

INTERMODULATION DISTORTION
Another set of receiver impairments is related to the nonlinearities of the re-

ceiver. An ideal receiver would faithfully amplify, frequency down convert,
and filter the desired signal without creating any nonlinear components at
the output. In reality, nonlinearities do exist in a practical receiver and as a
result distortion components are generated. The impact of these nonlinear
components is that they impact the EVM (and therefore quality) of the re-
ceived signal and can increase the PERs in the receiver.
3.4.1 IP3, IP2, and P1dB

Parameters often used to characterize the nonlinearity of a circuit are the
harmonic distortion (HD) and intermodulation distortion (IM) numbers.
Specifically, the second- and third-order harmonic distortion numbers (HD2
and HD3) and intermodulation distortion numbers (IM2 and IM3) are of
great interest in characterizing circuits operating under nonlinear condi-
tions.
It can easily be shown that, by passing a single-tone sine wave signal
with frequency f1 through a circuit with second-order nonlinearities, a com-
ponent with twice the frequency at 2f1 is created. This component is referred
to as the HD2 and it is usually specified in terms of its amplitude relative to
the desired signal in decibels relative to the carrier (dBc). Similarly, by
passing two equal-amplitude sine wave signals with frequencies f1 and f2
through the same circuit, frequency components at f1 – f2 and f2 – f1 would
be created.51 These components are referred to as IM2 components. IM2
components are also typically specified in terms of their amplitude relative
to each of the desired tones (in dBc). Note that even-order nonlinear terms
can also generate DC terms. Figure 3.4 describes these concepts pictorially.
Note that second-order nonlinear components (HD2 and IM2) in a non-
frequency-translating and non-baseband circuit can be rejected by using a
bandpass filter and may therefore not cause significant problems at the sys-
tem level. It is also important to note that even-order nonlinearities (includ-
ing HD2 and IM2) in a circuit can be minimized by using differential cir-
cuits. Ideal differential circuits will have infinite rejection of even-order
harmonics since they possess an odd transfer function. Mathematically it
can be shown that the power series expansion of an odd transfer function
will have no even-order terms. Of course, in a practical circuit, imperfec-
tions in the layout symmetry would cause finite levels of even-order distor-
tion components.
Similarly, by passing a single tone at frequency f1 through a circuit with
third-order nonlinearities, components at 3f1 are generated (HD3). By pass-
ing two tones with frequencies at f1 and f2, nonlinear components (IM3) at
2f1 – f2 and 2f2 – f1 are generated. It is important that, although HD3 compo-
nents can typically be rejected by filtering, IM3 components can fall in band
(or very close in to the band) and are therefore difficult to practically filter.
Close attention, therefore, should be given to reducing the amount of third-
order nonlinearities of the circuit.
Parameters often used to characterize the nonlinearities of the receiver
are the second-order intercept point (IP2), the third-order intercept point
(IP3), and in general the nth-order intercept point (IPn). The linearity of an
amplifier is easily characterized by its intercept point. The second-order in-
tercept point quantifies second-order linearity performance while the third-
order intercept point quantifies third-order linearity. Figure 3.4 displays a
51
We are assuming non-frequency-translating circuits at this point. We will discuss frequen-
cy-translating circuits (like mixers) later.
IP2
40
Fundamental
20
0
Output Power (dBm)
−20 IP3
−40
1
1 1
−60
3rd Order
3 IM Product
−80
2nd Order
1
−100 IM Product
2
−120 IIP3 IIP2
−60 −40 −20 0 20 40

Input Power (dBm)
Figure 3.4 Extrapolation of linear term, second-order IM product, and third-order IM prod-
uct to obtain IP2 and IP3 points. Given the IP2 and IP3 terms and the input power, the
amount of intermodulation distortion in dBc can be calculated for “simple” nonlinearities.
typical plot of the desired signal (fundamental) as well as the second- and
third-order intermodulation products as the input power is swept on the x
axis. The fundamental will increase at the same rate as the input power. The
second-order intermodulation product will increase 2 dB for every 1-dB in-
crease in the input power and the third-order intermodulation product will
increase by 3 dB for every 1-dB increase in input power.52 The nth intercept
point is the point at which the extrapolated nth-order intermodulation prod-
uct intersects the fundamental as the input power is swept. The IP2 and IP3
points are labeled in Figure 3.4 according to this definition. Notice that,
since the slopes of the curves are known, the intercept points can be calcu-
lated from a single point without actually performing the swept measure-
ment. This ease of measurement is why intercept points are so valuable as a
way to quantify performance.
52
This is due to the fact that the second-order distortion is due to an P 2in term in the power se-
ries expansion of the transfer function. An P 2in term, in the log domain (dB) would have a 2-
dB/dB slope. The same explanation would apply to the nth-order distortion terms.
A few important points need to be made at this point. Most comments be-
low are made in reference to IP2 and/or IP3, but the general concepts are ap-
plicable to IPn:
앫 IP2 and IP3 extrapolations as described above only apply for circuits
with “simple” nonlinearities that are characterized by a power series
expansion of the transfer function. These extrapolations no longer ap-
ply if the transfer function includes complex nonlinearities such as
kinks, crossover distortion, and hard clipping. For example, if the
transfer function includes a change in the region of operation as a
function of the input power, the theoretical IP2 and IP3 concepts as
described do not apply for large signals (they may still apply over a
limited region of the transfer function).
앫 The linear gain term as well as the third-order distortion term “com-
presses” well before the actual IP3 point (this is shown for the linear
term but not for the third-order term in Fig. 3.4). In other words, the
IP3 point is only a theoretical extrapolated point. In a real circuit this
point is never achieved. For example, in Figure 3.4, if an input power
of –20 dBm is applied, an output linear power of –20 dBm will not be
observed. Further a third-order IM term of –20 dBm will not be ob-
served. IP3 is only an extrapolated value based on small input levels
where weak nonlinearities dominate the circuit’s behavior. At large
input levels, where the input level is close to the IP3 value, strong non-
linearities dominate (quite often dominated by higher order nonlinear-
ities such as IM5 and IM7).
앫 The input power level at which the IP3 point is reached is called the
input IP3 or IIP3. The corresponding output power level is known as
the output IP3 or OIP3. The relation between the IIP3 and OIP3 is giv-
en by the following simple equation: OIP3 = gain + IIP3.
앫 For receiver subblocks, the linearity is often expressed in terms of
input-related quantities (in this case IIP3). This is because the IIP3 is
an indication of the largest input signal the receiver can receive before
running into issues related to nonlinearities. On the other hand, for
transmitter subblocks, the linearity if often expressed in terms of out-
put-related quantities (in this case OIP3). This is because in the case of
a transmitter the quantity of interest is the largest power the transmit-
ter can emit before running into issues based on nonlinearities.
앫 Using basic geometric relations and Figure 3.4 it can be shown that
the input and output IP3 follow the following relations:
IIP3 = Pin + 1–2 (⌬IM3) OIP3 = Pout + 1–2 (⌬IM3) (3.2)

Similarly it can be shown that for IP2
IIP2 = Pin + (⌬IM2) OIP2 = Pout + (⌬IM2) (3.3)
These relations can be used to calculate the relevant intercept points

given a single measured (or simulated) IM value and the input or out-
put power level. Equivalently, given the intercept points and the pow-
er level, the relevant IM value can easily be calculated.
앫 In a frequency-translating receiver circuit (a receiver that includes a
mixer in the lineup), the IM3 components that are of interest would
fall at the following frequencies: 2f1 – f2 – fLO and 2f2 – f1 – fLO.
앫 In a frequency-translating receiver circuit (a receiver that includes a
mixer in the lineup), the IM2 components that are of interest would
fall at the following frequencies: f1 – f2 and f2 – f1.53 It is interesting to
note that these components would only be of interest in a direct-
conversion receiver and can easily be rejected by a filter in other re-
ceiver architectures. Even in a direct-conversion receiver, given a per-
fectly differential mixer (but a nonlinear front end), the even-order
harmonics will be rejected. In reality, however, due to imperfections
in the layout and the manufacturing process, a finite amount of IM2
components will be generated.
Most standards, including the 802.11 standard, do not specify any IP3 or
IP2 (or IM3 or IM2) requirements. Instead they often specify two quantities:
1. The maximum level of desired signal the receiver needs to be able to

handle.
2. The maximum level of interference signal the receiver is required to
be able to handle while receiving a “weak” desired signal. Often, this
requirement is specified in such a way that in the presence of an “in-
terferer” the receiver should be able to perform at no worse than 3 dB
above the sensitivity level (while no interference is present). The defi-
nition of an interferer varies from standard to standard.
In the case of 802.11a/g the receiver is required to be able to receive a

maximum desired signal level (at the antenna) of at least –30 dBm for all the
modulation types with a PER of no more than 10% for 1000-byte packets.
Clearly, a typical practical receiver would provide a higher maximum re-
53
An IM2 component at f1 + f2 – 2fLO can also be generated. Since the amplitude of 2fLO is
normally small, this IM2 component is typically negligible.
ceived signal capability for the lower data rates. In reality many of today’s
receivers are capable of performing significantly better than this by utilizing
various gain control techniques and due to their high linearity levels. The
equivalent maximum required capability of the receiver in the 802.11b stan-
dard is –10 dBm for a frame error rate (FER) of 8%.
802.11a/g specifies the receiver should be able to receive a desired signal
at 3 dB above the sensitivity at the presence of an OFDM interferer 20 MHz
(25 MHz for 802.11g) away at –63 dBm. This is known as the adjacent
channel interferer (ACI) requirement. Further it requires the same 3-dB de-
graded sensitivity level in the presence of an OFDM interferer 40 MHz
away at –47 dBm power level. This is known as the alternate adjacent chan-
nel interference (AACI) level requirement. These requirements apply to all
OFDM rates. However, in the relative decibel scale, the requirement is more
stringent for the lower data rates than it is for the higher data rates. As an ex-
ample, a 6-Mbps desired signal is required to have +16 dB of ACI, whereas
a 54-Mbps signal is only required to have –1 dB of ACI.
For the 802.11b standard, the interference is specified to have a power 35
dB above the desired signal at 25 MHz away while receiving a desired 11-
Mbps CCK signal at 6 dB above the required sensitivity level (i.e., –70
dBm) at less than 8% FER.
How do these system level requirements relate to the IP2 and IP3 of the
receiver? This is a fairly complex issue that deserves more discussion. The
following important points need to be considered:
앫 Two-tone IP3 and IP2 values for a circuit are indicative of the interfer-
ence tolerance of the system but certainly do not describe the whole
picture. Similarly they provide information on how large of a (desired)
modulated signal the system can tolerate but once again does not pro-
vide the whole picture.
앫 A two-tone CW signal has a PAR of 6 dB. This is far different that the
PAR of an 802.11 OFDM-modulated signal which can have theoreti-
cal PARs of as much as 17 dB. Since nonlinearities present in a circuit
typically respond to large instantaneous signals present in the input, it
should not be surprising that they would respond quite differently to
an OFDM signal that has the same average power as a two-tone CW
signal.
앫 An 802.11 OFDM signal can be approximated by summing 52 CW
signals in what is known as a multitone test. However, if the tones in a
multitone are phase coherent, very large peak signals can be generat-
ed. Applying such a signal to the circuit would likely result in pes-
simistic predictions of the behavior of the circuit in the presence of a
real OFDM-modulated signal. On the other hand, if a multitone test

with random phases are used, the results may vary depending on the
resultant phase coherence of the generated tones.
앫 An OFDM-modulated signal is a much more complex waveform than
a two-tone CW signal. The statistical nature of the OFDM signal
means that the peaks occur at a nondeterministic rate. This makes the
comparison with a deterministic two-tone test even more complicated.
The response of the circuit to an OFDM-modulated signal (and the re-
sultant EVM) would depend not only on the peak signal but also on
the frequency of these occurrences.
앫 Because of the general complications outlined above, the relation be-
tween a two-tone IP3 and the EVM of an 802.11 OFDM-modulated
signal can not be expressed in a simple formula. Issues such as the
types of nonlinearities in both the phase and the amplitude and the de-
gree of soft versus hard limiting of the circuits impact the amount of
backoff needed from the IP3 point of the circuit in order to successful-
ly receive an OFDM-modulated signal. As a general rule of thumb 15
to 20 dB of backoff from the IP3 point of the circuit would be required
in order to achieve a PER of less than 10% on a 54-Mbps OFDM-
modulated signal. Certain digital postdistortion techniques may be ap-
plied to the signal in order to improve the tolerance of the system to
nonlinearities experienced in the analog/RF sections of the receiver. It
is also important to note that, as expected, the highest data rates with
their high order modulations are much more sensitive to phase and
amplitude nonlinearities. The lowest data rates with BPSK- and
QPSK-type modulations are quite tolerant of nonlinearities, including
severe amounts of clipping in the receiver.
We will now consider an example. Assume a two-tone –33-dBm/tone in-

terferer at 50 MHz offset from the desired signal applied to the input of a
LNA.54 Further assume that the desired sensitivity level in the presence of
the interferer is –78 dBm and that an SNDR of 10 dB is required on the de-
54
Note that this is simply an example and not a real requirement set by the 802.11 standard.
Further, note that for the sake of simplicity we will consider both the interferer and the de-
sired signals as CW tones. In reality, for 802.11, the interference is specified as a modulated
signal interfering with a desired modulated signal.
Different modulated signals will have different degrees of tolerance to narrowband versus
broadband interferers. In general, OFDM signals are much more resilient to narrowband in-
terferers. A narrowband interferer impacting an OFDM-modulated signal can be viewed as a
multipath faded channel. Since the OFDM signal is designed to have tolerance against such a
channel, it would naturally be resilient against such interference also.
sired signal. Finally assume that in this mode the system performance is
limited purely by nonlinearities and that the noise floor is significantly be-
low –88 dBm. Given Equation 3.1 we can calculate the overall required IIP3
for the LNA (Fig. 3.5a):
IIP3 = –33 + 1–2 (88 – 33)

= –5.5 dBm
It is important to note that in a typical wireless receiver at maximum front-

end gain settings the LNA is typically not the limiting factor in setting the
linearity of the receiver. This topic will be discussed in more detail short-
ly.
Consider a second example. We will make the same assumptions as the
previous example but apply the signal to the mixer of a direct-conversion re-
ceiver. As shown in Figure 3.5b, and explained earlier, the two tones and the
mixer second-order nonlinearities would generate a component at baseband
as shown in Figure 3.5b. Assuming that the applied tones are at frequencies
f1 and f2, the IM2 component would fall at f1 – f2. The magnitude of this
component referred to the input of the mixer would be
IIP2 = –33 + (88 – 33)

= +22 dBm
Of course the calculated IIP2 and IIP3 numbers in the above examples are
the minimum acceptable levels for these terms.
As a general note, some of the most stringent IIP2 requirements for a
direct-conversion receiver are set by cellular standards such as
GSM/EDGE/ WCDMA. This is because the maximum power of an interfer-
ing signal as well as the maximum ratio of the interferer power to the de-
sired channel power can be quite large in the GSM/EDGE/WCDMA stan-
−33 dBm
e.g.: LNA IM3 e.g.: Mixer IM2
−33 dBm
−78 dBm
−88 dBm −88 dBm
2f1−f2 f1 f2 2f2−f1 0 RF
(a) (b)
Figure 3.5 (a) IM3 example showing impact on LNA. (b) IM2 example showing impact
on mixer in direct-conversion receiver.
dard. As compared to such systems, the IIP2 requirements for an 802.11 di-
rect-conversion receiver are not very stringent.
Further, some of the most stringent IIP3 requirements for a receiver are
set by full-duplex cellular standards such as WCDMA. In these systems, the
receiver and the transmitter operate at the same time but on different (but
close-by) frequency bands. A frequency duplexer is used to isolate the re-
ceiver from the high power levels of the transmitter. Even with this duplex-
er in place and 50 to 60 dB of isolation, the receiver is required to receive
very small desired signals (<–100 dBm) in the presence of such a large “in-
terferer.” As compared to such systems, the IIP3 requirements for an 802.11
direct-conversion receiver are not very stringent.
An exception to the above noted examples in which the linearity of the
WLAN receiver is quite important is in cases where the WLAN is to be op-
erated along with other transceivers. For example, in a WLAN-enabled cell
phone application, the WLAN receiver is to be able to operate despite the
presence of large signal transmitters on the cellular radio. In the WLAN, for
example, the transmitter may be transmitting a +26-dBm signal at 2.2 GHz,
while the WLAN is trying to receive a –93-dBm signal at 2.4 GHz. Clearly
a large degree of rejection of the cellular transmitter and a high linearity
front-end WLAN receiver are required in such a case.
As will be apparent in the next few paragraphs, in many receiver systems,
including those for 802.11, the typical linearity limiting block is the RF
front end, in particular the RF mixer.
To make this clear, let us reexamine the lineup of a typical 802.11a
direct-conversion receiver as shown in Figure 3.6.
The selectivity of the antenna, the matching network (not shown), and the
optional bandpass filter attenuate the far-out interferers. At the same time,
the baseband low pass filters reject the close-in interferers. The LNA and
the mixer have to tolerate the interferers. Furthermore, as it will become ap-
parent, due to the gain of the LNA, the RF mixer is typically the block that
sets the final linearity performance limits in the receiver.
Above the block diagram in Figure 3.6, the typical voltage conversion
gain figures are shown in the first row, with a “typical” LNA maximum gain
of 25 dB and a typical active mixer gain of 6 dB. The second row displays
typical IIP3 levels for the LNA and the mixer. Finally, the third row dis-
plays typical IIP2 levels for these blocks.55 In this example, (IIP3mixer –
55
Note that these numbers can vary significantly from design to design. The numbers used
for this example are “typical” numbers based on fairly traditional designs reported in the lit-
erature. However, various (nontraditional) linearization techniques have been reported to im-
prove the IIP3 of the mixer. Further, many calibration techniques have been used to improve
the IIP2 of the mixer. With such techniques applied, the mixer may no longer be the limiting
factor in the linearity performance of the receiver.
Block Gain (dB) = 25 6

Block IIP3 (dBm) = −2 15
Block IIP2 (dBm) = 20 42
RF
Ceramic PGA ADC I
DIGITAL
FILTER
LNA 6-54 Mbps
PGA ADC Q
4920-5805
MHz
sin cos
RF
PLL
Figure 3.6 Block diagram of simplified 802.11a receiver with gain, IIP3, and IIP3 of LNA
and mixers identified (“typical” numbers assumed). Given these numbers, it should be clear
that in this system the mixer would limit the linearity of the receiver. Gain control in the
LNA can be utilized to reduce the gain and reduce the impact of mixer linearity on system
performance. Clearly, there would be a trade-off between NF and linearity in such a state.
IIP3lna) < Gain_lna. It should be clear that the mixer linearity would limit
the overall IIP3 performance of the receiver. Similarly, (IIP2mixer –
IIP2lna) < Gain_lna. The mixer in this example also limits the overall IIP2
performance of the receiver. Stated differently, the mixer in this example
would not be a limiting factor in the linearity performance of the receiver if
it would satisfy the following requirements: IIP3mixer Ⰷ +23 dBm and
IIP2mixer Ⰷ +45 dBm. Without special design techniques, achieving these
numbers, especially at the 5-GHz band, without sacrificing some other per-
formance measure is difficult.
As shown in this example, the mixer is the limiting block in the linearity
performance of the receiver when the LNA is at its higher gain settings. Under
conditions in which the system can back off the LNA gain, the mixer may no
longer be the limiting block in the linearity performance of the receiver. Under
these conditions, the LNA will become the limiting block. However, at lower
gain settings, it is typically easier to achieve higher IIP3 performance for the
LNA. The toughest requirements on the receiver are set for the condition at
which the receiver is required to receive signals at or close to the sensitivity
level while being jammed by a large interferer. Under these conditions, simul-
taneous low NF and high linearity conditions are required to be met.
It is worth mentioning that front-end linearization techniques, in particu-
lar those applicable to linearization of the front-end mixer, are a very hot re-
search area. A high linearity RF front end (hence mixer) is essential to the
design of a receiver front end for a “software radio”: a radio which can han-
dle multiple standards by being programmed to the proper mode.
As in any other engineering problem, the designer faces trade-offs in de-
signing the receiver for high linearity.
One or more of the following general trade-offs exist in trying to achieve
a high IIP3:
앫 High NF Many IIP3 improvement techniques rely on resistive feed-

back techniques or the use of linearization devices. These devices con-
tribute to the noise of the block, resulting in a higher NF.
앫 High Power Consumption In many cases, obtaining a high IIP3 re-
quires operating the device at reasonably high current densities. For ex-
ample, the linearity of a long-channel MOSFET device is related to the
Vgt (= Vgs – Vt) of the devices. In order to obtain a high Vgt for a given de-
vice size, one needs to burn more DC in the device.56 Additionally, com-
mon open loop or closed loop linearization techniques require DC pow-
er of their own, increasing the overall power consumption of the block.57
앫 Complexity Many open- and closed-loop linearization techniques
have been proposed in the literature. In general, these techniques will
add complexity to the circuit, requiring more analysis and possibly de-
laying time to market.
Similarly, the following techniques help improve the IIP2 performance of

the receiver. The trade-offs relating to the specified techniques are also list-
ed below:
앫 Differential Circuits By utilizing differential circuits, the IIP2 of a

circuit can be improved quite significantly. The trade-off is an in-
crease of as much as 2 times in the area and power consumption.
앫 Good Layout A differential circuit is only as good as its layout! Careful
attention to layout and matching details between the differential parts of
the circuit can improve IP2. Further, in blocks such as mixers, attention
to the layout of the switching devices would help reduce the leakage of
the IIP2 terms to the baseband output. The trade-off to a good layout is
the requirement for more resources and/or an increase in time to market.
56
Note that for real MOSFETs, especially short-channel ones, excessively large quiescent
current could actually reduce the IIP3 of the device due to effects such as the nonlinearity of
the output impedance rds.
57
Linearization techniques often offer a much better power efficiency than brute-force tech-
niques such as increasing a Vgt of a MOSFET.
앫 Large Devices Using large devices would result in better matching

between the differential portions of the circuit. The clear trade-offs in-
clude larger die area (cost) and higher power consumption.
앫 Good Balun A good on- or off-chip balun would ensure that the signal
applied to the input ports of an LNA are fully differential with minimal
mismatches on the balanced ports of the balun. This in turn results in
better rejection of the IIP2 terms by the receiver chain. Trade-offs to
this requirement are a higher cost and possibly larger size for the balun.
앫 AC Coupling between LNA and Mixer By using AC coupling be-
tween the LNA and the mixer, the IIP2 of the mixer block becomes es-
sentially irrelevant. The AC-coupling capacitors reject any low fre-
quency IM2 components generated by the LNA block, essentially
making the mixer by far the limiting block in the IIP2 performance of
a direct-conversion receiver.
Figure 3.7 displays a hypothetical case in a system with an overall IIP2 of

+50 dBm. Note that this is a very high IIP2 number and that such a high per-
IP2 = 50 dBm
40
Fundamental
20
0
Output Power (dBm)
−20 −25 dBm
−40 1 2nd Order

1 IM Product
−60
1
−80 2 Pin = −15 dBm
Pout = −80 dBm
−100
IIP2
−120
−60 −40 −20 0 20 40
Input Power (dBm)
Figure 3.7 Example of estimation of IM2 product given input power and IP2. In this case
two CW input interferers at –15 dBm each generate a baseband signal at –80 dBm.
formance typically requires the use of special design and layout techniques
and/or some form of calibration. When two –15-dBm CW input signals are
applied to this circuit, a –80-dBm IM2 tone is generated. Depending on the
frequency of the two CW RF interferers and the magnitude of the desired
RF signal, this can cause a significant degradation of the quality of the re-
ceived signal.
Figure 3.8 displays the case of a receiver being exposed to a large cel-
lular blocker signal while trying to receive a small desired OFDM WLAN
signal. This scenario is common when operating a WLAN system in a cell
phone application where the cellular band power amplifier can be trans-
mitting in excess of +26 dBm while the WLAN receiver is in the receive
mode. It is clear that in such cases a very large IIP2 for the WLAN re-
ceiver would be highly desirable in order to maintain the integrity of the
received OFDM signal. Note that an amplitude-modulated cellular inter-
ferer would generate a copy of the interferer (with twice its bandwidth) at
baseband, while a phase-modulated cellular interferer would cause a DC
offset at baseband.
A related quantity to IIP3 used for measuring the linearity of a circuit is
the 1-dB compression point, or P1dB. The pictorial definition of P1dB is
shown in Figure 3.9. Based on this definition, the P1dB is the point at which
the output power of the block is 1 dB less than what it would have been for
an ideal (distortion-free) block. Stated differently, the P1dB is the point at
which the gain of the block has dropped by 1 dB (due to compression) as
compared to its small signal gain level. The 1-dB compression point of a
circuit is closely related to odd-order nonlinearities in that circuit. For “sim-
ple nonlinearities” it can mathematically be shown that the P1dB of a circuit
is 9.54 dB lower than its IP3 point. It should now be apparent why the IP3
Input Amplitude
Cellular
(modulated)
interference Desired
IP2 OFDM
LO
signal
Down conversion
f0 f1 Frequency
Figure 3.8 Example of modulated cellular blocker signal interacting with second-order
nonlinearities of receiver generating components at baseband that can interfere with desired
down-converted OFDM signal in direct-conversion receiver.
30
25
Output
P1dB
Output Power [dBm]
20
15
IdB gain change
10
0
−10 −5 0 5 10
Input Power [dBm]
Figure 3.9 Example illustrating definition of 1-dB compression point (P1dB) of an ampli-
fier.
point is only an extrapolated value. The signal compresses well before

reaching this point.
3.4.2 Tools for Analyzing Modulated Signal Distortion

As illustrated above, IP2, IP3, and P1dB are useful tools for analyzing the
linearity of the system in the presence of CW signals. These tools can also
be utilized to get an idea of the behavior of the system in the presence of
modulated signals. However, often more sophisticated tools are required
that take into account the characteristics of the modulation such as the signal
statistics and the PAR of the signal.
One such method of characterizing the linearity of a system is the analy-
sis of the amplitude distortion (AD) and the phase distortion (PD) of the sys-
tem. This method of analysis is often applied to linear power amplifiers
which are required to amplify modulated signals with large PAR and simul-
taneous phase and amplitude information content such as WLAN OFDM.
Although the derivation of the mathematical relation between AD, PD, and
the statistics of the signal is beyond the scope of this text,58 the understand-
ing of some basic concepts such as AM–AM and AM–PM distortions as
58
The interested reader, can, for example, see Kim et al. (2005).
well the cumulative distribution function (CDF) and the complementary

CDF (CCDF) is quite useful and provides insight into the behavior of the
system in the presence of such modulated signals.
AM–AM refers to the generation of undesired amplitude modulation due
to the interaction of the input signal to the system with the nonlinearities of
the system. AM–AM can result in gain expansion (where the measured gain
is larger than the small signal gain) for a certain range of input signals and in
gain compression (where the measured gain is smaller than the small signal
gain) for other ranges of input signals. For a large enough input signal, all
practical amplifiers will experience gain compression. An AM–AM plot can
be very similar to a P1dB plot (Fig. 3.9). However, in order to analyze the sys-
tem behavior over the large PAR experienced due to the modulated signal,
the output signal level is often shown over a wide range of input signals and
often well into the saturation power range of the system. Note that amplitude
distortion is often referred to by system designers as nonlinear distortion.
AM–PM refers to the generation of undesired phase modulation due to
the interaction of the input signal to the system with the nonlinearities of the
system. AM–PM is particularly problematic in systems with high order con-
stellations such as QAM-64 (which is utilized in 802.11a/g standards).
AM–PM can occur, for example, when the capacitance of a tuned circuit
varies as a function of the applied signal level. As a result, the output phase
of the circuit would change nonlinearly as a function of the modulated sig-
nal. In WLAN systems operating at 54 Mbps QAM-64 modulation, the PD
often limits the maximum transmit power before the AD. This is particular-
ly true of tuned CMOS implementations due to their relatively large device
nonlinear capacitances.
The CDF and CCDF are used to look at the probability of a certain peak
(relative to the average) occurring in the signal. For example, a CDF plots
the power level relative to the mean power level on the x axis, and the prob-
ability of its occurrence on the y axis. The plot of Figure 3.10 shows that the
probability of a signal with a 15-dB peak relative to the average is close to
zero even for an ideal signal. Nonlinear (amplitude) distortion typically
causes clipping on the largest peaks of the signal. As a result, the distorted
signal does not show as high of an occurrence for the largest peaks as an
ideal OFDM signal would have (the CDF of the clipped signal falls inside
that of an ideal signal). By comparing the CDF of an ideal signal with that
of a measured signal, one can identify if amplitude distortion is causing
degradation in EVM performance. Note that a CDF plot can identify both
gain compression and gain expansion issues.
Figure 3.11 displays the AM–AM and AM–PM (at 5.24 GHz) for a com-
mercially available class A power amplifier obtained with a VNA. Note that a
Figure 3.10 CCDF for almost ideal 802.11a OFDM signal with EVM of –45 dB and PAR
of greater than 10 dB.
20-dB attenuator at the output of the power amplifier ensures that the mea-
sured AM–AM and AM–PM are not impacted by the nonlinearity of the VNA
itself. It can be seen that a small signal gain of 22.7 dB is obtained (marker 1).
The output 1-dB compression point of this amplifier is approximately 25.3
dBm and a phase distortion (deviation of the phase relative to the phase at
small signal input) of less than 1° can be observed at this power level.
Figure 3.12 illustrates the CCDF of the amplifier of the same commercial
amplifier under “lightly” and “heavily” compressed conditions. Under the
light-compression condition, an output burst power of 17.3 dBm, a PAR of
7.5 dB, and an EVM of –25 dB are obtained. It can be observed that an 8-dB
backoff from the P1dB of the amplifier is required to achieve this result.
Under the heavy-compression condition, a burst power of +23 dBm, a PAR
of 4.2 dB, and an EVM of –15 dB are obtained. Clearly, the EVM under the
heavy-compression condition is not acceptable for the 802.11a/g standard
for 54-Mbps transmission.
Figure 3.13 displays the spectral mask of the 802.11a standard applied to
the output signal of the same commercial amplifier under the lightly and
heavily compressed conditions corresponding to those of Figure 3.12. In the
lightly compressed case, the amplifier easily passes the spectral mask re-
quirements (this should not be surprising as the –25-dB EVM requirement
of the standard is a more stringent requirement than that of its spectral
Phase [degree]
1 degree / y-axis division
1 dB / y-axis division
Gain [dB]
Input power [dBm]
Figure 3.11 AM–PM and AM–AM for commercially available class A amplifier with 20-
dB attenuator at output. This amplifier has an output P1dB of approximately 25.3 dBm
(marker 2) and an AM–PM of less than 1° at this power level.
Figure 3.12 CCDF of amplifier of Figure 3.11 under “lightly” compressed and “heavily”
compressed conditions.
mask). However, in the heavily compressed condition, the system fails the
spectral mask requirements due to spectral regrowth associated with the ex-
cessive nonlinearities.
Note that the PA discussed here is a highly linear class A, laboratory-
class amplifier. However, at the same time, power efficiency is not of much
Figure 3.13 802.11a spectral mask of amplifier of Figure 3.11 under “lightly” compressed
and “heavily” compressed conditions.
concern for this power amplifier which consumes 200 mA from a 15-V sup-
ply. For example, at 0 dBm out, this PA is only 0.03% efficient! At 17.3
dBm, the maximum 802.11a 54-Mbps compliant power level, it is still only
1.8% efficient. The challenge in the design of real WLAN PAs for portable
applications is to design for these modulation types but to maintain a much
higher level of efficiency. This, particularly in CMOS designs, is quite chal-

lenging and an area of active research.
3.5 RECEIVER IMAGE REJECTION
Another important radio impairment applicable to WLAN systems is the re-

ceiver image rejection. Image rejection is very closely related to quadrature
balance (phase and amplitude balance), and therefore this topic will also be
discussed in this section. It will also become apparent that many of the top-
ics discussed here in the context of a receiver’s quadrature balance are also
applicable to a transmitter.
The system level issues related to image rejection are quite dependent on
the chosen receiver architecture. Therefore we will look at the impact of
poor image rejection on each of the discussed architectures separately.
3.5.1 Superheterodyne Receiver

In a superheterodyne receiver the RF mixer (Fig. 3.14a) translates the de-
sired channel from the carrier frequency of ␻0 to an intermediate frequen-
cy of ␻IF (Fig 3.14b) by mixing the RF signal with a local oscillator signal
at ␻LO. A standard (non-”image-reject” mixer) would however translate
the frequency band at the “image frequency” ␻IM = ␻LO + ␻IF also to
the same intermediate frequency. As a result the desired signal and the im-
age signal would interfere with one another and would be indistinguish-
able.
The simplified block diagram of a superheterodyne architecture is shown
again in Figure 3.14a. Typically one or both of the RF filters are used. RF
filter 1 typically acts to select the desired band while suppressing the image
channel, while RF filter 2 is typically used to reject the image channel fur-
ther and also reduce the impact of image noise. Note that, given a high
enough image frequency, a very simple filter can be used to attenuate the
image noise by several decibels, resulting in up to 3 dB of improvement in
system NF. Since RF filter 1 is placed before the LNA, it can contribute sig-
nificantly to the NF of the system. However, in the absence of RF filter 1,
the LNA can be driven to saturation by a large image or out-of-channel fre-
quency. The decision on whether to use such a filter or not is therefore de-
pendent on the system requirements and a trade-off between interference ro-
bustness and sensitivity levels.
In the absence of a lossless RF filter 2 and assuming a white output noise
for the LNA, the overall system NF can be degraded by as much as 3 dB due
to the noise of the LNA at the image frequency. This image noise will fall
3.5 RECEIVER IMAGE REJECTION 103
Composite
OOB
Band Select
RF RF Wanted Blocker
Filter
FILTER 1 FILTER 2 Signal 0 dBm
−82 dBm IR
LNA Image
Signal
cosωLOt
Frequency
ω0 ωLO ωIM
ωIF ωIF
(a) (b)
Figure 3.14 (a) Front end of direct-conversion receiver with filter stages identified. (b) Re-
jection of image component obtained using band-select filter.
on the desired band and add 3 dB to the noise level while not contributing to
the desired signal level. In reality there is some noise associated with RF fil-
ter 2, the noise is not completely dominated by the LNA, and there is some
gain roll-off at the image frequency of the LNA, so the actual improvement
in NF due to the use of RF filter 2 is less than 3 dB.
This discussion is also relevant to the concept of SSB NF versus DSB NF
of a mixer (or a whole receiver). A SSB NF is relevant when the desired sig-
nal occupies only one sideband around the carrier while the noise occupies
both sidebands. A DSB NF is relevant when the signal occupies both side-
bands around the carrier, and the noise occupies both sidebands around the
carrier (or equivalently both the signal and the noise occupy one side of the
carrier). Clearly, given infinite image rejection, SSB NF (dB) = DSB NF
(dB) + 3 dB.
Figure 3.14 displays a hypothetical example of a large out-of-band
blocker (OOB) with a 0-dBm signal power present at the image frequency
of a desired signal with a –82-dBm power level (–82 dBm is the sensitiv-
ity level required by the 802.11a standard for a 6-Mbps signal). Assuming
a required SNR of 5 dB for properly demodulating the 6-Mbps signal and
that it is desirable to attenuate the interferer to the noise level, a minimum
image rejection of 87 dB would be required. This 87 dB of rejection would
have to be obtained from RF filter 1, RF filter 2, and any natural frequen-
cy selectivity of the LNA. From a rejection point of view it is preferable
to have most of the rejection obtained through RF filter 1 so that the LNA
is not exposed to large interference signals and would not run into com-
pression. However, a higher rejection in the filter typically comes at the
expense of larger in-band losses for the filter, which would directly impact
the receiver NF and sensitivity. Therefore the rejection would have to be
distributed between the two filters based on several factors, including the
linearity, gain, and NF of the LNA.
It should be clear that, given a selection of front-end filters, the choice of
IF has a significant impact on the image rejection of a superheterodyne re-
ceiver. A higher IF would relax the specifications on the RF filters (since
the interference is farther away from the desired frequency). However, a
choice of a higher IF would result in a higher Q requirement for the IF filters
which is typically used for channel selection.
It is also important to note that, in reality, it is often required to have the
image be several decibels below the noise floor. This is because the system
would likely require an SNIR (signal to noise plus interference ratio) of –87
dB. This would require the image rejection to actually be a few decibels bet-
ter than 87 dB in this example. In this example, a CW tone was used as an
image to simplify the discussion. In reality the image is often a modulated
signal. The magnitude of the required image rejection is also dependent on
the type of modulation present at the image channel.
Note that sensitivity in the presence of an “interferer” as specified by the
standard (e.g., adjacent channel interferer) does allow for the sensitivity lev-
el to be relaxed by 3 dB as compared to the case where there is no interfer-
ence present. However, the standard does not allow for the relaxation of the
sensitivity specification in the presence of an image.59
3.5.2 Low IF Architecture

In the low IF receiver architecture (Fig. 3.15a) the signal is applied to the
LNA input with no RF filtering. The signal is then down converted
through quadrature down converters. The image rejection is achieved
through quadrature matching and complex bandpass channel-select filter-
ing. As compared to a superheterodyne (high IF) architecture, the image
rejection requirements are significantly reduced. This is because the image
frequency is close in frequency to the desired channel. As a result the
maximum power of the image frequency is typically controlled by the
maximum ACI and AACI power allowed by the standard (in contrast to
the superheterodyne architecture in which the maximum power of the im-
age channel is set by a different standard or FCC limits and can be signif-
icantly larger than the desired channel). Note that since the maximum am-
plitude of the image is bounded by the standard, an RF filter is often not
59
This is reasonable since the choice of the IF which determines the image frequency is not
specified by the standard. It is a choice of the system designer. The ACI, on the hand, is spec-
ified by the standard and is not a function of the system design.
3.5 RECEIVER IMAGE REJECTION 105
Image Signal
Channel L (−66 dBm)
Select O (Adjacent
Filter Channel)
I
LNA
Wanted
Q Signal
−82 dBm
sinωLO t cosωLOt
−40 MHz −20 MHz f0 +10 MHz Frequency
ωIF ωIF
(a) (b)
Figure 3.15 (a) Low IF receiver with baseband complex bandpass filters for image rejec-
tion. (b) Rejection of image component obtained using baseband complex bandpass filters
and good matching in I and Q signal paths.
necessary for image rejection purposes (an RF filter would not be able to
reject the image much in this architecture in any case, since the image is
so close in frequency to the desired channel). An RF filter may still be re-
quired in order to select the desired band and avoid the saturation of the
LNA by out-of-band interferers.
Once again, there is a trade-off between the choice of the low IF and the
image rejection desired. A higher IF would typically result in a larger poten-
tial image channel power. At the same time, however, the required rejection
(order and Q) of the baseband complex bandpass filters can be reduced.
Note that in order to avoid signal aliasing, the choice of the low IF has to be
at least as high as half the desired signal RF bandwidth. In the example
shown in Figure 3.15b, the IF of 10 MHz is chosen, which is larger than
8.125 MHz (the RF bandwidth of the 802.11a signal is 16.25 MHz). It is
also clear from this figure that the magnitude of the image rejection needed
in the system is significantly less that that of the superheterodyne architec-
ture. In this example, the same wanted 6-Mbps signal as the superhetero-
dyne example is to be received. However, the image signal magnitude is
governed and limited by the standard to –66 dBm. Using an analysis similar
to that of the superheterodyne case, an image rejection of only 21 dB would
be required. Further a typical LNA is not subject to saturation due to a –66
dBm signal.
The complex bandpass filtering and image rejection can be performed in
the analog domain or in the digital domain. If the image rejection is per-
formed in the analog domain, the dynamic range requirements of the ADCs
would be reduced, as the stronger image signal is already rejected. If the
complex bandpass filtering and channel selection are to be performed in the
digital domain, the dynamic range requirements of the ADCs would be
large enough to tolerate the large magnitude of the image signal while main-
taining the integrity of the smaller desired signal. In this case, simple low
pass filters can be used in the analog domain.
In quadrature-modulated, high order constellation, low IF transceivers,
the quadrature accuracy requirements of the receiver may be set by the sys-
tem EVM or PER requirements, which can be more stringent than that re-
quired for rejecting the image due to interference.
3.5.3 Direct-Conversion Receiver

As shown in Figure 3.16, in a direct-conversion receiver, the signal is re-
ceived and passed on to an LNA with no image filtering. The signal is then
down converted to baseband quadrature signals through a quadrature mixer.
As seen in Figure 3.16b, in this case, no explicit image channel exists. Stat-
ed another way, the image of the desired channel is the desired channel it-
self. This is because the LO frequency is selected to be equal to the center
frequency of the desired channel, and therefore the desired channel is placed
on both sides of the LO. However, in order to maximize spectral efficiency,
the data placed on the left side of the carrier are uncorrelated with that on
the right side of the carrier. As a result a poor “image rejection” would re-
sult in spectral leakage and corruption of the received signal. In the case of
LO
Wanted
Signal
I −82 dBm
LNA IR
Noise
Q
Image
Signal
sinωLOt cosωLOt
−8.3 MHz f0 +8.3 MHz Frequency

(a) (b)
Figure 3.16 (a) Direct-conversion receiver with quadrature down converters. (b) Image of
the signal is the signal itself. Good matching is still required on the I and Q paths to obtain a
low EVM and high performance.
3.6 QUADRATURE BALANCE AND RELATION TO IMAGE REJECTION 107
OFDM signals, in a receiver with no impairments, the subcarriers are most-

ly orthogonal to one another and therefore uncorrelated. As a result of a
poor quadrature imbalance, the resultant image adds to the noise floor and
distorts the OFDM constellation.
Although there are no explicit image rejection requirements for a direct-
conversion receiver, it is still important to maintain good quadrature bal-
ance on a WLAN direct-conversion receiver. This is due to the fact that
the OFDM high order constellations require a high accuracy quadrature
signal to generate the EVM required to achieve the specified PER required
by the standard. Intuitively it is clear that a higher order constellation
(such as 64-QAM) would have much more stringent quadrature balance re-
quirements than a low order constellation such as 4-QAM (also known as
QPSK).
It is important to note that a poor IQ imbalance would not only adversely
affect the sensitivity point of the receiver but also the PER floor.60 As an ex-
ample a receiver with poor quadrature imbalance could have a sensitivity of
–70 dBm for a 54-Mbps data rate and a PER floor of 2%. If the IQ imbal-
ance is removed from the same receiver, a sensitivity of –73 dBm and a
PER floor of 0.1% can be achieved for a 54-Mbps data rate. This is because
quadrature imbalance is a multiplicative impairment (in contrast to thermal
noise, for example, which is an additive impairment).
3.6 QUADRATURE BALANCE AND RELATION TO

IMAGE REJECTION
The discussions of quadrature imbalance so far were primarily concentrated

on receiver effects, although many of the general concepts, especially in
direct-conversion receivers, are applicable to the direct-conversion trans-
mitters also.
The forthcoming discussions on quadrature balance are directly applica-
ble to both the transmitter and the receiver.
Figure 3.17 displays the relationship between quadrature gain and phase
error and image rejection. The x axis displays the phase error in degrees
and the y axis the resultant image rejection for various amplitude errors.
As an example, a phase error of 1° and an amplitude error of 1% would
result in an image rejection of –40 dB. As will be seen shortly, in order
to maintain a reasonable EVM for a 54-Mbps 802.11 signal, an image
60
The PER floor is the (lowest) level of PER achieved when the incoming signal is approxi-
mately in the midrange of acceptable input powers such that the receiver PER is not impact-
ed by low SNR or high levels of distortion.
−10
Amplitude Error (%)

−20
Image Rejection (dB)
10%
−30 5%
2%
−40
∼ 4
1% IR ∼
0.5% (Δθ) + (ΔG)2
2
−50
0%
−60
−70
0.1 1 10
Phase Error (deg)
Figure 3.17 Relationship between phase error, amplitude error, and image rejection in
quadrature modulator/demodulator. [Figure after Lee (1998)]
rejection of better than –32 dBc is desirable. Such an image rejection

can result, for example, from a phase error of 3° and amplitude error of
2%.
For small errors, the magnitude of the image rejection can be approximat-
ed by the relation61
4
IR ⬇ ᎏᎏ
(⌬␪) + (⌬G)2
2
where ⌬␪ is the phase mismatch in radians and ⌬G is the gain mismatch in

ratiometric terms. In terms of decibels
冢冣
4
IRdB ⬇ 10 log ᎏᎏ
(⌬␪) + (⌬G)2
2
Note that in the chart of Figure 3.17 the x axis is on a logarithmic basis. It
is not therefore surprising that for very low image levels a very small
61
For a more detailed description of the exact relationship between phase and amplitude error
as well as the derivation of the relation, the interested reader can refer to Lee (1998) or
Behzad (1995).
3.7 QUADRATURE BALANCE AND RELATION TO EVM 109
change in phase error can result in a large change in the image rejection
ratio.
3.7 QUADRATURE BALANCE AND RELATION TO EVM
As eluded to earlier, quadrature imbalance in a transmitter results in a finite

rejection of the undesired sideband on a transmitter. This is similar to the ef-
fect that was described for a receiver, except that there are no interfering im-
age signals to be concerned about. In the transmitter, the image rejection
would be determined by the imbalance of the DACs, the baseband I and Q
signal paths, and the LO quadrature accuracy. Quite often, especially in the
case of a direct conversion transmitter, the dominant source of the quadra-
ture imbalance is the I and Q LO signals. Maintaining quadrature accuracy
at high frequencies is difficult due to very high sensitivity to parasitics and
coupling paths. The parasitics involved can be electric (capacitive) or mag-
netic (inductive) in nature. In general, however, a quadrature inaccuracy due
to the LO signals is (for all practical purposes) independent of the baseband
frequency and can therefore be compensated by a fixed phase and amplitude
predistortion term at baseband. A baseband-induced quadrature imbalance,
on the other hand, is usually dependent on the baseband frequency and may
require a more sophisticated correction. Such baseband quadrature mis-
matches usually require a constant group delay correction (linear phase with
frequency) rather than a constant phase correction.
For an 802.11 OFDM signal, in general, the ith data subcarrier is uncorre-
lated with the –ith (data) subcarrier. The I/Q mismatches cause the interfer-
ence between these mirror-image subcarriers resulting in the loss of orthog-
onality. Since in the ideal case the ith and –ith subcarriers are uncorrelated,
the I/Q imbalance on an OFDM system exhibits itself as noiselike on the
constellation diagram for the data subcarriers. This phenomenon is especial-
ly true for the higher order constellations.
On the other hand, the phase of the jth pilot subcarrier (transmitted in
BPSK) is highly correlated with that of the –jth (pilot) subcarrier. As a re-
sult, I/Q amplitude imbalance results in distinct and non-noise-like constel-
lation points on the constellation diagram across the real axis. At the same
time, I/Q phase imbalance results in a distinct (non-noise-like) constellation
point on the constellation diagram across the imaginary axis. The above
statements can be verified by mathematically looking at the output generat-
ed from an amplitude mismatch,
⌬G
冢冣
Ck,me j2␲k⌬ft + Ck,m ᎏ (e j2␲k⌬ft + e–j2␲k⌬ft)
2
or a phase mismatch,62
⌬␪
冢冣
Ck,me j2␲k⌬ft + j Ck,m ᎏ (e j2␲k⌬ft + e j2␲k⌬ft)
2
where Ck,m represents a complex number corresponding to the location of

the symbol in the constellation for the kth subcarrier and the mth symbol
time. As before, ⌬␪ is the phase mismatch in radians and ⌬G is the gain
mismatch in ratiometric terms.
By looking at the pilot tone constellation points, therefore, one can deter-
mine whether or not phase and amplitude imbalances exist in the modula-
tion.
So, in summary, since the subcarriers are mostly uncorrelated, the image
adds to the noise floor and distorts the OFDM constellation. The image also
causes the orthogonality of the OFDM modulator signal to suffer, resulting
in a degradation of the EVM.
The ideas of the previous section are elaborated using two examples. Fig-
ures 3.18a,b display the constellation diagram of an 802.11a signal which
has been corrupted by IQ impairments. In the case of Figure 3.18a, the sig-
nal has been subject to a fixed phase error of 4° (and no amplitude error). As
can be seen by looking closely at the vertical splitting of the pilot-based
constellation points (shown in the boxes), one can deduce the type of im-
pairment to which the signal has been subject. In Figure 3.18b, the signal
has been corrupted by a 0.5-dB amplitude error (but no phase error). Again,
by observing the constellation points associated with the pilot tones (hori-
zontal splitting inside the two boxes), one can determine the type of impair-
ment that has corrupted the desired signal. By observing these examples, it
should be clear that making a conclusion about the type of impairment by
looking at the constellation points associated with the nonpilot tone subcar-
riers would be difficult, especially when looking at a high order constella-
tion diagram such as that of a QAM-64 modulation. The EVM per subcarri-
er of the signals of Figure 3.18 is plotted in Figure 3.19. Unlike some of the
examples provided earlier, in this case, it is clear that by looking at the
EVM–subcarrier plot, it is not possible to determine the cause of the signal
impairment and the constellation diagram itself provides a better clue to the
cause of the impairment. It is interesting to note that under this type of im-
pairment (quadrature imbalance) the pilot subcarriers (subcarriers indexed
–21, –7, 7, 21) show the highest level of EVM per subcarrier.
It should be clear that an OFDM constellation diagram with the constella-
tion points for the pilot tones split at a diagonal angle (rather than strictly on
62
For details see Cutler (2002).
(a) (b)
Figure 3.18 Constellation diagram of 802.11a signal with no impairments other than (a) a
4° phase error (EVM = –27 dB) and (b) a 0.5-dB amplitude error (EVM = –27 dB). Note that
the characteristics of the constellation errors may be quite useful In debugging. Channel esti-
mation based on preamble only is used on the VSA for these plots.
the imaginary or real axis) would have been corrupted by both phase and
amplitude imbalance.
Figure 3.20 shows the same signal of Figure 3.18a, but with a change in
the VSA settings. Instead of estimating the channel characteristics based on
the preamble only, the VSA is now utilizing the information content in the
payload also to estimate the impairments in the received signal. As a result
it is now able to significantly improve the IQ balance for the pilot tones as
well as to a lesser degree for the other subcarriers. This results in a signifi-
cant improvement in the overall EVM of the received signal. In this case an
EVM of –31 dB is achieved. Note that in this case the splitting observed in
the constellation points associated with the pilots is no longer present. In or-
der to utilize this debugging tool, therefore, the option for channel estima-
tion based on the preamble only should be selected on the VSA.
It is also important to note that fixed phase errors (i.e., a phase error that
is constant for all subcarriers ranging from low frequency to high frequen-
cy) are typically caused by an imbalance in the LO generation circuitry
which is used to generate the I and Q outputs in the receiver and the single-
sideband-modulated signal in the transmitter. On the other hand a subcarri-
er-dependent phase error (typically a constant delay) can be caused by mis-
matches at the baseband circuitry. Since a constant delay translates into a
linear variation of phase as a function of frequency, the different index sub-
carriers would be subject to different amounts of phase error. Baseband-
type mismatches are typically stronger closer to the filter edges (high pass
(a)
(b)
Figure 3.19 The EVM per subcarrier for signals of Figure 3.18: (a) 4° phase error; (b) 0.5-
dB amplitude error. Channel estimation based on preamble only is used on the VSA for these
plots.
(a)
(b)
Figure 3.20 Constellation diagram of 802.11a signal (of Fig. 3.18a) with no impairments
other than a 4° phase error (EVM = –31 dB). (a) Constellation diagram. (b) EVM vs. subcar-
rier. Channel estimation based on preamble and payload is used on the VSA for these plots.
113
corners as well as low pass corners) since small filter component mismatch-
es can cause relatively large phase imbalance at the passband edges.
Quite often, in practical systems, the phase imbalance is of the constant
type and is a result of imbalances at the LO generation circuitry. This is be-
cause, in contrast to the low frequency baseband circuitry, a small mismatch
can result in a large phase imbalance at the RF. The higher the LO frequen-
cy where the I and Q signals are generated, the more difficult it would be to
maintain perfect quadrature. As explained in the architecture discussions,
this is one of the fundamental advantages of a superheterodyne design as
compared to a low IF or zero IF design.
Subcarrier-dependent phase imbalance as well as subcarrier-independent
phase imbalances can be corrected for using digital pre- or postdistortion.
Subcarrier-independent phase distortion is somewhat easier to implement in
the system. Amplitude imbalance can also be compensated in the digital do-
main, but one needs to be aware of the additional need for dynamic range on
the ADCs and DACs and account for this in the system design.
At this point it would be natural to ask about the relationship between im-
age rejection and EVM for a WLAN signal. Figure 3.21 displays this rela-
tionship based on a set of inputs generated by an arbitrary vector modulator
and measured on a vector signal analyzer. All other impairments were dis-
abled (limited by the quality of the vector signal modulator) and sufficient
EVM vs Image Rejection (measured)

(dotted line is extrapolated)
−20
−22
−24 EVM
−26
−28
EVM [dB]
−30
−32
−34
−36
−38
−40
−50 −45 −40 −35 −30 −25 −20
Image Rejection [dBc]
Figure 3.21 Measured EVM of “ideal” transmitter as function of its image rejection. The
degredation of the EVM at low signal levels is due to the limitations of the VSA at low pow-
er levels. The dotted line represents the extrapolated value for an ideal VSA. Channel estima-
tion based on preamble only is used on the VSA for these plots.
phase and/or amplitude imbalance was introduced in the modulated signal.

The resultant EVM was measured and plotted on the y axis. On a log–log
plot as shown (both x and y axes are in decibels), EVM (decibels) degrades
almost “linearly” with image rejection (decibels). The departure of this lin-
ear relationship (shown by the dotted line) at lower image rejection levels is
due to the limitations of the vector signal modulator and the vector signal
analyzer at these low EVM levels.
As an example, using this figure, it is clear than in order to satisfy the
EVM requirements of a 54-Mbps 802.11a signal, the image rejection of the
system is required to be better than approximately –29 dBc. Using Figure
3.17, it can be seen that in order to achieve such an image rejection, an am-
plitude error of 5% and phase error of 2% can be tolerated. Note that in this
example it is assumed that no other impairments exist in the system. In real-
ity this is never the case, and therefore a system budget is required which
determines how much imbalance can be handled in the system in the pres-
ence of other impairments. In the case of a transmitter, often the EVM is
(and should be) limited by the nonlinearity of the power amplifier. It would
therefore be desirable to degrade the EVM due to all other impairments
quite minimally. Therefore, a worst-case image rejection of better than –35
dBc is quite desirable.
For the newer emerging standards such as 802.11n, even better EVM
numbers will likely be required by the system. As such the IQ imbalances
need to be proportionally smaller. By looking at Figure 3.21, it is clear that,
for example, an EVM of –30 dB would require an image rejection of ap-
proximately –34 dBc (assuming that all the error budget is allocated to the
quadrature imbalances). In reality an image rejection of better than –40 dBc
would be highly desirable.
Achieving an image rejection of about –40 dBc over process, temperature,
supply voltage, and channels, especially for the 802.11a standard (which
spans 4.9 to 5.8 GHz), is quite challenging. As a matter of fact, achieving
such performance with no calibrations in the system while achieving high
production yields may be impossible. Various calibration schemes have been
devised in order to enable such high degrees of image rejection. Some of
these techniques will be discussed in some detail in Chapter 5.
The results of Figure 3.21 were obtained with VSA tracking enabled dur-
ing the preambles only. If tracking is enabled during the preambles and pay-
load, better EVM results will be obtained for the same image rejection (and
quadrature imbalance). This improvement is typically around 2 dB but in
some cases can be larger. In other words, the same radio will produce better
system results (in this case EVM and PER) when it utilizes a better digital
PHY. This points out the fact that it may be difficult to compare two radios
based on system results without considering the baseband unit which is used
in conjunction with the radio to obtain the system results.
3.8 OTHER TRANSMITTER (MODULATOR) IMPAIRMENTS
In addition to IQ impairments which can limit the signal quality of a trans-

mitter, the designer has to be aware of a variety of other impairments that
can impact a modulator.
Carrier leakage (also known as LO feedthrough, or LOFT) is one such
impairment. LOFT is typically caused by two very different sources.
The first source of LOFT is DC offsets at the baseband path. It is easy to
see that with baseband offsets the output-modulated signal would be given by
Out(t) = [A(t) + VOS] cos[␻LOt + ␾(t)]
The output-modulated signal will therefore possess an undesired carrier

feedthrough at the LO frequency. It should be clear that from the point of
view of LOFT a larger signal throughout the baseband section is highly de-
sirable. This desire, of course, places a stringent requirement on the lineari-
ty of the baseband chain. As an example, in order to achieve better than 30
dB of carrier suppression due to baseband offsets, the baseband offsets
(VOS) must be 30 dB smaller than the RMS value of the modulated signal
A(t). In the simple example of a single-sideband sine wave output (with sine
and cosine baseband inputs) with 1 Vpp amplitude on each quadrature rail,
the input offsets on each rail will need to be no more than
1/2兹2苶
ᎏᎏ = 37 mV
20 log(30/10)
Note that in the case of a modulated signal with a large PAR such as that
of the 802.11a/g the situation is worse. This is because in order to maintain
good linearity in the DAC and the analog and RF chains, a significant
amount of backoff from the clipping level of the circuitry is required. This
results in a decrease in the RMS level of the signal, while the offset levels
do not scale (decrease). For example, if the DAC and the analog/RF chain is
designed to operate with a 15-dB backoff from the clip level of the DAC,
and this level is assumed to be 1 Vpp, to obtain better than –30 dBc LOFT,
the DC offsets at the input to the modulator (mixer) have to be smaller than
1/1015/20
ᎏᎏ = 18.6 mV
20 log(30/10)
3.8 OTHER TRANSMITTER (MODULATOR) IMPAIRMENTS 117
It is important to note that in the case of a quadrature modulator each quad-

rature rail needs to have no more than this amount in DC offsets. In the case
of a perfect quadrature modulator (with zero or very little image), an equal
amount of ␣ DC offset on each of the I or Q rails would result in 3 dB worse
LOFT in decibels relative to the carrier than if only one of the rails had the
same amount of (␣) DC offset.
A second fundamental mechanism for generating LOFT at the output of
the modulator is through parasitic coupling of the LO signal (needed for up
conversion of the baseband signal) to the RF output port of the mixer or
possibly even stages following the up-conversion mixer. To reduce the
LOFT due to this mechanism, the parasitics should be kept to a minimum,
and for differential circuits the balance should be maintained to the extent
possible. Since parasitic couplings are more prevalent at higher frequencies,
it is natural to expect more LOFT due to this mechanism at higher frequen-
cies.
For direct-conversion transmitters, the single LO signal would directly
couple to RF and show up at the center of the band of the transmitted output.
For superheterodyne transmitters, the LOFT of the first LO would couple to
the IF output (of the first mixer) and then unconverted to the center of the
RF band by the second mixer. The LOFT due to the second mixer would
typically fall out of band and is easily filtered by tuned circuits or external
filters. The LOFT is typically a bigger problem for direct-conversion trans-
mitters since, as mentioned earlier, parasitic couplings would be larger at
the RF as compared to that of the IF of the superheterodyne transmitter.
If the desired signal contains information content at DC, LOFT caused by
DC offsets or direct RF coupling would corrupt the modulated signal and
can be detrimental to the system performance. If the desired signal has no
information content at DC, LOFT is typically not detrimental in the system
performance but for a variety of other reasons should be kept to a minimum.
One reason for the desire to keep LOFT to a small value on the modulator is
that in the absence of frequency offsets in the system (i.e., perfectly tuned
crystals) a large LOFT can cause large DC offsets on a direct-conversion re-
ceiver, thereby limiting the system performance.63 In the case of the 802.11a
and 802.11g standard, the OFDM-modulated signal nulls out the zero-order
subcarrier and therefore does not possess DC information content. Howev-
er, due to reasons explained earlier, the 802.11 standard imposes guidelines
on the maximum allowed LOFT power relative to the desired signal power
(–15 dBc).
63
This is because the large incoming signal is further amplified by the LNA and applied to
the mixer RF port. A large LO signal also exists on the mixer LO port. These signals can mix
and create a large DC offset.
Often it is necessary to provide gain control in the transmitter. Gain con-

trol would be needed, for example, to compensate for transmit power varia-
tions due to changes in temperature, process, or supply voltage.64 Further,
many standards, including 802.11, may require transmit power control in
order to increase the overall capacity of the cell and reduce the near–far
problem.65 Another obvious reason for the use of power control is to reduce
power consumption of the transmitter when the distance between the trans-
mitter and receiver is short.
As a result of these requirements, often tens of decibels of power control
may be desired in the system. Gain control can be achieved at baseband or at
RF or in the combination of the two. There are several system level trade-offs
between the two methods of gain control. Typically, gain control at baseband
allows for very accurate control of the gain steps as well as fairly insensitive
results to process, voltage, and temperature variations. One way to achieve
such insensitivity is through the use of a switched resistor divider (PGA) cir-
cuit prior to the up-conversion mixer. In such a scheme, the gain is set by the
ratio of two resistors of the same type. An alternative baseband gain control
scheme that is often used (but does not result in as accurate of gain steps) is
through programmable degeneration in the transconductor of a mixer.
However, often, gain control at baseband results in poor LOFT results at
high attenuation settings. Typical implementations of baseband gain control
described above would attenuate the signal well in advance of the mixer
switches. The mixer switches therefore observe a small signal but a fairly
large DC offset, resulting in a significant reduction in the LOFT perfor-
mance at high attenuation settings. It is therefore desirable to implement the
baseband gain control as close as possible to the up-converter switching de-
vices so that as gain is reduced the offsets are proportionally reduced also,
and LOFT in decibels relative to the carrier remains approximately con-
stant. An interesting method of a baseband gain control scheme that allows
for good LOFT results even under high attenuation settings is discussed in
Chapter 6.
If gain control is implemented in the RF section of a transmitter after the
mixer block, any LOFT due to DC offsets would scale with the gain of the
RF chain. As such, maintaining a constant dBc number should be relatively
64
In a CMOS process, for example, gain of tuned RF blocks can change significantly. This is
primarily due to two reasons: First, the transconductance of the CMOS device degrades sig-
nificantly with increasing temperature (due to a reduction in the mobility of the device) and,
second, the Q of on-chip inductors decreases significantly as a function of temperature due to
an increase in metal resistivity at higher temperatures.
65
In order to minimize the interference of one user with another, each user should use only
the minimum amount of power needed to establish his or her link with the desired SNR.
3.8 OTHER TRANSMITTER (MODULATOR) IMPAIRMENTS 119
simple. LOFT due to direct coupling of the LO signal to the mixer output
would also scale with gain control. This scaling of LOFT with gain control
is one of the major advantages of gain control at RF. It is important to note,
however, that if there is a significant coupling path to a point beyond the RF
output of the mixer, then the LOFT will no longer necessarily scale with RF
gain. Traditionally this has not been a problem since the magnitude of such
coupling has been small. However, as radios are reduced in size to reduce
cost, undesirable electric and magnetic coupling is increased and can result
in such cases.
In general, achieving the desired LOFT requirements of many standards
over process/voltage/temperature and over gain control without some form
of autocalibration is quite difficult. Many autocalibration schemes have
been used to alleviate this problem. Some of these methods will be dis-
cussed in Chapter 5.
Another class of impairments associated with the modulator are those re-
lated to HDs of the baseband blocks. In a WLAN 802.11a or g direct-conver-
sion transmitter, for example, the baseband block is typically designed with a
(low pass filter) bandwidth of 8 to 10 MHz (so that an RF channel bandwidth
of 16.25 MHz can be accommodated). So it is easy to see that the various har-
monics of a subcarrier would cause interference with the subcarriers at the
harmonic frequencies. Since the subcarriers are designed to be orthogonal
with one another, this HD-related interference would cause inter-subcarrier
interference and a resultant degradation of the EVM. It is noteworthy that the
lower index subcarriers have a greater chance of causing EVM degradation
due to harmonic distortion since their higher order harmonics also fall in
band. As an example, theoretically the subcarrier at 937.5 kHz can have its
harmonics up to HD8 interfere with the desired in-band signal, whereas the
subcarrier at 6.25 MHz will cause no HD-related degradation to EVM (as-
suming a high enough ADC sampling rate to avoid aliasing).
It is important to note that the HD related to the RF blocks (blocks after
the mixer) typically does not cause EVM degradation since these harmonics
fall far out of band. These harmonics can, of course, cause FCC violations
and need to be accounted for in the design.
A closely related impairment to HD is IM. As discussed earlier in this
chapter, for a simple nonlinearity, a mathematical relationship can easily be
derived relating the nth-order HD to the nth-order IM. Odd-order IM terms
often fall very close by (in the spectrum) to the fundamental tones that are
causing them. Therefore these IM terms are problematic for low order sub-
carriers and high order subcarriers at baseband as well as all the RF blocks
of the transmitter.
CW tones at baseband can be used to identify many of a modulator’s im-
pairments. Figure 3.22 displays the output of a modulator as obtained on a
Figure 3.22 Baseband 1-MHz sine and cosine signals are applied to the quadrature input
ports of a modulator running with an LO of 5.5 GHz. Several transmitter (modulator) impair-
ments are identified in this plot.
spectrum analyzer when 1-MHz sine and cosine waves are applied at the
quadrature and in-phase baseband input ports of the modulator. With the LO
frequency set to 5.5 GHz, the following tones associated with the various
impairments can be observed:
Desired tone 5.501 GHz

LOFT 5.500 GHz
Image tone 5.499 GHz
Baseband HD2 5.502 GHz
Baseband HD3 5.503 GHz
Additionally tones at 5.498 and 5.497 GHz are observed. These are associat-
ed with the images of the baseband HD2 and HD3 terms, respectively. It is in-
teresting to note that the magnitude of the image tone of the HDn component
can be larger or smaller than that of the HDn component itself. This is be-
cause the HDn terms on the I and Q rails do not have the same phase rela-
tionship as the fundamental tones. Therefore, when they are combined in a
quadrature modulator, the magnitude of the image can increase or decrease.
Stated differently, having a “perfect” quadrature only guarantees than no im-
age component for the fundamental would exist. It does not guarantee, how-
3.9 PEAK-TO-AVERAGE RATIO AND RELATION TO LINEARITY AND EFFICIENCY 121
ever, that no image components for the HD terms would exist. The best way
to reduce the magnitude of the image components for the HD terms is to re-
duce the magnitude of the HD terms themselves by making the modulator
more linear.
3.9 PEAK-TO-AVERAGE RATIO AND RELATION TO

LINEARITY AND EFFICIENCY
Now that we have studied some of the impacts of nonlinearities in the trans-
mitter (modulator), it would be important to discuss the interrelationship be-
tween linearity of the transmitter, PAR of the modulated signal, and the ob-
tained system power efficiency.
In general, a signal with nonconstant (varying) amplitude complicates the
transmitter design. One degree of the complexity of the transmitter design
would depend on the extent by which the amplitude is varying. The extent
by which the amplitude varies can be quantified by a concept known as
peak-to-average ratio, or PAR. The system performance will depend on the
PAR, the probability distribution function of the occurrence of the peaks, as
well as the “linearity” of the transmitter. The linearity of the transmitter will
not only be characterized by AM–AM (amplitude distortion) but also by
AM–PM (phase) distortion.66
Of course, on the positive side, modulated signals with nonconstant enve-
lope (which carry information in the phase as well as the amplitude of the
transmitted signal) allow for much higher spectral efficiency.
Note that signals with information content in the amplitude domain are not
the only ones requiring linear amplification (although they are often the most
demanding ones). Signals such as QPSK which carry information in the
phase domain but need to be limited in bandwidth due to practical reasons
also require somewhat linear amplification to avoid spectral regrowth. This is
because band limiting a signal with abrupt phase transitions such as QPSK in-
troduces variation in the envelope, thereby requiring linear amplification.67
As discussed earlier, an OFDM-modulated signal is a nonconstant-enve-
lope signal. As a matter of fact, the OFDM signal used in 802.11a/g has a
theoretical maximum PAR of approximately 17 dB. In other words, the
peak voltage excursion of an 802.11a/g signal can be seven times larger
66
At very high power levels approaching the saturation power of the power amplifier, addi-
tional effects such as PM–AM, PM–PM, memory effects, and nonsymmetry of IMD prod-
ucts also have to be taken into account, at times, even for “constant-envelope” modulations.
67
For a brief discussion on this topic see Razavi (1998). For more details refer to Sevic et al.
(1996).
than that of its average signal. To illustrate this fact, Figure 3.23 shows an
802.11a/g-modulated signal payload in the time domain.
To prevent distortion and to be able to reproduce the amplified output
signal faithfully, the transmitter would need to avoid any clipping even dur-
ing the peak excursions of the signal (which do not occur very frequently).
In order to achieve this, the PA would be designed to have minimal com-
pression at the peak power. However, most of the time, the PA would be
transmitting a signal that is seven times (17 dB) smaller than the peak pow-
er. If we assume that we would allow 1 dB of compression at the peak signal
level, this would result in the transmitter operating at approximately 17 dB
lower power than its 1-dB compression point. An inductively loaded class A
transmitter and power amplifier can achieve a maximum power efficiency
of 50% (achieved when transmitting the maximum output swing). Therefore
the best case achieved efficiency would be
Pout 50
␩ < ᎏ = ᎏ ⬇ 7%
Pdis 7
The inverse relationship between the amount of backoff from the 1-dB com-
pression point (typically simply referred to as “backoff”) required in an am-
plifier and the maximum achievable efficiency should be clear. Since the
power consumption of a transmitter is often dominated by the PA at the out-
put of the chain, it is desirable to be able to achieve the highest possible effi-
ciency for this block.
Figure 3.23 Time-domain waveform of 802.11a signal normalized to magnitude of 1. No-

tice the large PAR of the signal.
3.9 PEAK-TO-AVERAGE RATIO AND RELATION TO LINEARITY AND EFFICIENCY 123
In reality, some clipping can be tolerated while still satisfying the re-
quirements of the 802.11a/g EVM even at the highest data rate of 54 Mbps.
In order to achieve the highest system efficiency, it is common to operate
the PA in class AB mode and back off by about 7 dB from the 1-dB com-
pression point.68 The stages prior to the PA are typically operated at a larger
backoff to make sure that the nonlinearity is not dominated by these stages.
Since these stages burn a relatively small power, this trade-off allows for
achieving the highest possible overall efficiency.
As mentioned earlier, given the high order QAM constellation used in
802.11, both AM-to-AM and AM-to-PM distortions have to be considered
in evaluating the system performance. Conventionally, only the 1-dB com-
pression point which only covers issues with AM–AM has been used to de-
termine the linearity of power amplifiers. This may be due to the fact that
older systems rarely use high order QAM constellation in which phase lin-
earity and error are quite important. However, for high order QAM modula-
tions, AM–PM will start degrading the system performance (as measured by
EVM) well before the AM–AM (P1dB) effects are visible. Further, two PAs
may have the same P1dB point but very different AM–PM characteristics
(e.g., one may have a hard clipping and another a soft clipping). These are
the primary reasons as to why a one-to-one correspondence between P1dB
(or even IM3) and EVM performance does not exist. In order to completely
characterize the performance of a power amplifier for 802.11, either EVM
must be specified or plots for both AM–AM and AM–PM must be provided.
Power amplifier linearization and efficiency enhancement techniques are
very important areas of research. Various techniques have been proposed
that use analog or digital techniques to linearize the phase and/or amplitude
of the power amplifiers. These techniques can be analog and/or digital, can
be open loop or closed loop, and can use feedforward or feedback tech-
niques. In order to achieve best linearity and obtain high efficiency, the
P1dB of the amplifier should be increased using these techniques and the
amount of backoff required to achieve a particular EVM should be reduced.
It is important to note that lower order 802.11 modulations such as the
BPSK used for 6-Mbps transmission are much more tolerant of signal clip-
ping and nonlinearities in the system. As a matter of fact, from an EVM and
PER point of view, a receiver can still receive and achieve a 10% PER even
if the transmitted signal was operating at or even passed the P1dB of the
transmitter. On a transmitter for 802.11a data rates below 24 Mbps, the
68
It is very important to note that the exact amount of backoff is very much related to the am-
plitude and phase nonlinearity characteristics of the particular PA in use. The 7-dB backoff
mentioned above is only a “typical” number often utilized for common SiGe and GaAs PAs
in the market today.
maximum transmit power is typically set by the spectrum mask, whereas for
the higher order data rates, it is set by the EVM. More will be discussed on
this topic later.
3.10 LOCAL OSCILLATOR PULLING IN PLL
We will now discuss impairments that impact the performance of the PLL.
The first impairment we will discuss is the “PLL pulling” (or VCO
pulling) phenomenon. In the most general definition, PLL pulling refers to a
phenomenon by which the LO generated by the PLL and supplied to the re-
ceiver or the transmitter momentarily changes frequency as a result of a
transient event. Such pulling usually occurs by the transient event coupling
to some part of the VCO (control line, power supply, etc.). Modern integrat-
ed VCOs usually have a very high gain (in MHz/V) due to a limited power
supply headroom and the need for wideband tuning. The problem is there-
fore exacerbated in the newer generation of ICs unless proper techniques are
utilized. If such a pulling is reasonably small, the receiver’s baseband digital
PLL may be able to correct for it, but if the frequency shift is large enough,
the system can experience a packet loss.
One technique to reduce the effect of VCO pulling would be a mecha-
nism to reduce the VCO gain (Kvco) by using banks of switch capacitors (to
be discussed later). For a typical 802.11a worldwide system, without the use
of such a technique, Kvco can be as large 1 GHz/V! With such a large gain, a
transient noise event of 100 ␮V can generate a momentary transient fre-
quency shift of 100 kHz. In a typical 802.11 system such a large frequency
shift would be quite difficult to track by the receiver baseband PLL. By us-
ing switch-capacitor banks, Kvco for this system can be reduced to 30
MHz/V such that the same 100 ␮V noise event would result in a small 3-
kHz transient frequency shift.
One of the most common reasons for VCO pulling is a phenomenon
known as injection locking. In general, small perturbations to a VCO can
be seen as phase noise or spurs. But as the spurs get closer to the VCO’s
operating frequency, and as they get larger in amplitude, injection locking
occurs and the VCO tries to track the frequency of the coupled noise sig-
nal (Fig. 3.24a). As shown in Figure 3.24b, if the VCO frequency is close
to the transmitted frequency (which can be the case in a conventional
direct-conversion transmitter) and especially if a high power amplifier is
integrated on the same die, the PA output can couple to the VCO and
cause injection locking. Injection locking can be detrimental to the opera-
tion of a system and will result in extremely poor EVM. In general since
the VCO has the highest gain at the frequency of operation, the closer the
3.10 LOCAL OSCILLATOR PULLING IN PLL 125
fRF ~ fVCO
PA
fRF fVCO
VCO
(a) (b)
Figure 3.24 Example of VCO pulling caused by coupling of PA output to VCO. In this ex-
ample, it is assumed that the VCO is operating at the center frequency of the PA output (as
would be the case in a direct-conversion transmitter that uses no special provisions to avoid
this situation).
interfering signal is to the operating frequency, the higher the chance of in-
jection locking.69
Another mechanism that can cause VCO pulling is the reception of a very
large interferer by the receiver. Again, in a direct-conversion or low IF re-
ceiver, the large interfering signal can injection lock to the VCO through
parasitic coupling paths. Typically this is a smaller problem than the one de-
scribed in the previous paragraph in a transmitter, because of the larger am-
plitude associated with the power amplifier output.
In both cases described above, one solution would be to operate the VCO
at a different frequency than the transmitter (TX) or receiver (RX). The
VCO can, for example, operate at half the TX output frequency or twice the
output frequency. The LO is then generated by the proper integer division or
multiplication function. Even a better solution would be if the VCO oper-
ates at a frequency that is not harmonically related to the transmit or receive
frequencies. For example, the VCO can operate at two-thirds the RF. The
advantage of this scheme is that no harmonics of the VCO would fall on the
fundamental of the RF frequency and vice versa. Of course, there is a com-
mon frequency at which the nth harmonic of LO and the mth harmonic of
the RF signal would both fall on, but this is rarely a problem.
So, in summary, listed below are some of the primary factors determining
the magnitude of the TX or RX VCO pulling problems discussed above:
1. The magnitude of the interfering signal
69
R. Adler first discussed injection locking in his paper, “A Study of Locking Phenomena in
Oscillators,” in 1946. Since then much work has been done to study this phenomenon. In
many places injection locking is to be avoided and the proper precautions are to be taken. In
other cases, injection locking is utilized for various purposes in electronic as well as optical
systems.
2. The isolation from the interfering source to the VCO

3. The frequency offset of the interfering signal relative to the VCO fre-
quency
4. The point of coupling on the VCO circuit
5. The Q of the tank
The coupling from the interfering source to the VCO can take many paths
such as the magnetic or electric coupling on the package, magnetic or elec-
tric coupling due to on-chip components, and coupling through the chip
substrate.
Another mechanism that can cause VCO pulling is the change of an im-
pedance as seen by a VCO (commonly known as load pulling). For exam-
ple, in a half-duplex system, as the system is switched from RX to TX or
vice versa, different LO buffers may be turned on or off. This transient
event often causes a transient change of load impedance. If this change of
impedance is buffered from the VCO by a high reverse isolation (through
the use of multiple buffers, cascode devices, etc.), then there will be little or
no VCO pulling. Otherwise VCO pulling could occur.
In all of the above examples of VCO pulling, a wide bandwidth PLL can
help recover from the pulling effect quickly. So in general a wide loop
bandwidth would be beneficial. However, the loop stability is quite impor-
tant too, since an underdamped loop (even if wideband) can cause frequen-
cy ripples in the PLL response which may degrade the system performance.
One can observe the frequency-settling behavior of a PLL using a signal an-
alyzer with an FM demodulator option. An example of the PLL settling be-
havior is shown in Figure 3.25. In this example the PLL settles to within 50
kHz of its final value in about 32 ␮s.
3.11 PHASE NOISE IN PLL
One of the most important specifications for a PLL is its phase noise perfor-
mance.70 Phase noise can be qualitatively described as the random fluctua-
tions in the instantaneous phase as a result of noise altering the zero-cross-
ing point in time.
Ideally an LO signal generated by the PLL would only have a frequency
70
Phase noise is the most common specification for LO synthesis PLLs. Baseband PLLs, on
the other hand, which are used for clock recovery, are typically specified in terms of their RMS
and peak-to-peak jitter performance. Jitter is a time-domain specification (specified in, e.g., pi-
coseconds), whereas phase noise is a frequency-domain specification (specified in decibels
relative to the carrier per hertz (dBc/Hz) at a certain frequency offset from the carrier).
3.11 PHASE NOISE IN PLL 127
Figure 3.25 A PLL settling behavior obtained by using an FM demodulator on a VSA. The
PLL settles to within 50 kHz of its final value in about 8 symbols or 32 ␮s.
content at the desired synthesized frequency and should look like a single
“stick” when observed with a spectrum analyzer. In reality, the LO signal
would have “side skirts.” These side skirts result in the presence of energy
at adjacent frequencies to the LO signal (Figure 3.26b).
The closed-loop phase noise behavior of a PLL is the result of the many
components of the PLL contributing the overall phase noise with their
unique transfer functions. For example, in the closed loop of the PLL, the
phase noise of the VCO appears with a high pass transfer function.71 In oth-
er words, although the VCO itself has a significant amount of noise at low
frequency offsets from the carrier, this phase noise is rejected by the magni-
tude of the PLL gain at the lower frequencies. On the other hand, compo-
nents such as the crystal oscillator, the reference dividers, the phase-fre-
quency detector, and the charge pump exhibit a low pass noise transfer
function as seen at the output of the PLL.
Based on the above description, it should be clear that a trade-off exists
in the PLL phase noise performance relative to the loop bandwidth of the
PLL. For example, if the loop bandwidth is set to a wide value, the VCO
phase noise would be rejected to a high degree, but there would be a higher
contribution to the integrated phase noise of the PLL due to the in-band
noise contributors. Setting the loop bandwidth to a narrow value would
cause the VCO phase noise to dominate the integrated phase noise perfor-
mance. Note that in a fractional-N PLL, the quantization noise of the
71
This can easily be seen by analyzing the loop equations to obtain the proper transfer func-
tions as seen at the output of the VCO (which is the output of the PLL).
RF
desired interferer
(a)
P
LO
F
Flo
(b)
P
IF
F
Fif
(c)
Figure 3.26 Impact of phase noise on reciprocal mixing in a receiver: (a) spectrum of de-
sired signal and interferer modeled as CW signals for simplicity; (b) spectrum of nonideal
LO which displays effect of phase noise; (c) output of receiver mixer after mixing spectrums
shown in (a) and (b).
sigma–delta modulator would be quite large and should also be taken into
account in setting the PLL BW. The narrower the PLL bandwidth, the more
of the sigma–delta noise would be rejected by the loop action. This is traded
off against the impact of the loop bandwidth on the VCO noise.
It is important to note that many other factors enter the equation in setting
3.11 PHASE NOISE IN PLL 129
the PLL bandwidth. These include the PLL settling time, reference spurs,
and loop stability. All these factors need to be accounted for in designing a
PLL.
PLL and VCO phase noise can adversely affect the performance of a
transceiver in several ways. Different standards would be more or less sen-
sitive to degradations due to certain aspects of phase noise, and the PLLs
would therefore be designed with these sensitivities in mind.
The general impact of phase noise in the system can be typically ana-
lyzed by looking at the “close-in” phase noise and “far-out” phase noise.
Close-in phase noise would refer to phase noise within the bandwidth of the
desired channel (not to be confused with the loop bandwidth of the PLL,
which is typically set to a fraction of the channel bandwidth). Far-out phase
noise can be described as the phase noise outside the desired channel band-
width. In the case of 802.11a, with this definition, the close-in phase noise
would refer to a single-sided phase noise of up to 8.125 MHz from the carri-
er frequency.
In the case of a receiver phase noise (typically out-of-band phase noise
dominated by the VCO) can result in a phenomenon called reciprocal mix-
ing. Consider the scenario in which a receiver receives two signals at its
antenna: one desired small signal and an undesired large interfering signal
reasonably close in frequency to the desired signal (Fig. 3.26a). The LO
has a significant amount of phase noise on it (Fig. 3.26b). When the two
signals are mixed at the mixer, the synthesized LO’s noise is superimposed
on both of the down-converted signals. At the output of the mixer, the
small desired signal is now corrupted by the LO’s noise which has been
down converted by the large interfering signal (Fig. 3.26c). This mecha-
nism is referred to as reciprocal mixing, because the RF port of the mixer
has acted like an LO port (with the large interferer being the LO signal)
and the LO port has become the RF port (with the LO noise becoming the
“RF signal”).
In a transmitter, LO phase noise creates a noisy output signal that can
interfere with other users (such as the user in the adjacent channel) in the
form of spurious emissions. The spurious emissions are typically restricted
by the standard or by the FCC. In full-duplex systems such as WCDMA,
the transmitter phase noise is typically highly restricted in order to reduce
its impact on the receive band incoming signals. These restrictions are nec-
essary due to potential for a very large dynamic range difference between
the transmitted signal (e.g., +26 dBm) and the received signal (e.g., –98
dBm).
Reciprocal mixing and spurious emissions are examples of issues related
to far-out phase noise. These can be very important, for example, in embed-
ded WLAN applications where the WLAN radio is integrated along with the
cellular radios in a cell phone.
In many applications of 802.11, however, the most important issues (and
the most challenging specifications) related to phase noise are related to the
close-in phase noise.
3.12 FAR-OUT PHASE NOISE
It is instructive to investigate the impact of far-out phase noise on system

behavior. As discussed earlier, far-out phase noise can cause adjacent chan-
nel interference and reciprocal mixing. In order to avoid desensitization due
to reciprocal mixing, the system phase noise has to be designed with a low
enough out-of-band phase noise. We now consider an example.
The standard sets the sensitivity level requirement for the 6-Mbps data
rate of 802.11a at –82 dBm. Assuming an SNR of 5 dB is required to prop-
erly decode this signal, we require that the products of the reciprocal mixing
are below this level so that they do not impact the signal to noise plus inter-
ference level (SNIR) at the receiver slicer (Fig. 3.27). Let us further assume
an adjacent channel CW interferer with –66 dBm power at a 12-MHz fre-
quency offset from the center of the desired signal. Given the 16.25-MHz
bandwidth of the desired signal, the required interference level due to recip-
rocal mixing would need to be less that –87 – 10 log(BW = 16.25 MHz) =
–159.1 dBm/Hz. Given a –66-dBm interferer, the phase noise at an offset of
12 MHz would have to be smaller than –159.1 – (–66) = –93.1 dBc/Hz.
Similar calculations show required PN of –109.1 dBc/Hz at a 32-MHz off-
set and –129 dBc/Hz at a 50-MHz offset, given the assumed interferers
I = −30 dBm
I = −50 dBm
−30 dB/dec
I = −66 dBm
−20 dB/dec
−87 dBm
fc 0.3 8 12-28 32-48 50 MHz
Figure 3.27 Impact of phase noise on reciprocal mixing in 802.11a receiver. The in-band
subcarriers from 300 kHz to 8 MHz are shown. Assumed CW interferers are also shown at
various offset frequencies. The profile of an assumed phase noise is also shown. Such phase
noise often has –30 dB/decade at small frequency offsets and –20 dB/decade further away.
3.13 EFFECT OF PHASE NOISE ON OFDM SYSTEMS 131
shown in Figure 3.27. Note that the CW ACI interference at a 50-MHz off-
set is a Hyperlan II requirement and not an 802.11 requirement.
In reality, the adjacent channel interference requirements on a 802.11
system are based on a modulated signal and not a CW interferer. Further,
given that the phase noise profile is likely to continue to roll off beyond a
12-MHz offset, the resultant interference with the desired signal would be
less than that calculated above (the calculation above is considering worst-
case interference at the edge of the band and for a CW signal). Therefore, in
reality, the situation is much more complicated that that portrayed above.
System level simulations are typically required to determine the exact im-
pact of the out-of-band phase noise and ACI on PER. However, the reality
of the situation, because of the reasons outlined above, would be less severe
that the calculations above would suggest. It is important to note that
achieving the above calculated phase noise performance (even for the worst
case portrayed above) is fairly straightforward. One should note, however,
that, in reality, today’s WLAN systems are capable of sensitivities several
decibels better than what the standard requires. Therefore, in order to
achieve the state-of-the-art sensitivity levels, an additional 10 dB or so of
margin would be required.
3.13 EFFECT OF PHASE NOISE ON OFDM SYSTEMS
In the case of the 802.11a/g OFDM signals, probably the most important
impact of phase noise on the signal is the loss of orthogonality on the sub-
carriers due to the inter-subcarrier interference caused by the PLL phase
noise. Since each subcarrier has a bandwidth of 312.5 kHz, it is clear that
the integrated phase noise of the closed-loop PLL across this bandwidth is
quite important. The loop bandwidth of the 802.11 PLL is set by considera-
tion of many criteria but is often selected to be in the few hundred kilohertz
range. As such, since the phase noise typically rolls off after the loop band-
width frequency, the interference of the subcarriers to the second and third
adjacent subcarriers becomes less of an issue. The integrated phase noise
over a 312.5-kHz bandwidth degrades the self-SNR of each subcarrier.
Another specification of interest for 802.11a/g systems is the integrated
single-sided phase noise of the PLL across the entire channel (up to 8.125
MHz). This number is indicative of the PN-induced interference of any sub-
carrier with the other subcarriers.
Beyond a 8.125-MHz offset, phase noise can cause interchannel interfer-
ence (e.g., ACI).
In general, the effect of phase noise on the OFDM constellation (as com-
pared to a single-carrier modulated signal) is “unconventional.” As such,

phase noise causes state spreading on the constellation points. Figure 3.28a
shows the constellation diagram of an otherwise “ideal” 802.11a signal sub-
ject to severe in-band phase noise. Overall EVM is degraded to –26 dB. The
EVM versus subcarriers for this signal is displayed in Figure 3.28b. Note
that the phase noise impacts all subcarriers similarly, and it would be diffi-
cult to pinpoint phase noise as the reason for the signal impairment by sole-
ly looking at these plots.
There are certain digital techniques that may be used to reduce the impact
of phase noise on the system performance. For example, a digital pilot-
tracking-based phase noise cancellation scheme may be utilized. However,
in general, these techniques are not very effective. For example, these tech-
niques often cannot compensate for high offset frequency phase noise. Fur-
ther these cancellation techniques operate on a post-FFT basis and cannot
compensate for the inter-subcarrier “leakage” that occurs before the FFT
operation. In general, the best solution is to have a high performance (low
phase noise) radio PLL.
The details of the design of a low phase noise PLL are beyond the scope
of this book. However, one should be aware that in order to maintain a low
in-band (within the loop bandwidth of the PLL) phase noise response, com-
ponents such as the crystal oscillator, frequency dividers, and charge pump
should be designed with low noise levels. By going through the PLL equa-
tions, it can be shown that the noise contributions of these blocks will show
up with a low pass characteristic as seen at the PLL output, with roll-off oc-
curring at the loop bandwidth of the PLL. On the other hand, the VCO
noise, for example, will have a high pass characteristic as seen at the PLL
output and will therefore dominate the out-of-band characteristics of the
PLL phase noise.
3.14 EFFECT OF FREQUENCY ERRORS ON OFDM
Another impairment affecting the WLAN system performance is the effect

of frequency errors. The fundamental causes of frequency errors are crystal
inaccuracies in the transmitter as well as the receiver side. As in any coher-
ent modulation system, the OFDM receiver needs to track the transmitter
frequency.
In a conventional single-carrier (non-OFDM) system, a frequency error
would result in a continuous rotation of the constellation. However, in an
OFDM system, a constant frequency error results in state spreading of the
constellation.
3.14 EFFECT OF FREQUENCY ERRORS ON OFDM 133
(a)
(b)
Figure 3.28 An 802.11a signal subject to severe in-band PLL phase noise: (a) constellation
diagram; (b) EVM vs. subcarrier.
Recall that in an ideal system the OFDM subcarriers are orthogonal to

one another over one symbol period of 3.2 ␮s. As an example consider the
first and second subcarriers. By definition of orthogonality,
冕0
3.2␮s
sin(2␲ × 312.5 kHz)t sin(2␲ × 625 kHz)t dt = 0
However, with a frequency offset ⌬f, orthogonality is lost:
冕3.2␮s
0
sin[2␲(312.5 + ⌬f) kHz]t sin[2␲(625 + ⌬f) kHz]t dt ⫽ 0 (3.4)
This results in state spreading as outlined above and a “smearing” of the

constellation points.
The 802.11a standard requires that the transmitter have no more than 20
PPM of frequency offset. Since frequency accuracy is determined by the
crystal, this typically translates into a specification that the crystal’s fre-
quency does not deviate from the required frequency by more than 20 PPM
over parts, temperature, and time (aging). Certain crystal tuning and calibra-
tion techniques can be used, but this adds cost and some complexity. The
Table 3.1 Summary of Typical Analog Impairments, Impact on Single-Carrier

Modulation Systems, and “Unconventional” Impact on OFDM-Modulated Systems
Effect on
Single-Carrier Effect on OFDM Method to
Impairment Constellation Constellation Observe on VSA
I/Q Balance Constellation skew State spreading Pilot tones on
constellation
diagram
Phase noise Constellation arcing, State spreading LOGT-based
especially at outer measurement
points
Mismatched I/Q State spreading Constellation arcing, EVM vs. frequency
timing delays especially at outer
points
Improper filtering State spreading EVM vs. frequency
Settling problems State spreading State spreading EVM vs. time
Flicker noise State spreading EVM vs. frequency
Nonlinear distortion State spreading State spreading CDF/CCDF
In-band spurs State spreading State spreading EVM vs. frequency
Uncompensated State spreading State spreading Spectrum plot
Frequency errors
Note: A good method to identify the source of the analog impairment on the VSA is also listed.
3.15 SUMMARY OF ANALOG/RF IMPAIRMENTS 135
cost and complexity have to be traded off against the use of a higher accura-
cy (but more expensive) crystal.
Frequency errors are typically corrected for in the receiver side in the
digital domain. After the digital correction very little frequency error should
exist in such a way that Equation 3.4 calculates to a number very close to
zero. In the absence of any (typically factory) calibration and reasonably
high accuracy crystals, there are certain advantages to correcting the fre-
quency error in a “mixed-mode” fashion, especially in a direct-conversion
system. This topic will be examined in more detail in the Chapter 5.
3.15 SUMMARY OF ANALOG/RF IMPAIRMENTS
Table 3.1 summarizes many of the impairments discussed in this section

and lists some additional analog impairments impacting typical communica-
tions systems. In order to identify the unique behavior of OFDM-based sys-
tems, an additional column is added to identify the impact of the impair-
ments on single-carrier systems. An additional column identifies a
particular measurement to isolate the analog impairment on a vector signal
analyzer.
CHAPTER 4
Some Key Radio Building Blocks
So far we have discussed various system aspects of WLAN radio design. In

doing so, we have discussed a variety of analog impairments which can im-
pact the system performance. We will now transition to basic transistor lev-
el design of certain key building blocks used in various transceivers. This is,
however, by no means a comprehensive examination of all building blocks
used in a WLAN radio design. The interested reader is referred to the bibli-
ography at the end of the book.
4.1 LOW NOISE AMPLIFIER
A LNA is a block that is typically placed as the first active component of a

receive chain. As the name suggests, the primary purpose of an LNA is to
provide some gain to the signal while adding minimal amount of noise. By
doing so, it provides a larger signal at its output than its input, while the
SNR at the output is only slightly worse than that at the input. The noise
added by the circuit can be quantified by using the concept of NF as de-
scribed earlier. Recall that NF can be described as 10 log(output SNR)/
(input SNR).
Equivalently, NF can be described as the total input-referred noise of the
circuit as compared to the noise from the source resistance:
冢冣
Ni
NF = 10 log 1 + ᎏ
4kTRs
Another important aspect of an LNA is that it is typically required to pro-

vide a known input impedance to the outside world. This is required be-
cause external passive (or sometimes active) components that connect to the
LNA (filters, antennae, transmission lines, etc.) are designed with a certain
characteristic impedance. If the LNA’s input impedance deviates from the
required characteristic impedance, the external passive components would
not behave in the intended way. Most communications systems today are
designed for 50 ⍀ characteristic impedance. This would require the LNA to
138 CHAPTER 4 SOME KEY RADIO BUILDING BLOCKS
ideally provide a 50 ⍀ real characteristic impedance and 0 ⍀ of imaginary

(capacitive or inductive) impedance.
Further, to achieve a minimum possible NF given a certain external
source resistance, a certain optimal LNA input impedance would be re-
quired. This input resistance is not the same (but often not too vastly differ-
ent) as what would be required for an optimal power match. One important
goal of the LNA designer is to balance these input matching needs.
Let us assume that an input 50-⍀ real match is required. There are sever-
al ways of achieving real 50 ⍀ input impedance on the LNA. In the simplest
approach (shown in Fig. 4.1), a 50-⍀ shunt resistor can be placed at the in-
put of the LNA (while any input capacitance would be tuned out with an in-
ductor and presumed to be high impedance at resonance). Unfortunately, by
utilizing such a scheme, even with a noise-free LNA, the NF of the LNA
will be limited to a minimum of 3 dB since Ri = Rs:
冢冣
Ni
NF = 10 log 1 + ᎏ
4kTRs
冢冣
4kTRi + · · ·
= 10 log 1 + ᎏᎏ
4kTRs
>3
In reality, the NF will be larger than 3 dB with this matching scheme.

Clearly this is not a desirable scheme for systems that require optimal sen-
sitivity.
Rs Ri
Zi
Le
(a) (b)
Figure 4.1 (a) Input matching using “brute-force” resistive termination. (b) Narrowband
input matching using inductive degeneration in common-emitter (or common-source) con-
figuration.
4.1 LOW NOISE AMPLIFIER 139
An alternative scheme which is quite popular for narrowband 72 applica-

tions is the use of inductive emitter degeneration for bipolar and source de-
generation for CMOS transistors. In this scheme, an inductor is placed at the
emitter terminal of the transistor (Fig. 4.1b). Because of the capacitive roll-
off nature of the AC gain (␤) of the device, when this inductor is reflected
back to the input on the base terminal, it is transformed to a resistive compo-
nent:
Zi = rb + (␤ + 1) j␻Le – j . . .
␻T
= rb + ᎏ j␻Le + j␻Le – j . . .
j␻
= rb + ␻TLe – j . . .
Here, rb is the base resistance of the device, ␻T is the unity gain frequen-
cy of the device, ␤ is the AC gain of the device, and Le is the emitter de-
generation inductance. As can be seen, the term ␻TLe is a purely real com-
ponent. The remainder capacitance seen at the base can easily be canceled
by using an inductor in the base side. In this approach, since Re(Zi) is set
purely by the reactive component of Le (ignoring rb), no noise penalty is
incurred.
Similarly, in a CMOS approach, rb is replaced with rg (gate resistance)
which would represent the geometric-based polysilicon gate resistance as
well as the non-quasi-static noise due to the MOSFET channel resistance.
Otherwise the same equation applies.
It is important to note that a certain device in a certain technology can ob-
tain an optimal NF for a unique input impedance. This input impedance is
often not the same impedance as the optimal power match (typically 50 ⍀).
The LNA designer, therefore, often designs the circuit for an optimal noise
match which simultaneously satisfies the minimum required input imped-
ance match (S11).
Using this scheme, LNA noise figures of 1 to 2 dB are achievable in stan-
dard CMOS and SiGe processes at the 2.4- and 5-GHz bands.
If the LNA output is brought off chip (e.g., for image signal or noise fil-
tering) output impedance matching will also be required. For WLAN appli-
cations this is typically avoided, and image and noise filtering is achieved
by a variety of other means depending on the receiver architecture.
Another important characteristic of an LNA is its linearity. As described
earlier, often an LNA is exposed to very large signal interferers with mini-
72
In this context a bandwidth of 1 GHz across the 5-GHz band for the 802.11a band is con-
sidered to be narrowband.
mal filtering support. If a large incoming signal is due to the desired signal
being large, gain control in the LNA can be utilized to reduce the amplitude
of the signal at the output of the LNA (reasonably high linearity at the input
of the LNA is still required). However, if the LNA is exposed to a large in-
terfering signal while receiving a small desired signal, it would need to have
good linearity as well as good noise performance at the same time. Achiev-
ing high linearity performance in the LNA while maintaining a low NF is
quite challenging.
Figure 4.2a shows the schematic of a more realistic LNA used in a 5-
GHz WLAN transceiver (Bouras et al., 2003). The Ls devices are used to
obtain the proper real part of input impedance and the Lgs devices are used
to cancel out the capacitance seen at the gates. The Lds devices are used to
resonate out all the capacitance existent on the output section. This includes
any capacitance due to the LNA output devices as well as the input stage of
the following mixer.
In this scheme a differential LNA is used as the first active component of
the receive chain. The choice of a differential approach is quite popular with
many high integration systems, since a certain amount of immunity is ob-
tained to any common mode interference that may be present at the
chip–package interface73 or on the chip substrate. The penalty for using a
differential design is that extra current would have to be consumed in order
to achieve the same NF as the equivalent single-ended design.
The design shown in Figure 4.2a also incorporates a differential cascode
design. The use of cascodes is also quite popular since they provide many
advantages. For example, the impact of Miller capacitance is reduced and
therefore a higher gain can be achieved from a single stage. Further, a sig-
nificant improvement to the reverse isolation of the amplifier (S12) is
achieved. This simplifies the input and output matching or tuning of the
LNA by making the matching networks relatively independent of one an-
other (a “unilateral” circuit). Due to the higher isolation, the cascodes also
help reduce the possibility of oscillations in the circuit.
At low frequencies, the cascodes do not contribute to the NF of the
LNA. As the frequency is increased, however, the cascodes will contribute
to the LNA NF since the output impedance of the input transconductor
devices (at their drains) are reduced with increased frequency (due to the
parasitic capacitance at these nodes). In order to minimize the impact of
the cascodes on NF, the parasitic capacitances at the drain of the input de-
73
The chip–package interface is a very common point for the ingress of noise or interference
on to the small received signal. The ingress is often due to magnetic couplings due to bond
wires and/or traces on the package.
4.1 LOW NOISE AMPLIFIER 141
Ld Ld
Out
LO
Lg
RFin Ls Ls Out
RFin
Lg
(a) (b)
Figure 4.2 (a) A more realistic WLAN LNA configuration. (b) A WLAN receiver folded
mixer cell.
vices must be minimized by utilizing proper design and layout tech-

niques.74
The LNA of Figure 4.2a utilized switched-resistance gain control at its
output stage. By switching in a variety of resistors, the output tank is de-
queued, and as a result the gain of the LNA is reduced. In designing such a
gain control scheme, the designer should size the switch properly:
앫 If the switch is sized too small, the on resistance of the switch can be-
come comparable to that of the resistor and as a result the desired re-
duction in gain may not be obtained. Even if the resistance of the
switch is accounted for in the design, there would be a significant part-
to-part and over-temperature gain variation due to the variability of
the resistance of a MOS switch over these parameters. Further, the
nonlinear resistance of the switch may limit the linearity performance
of the LNA when the switch is on.
앫 If the switch is sized too large, its parasitic capacitance can be sig-
nificant and the effect of the resistor dequeuing may be observed
even when the switch is off. This will result in a reduction in the
maximum achievable gain of the stage and a reduction in the range
74
Layout techniques include the removal of the diffusion-to-metal contacts at these nodes and
sharing the diffusion implant region between the source of the cascode device with the drain
of the transconductor. Circuit techniques include the use of inductors at these nodes to tune
out the capacitance (at the expense of added area).
of gain control that is achieved. Further, the nonlinear capacitance of

the switch may limit the linearity of the LNA, especially when the
switch is off.
In reality, quite often the switch network is implemented in a fully differen-

tial fashion to preserve the symmetry and common-mode capabilities of the
circuit. As such the switch–R network would be implemented as an
R–SW–R or an SW–R–SW configuration.
Many other methods can be used to implement gain control in the LNA.
For example, the cascode and transconductance devices can be grouped
with the total width of each group set by the gain step required. Then the
cascode gates of each group can be controlled individually to obtain the de-
sired level of signal attenuation. In this approach, the gate voltage of each
group is tied to the proper cascode voltage if the section is to be turned on,
and it is grounded if the stage is to be turned off. In this scheme, effectively
the input transconductance is reduced to reduce the block gain. An advan-
tage of this scheme is that the DC is reduced at higher attenuation settings.
On the other hand, as the attenuation setting is increased, the input imped-
ance and therefore the S11 of the block are modified.
Modifications of this general scheme have also been utilized. For exam-
ple, instead of shutting down the cascode device of a particular section, the
output current of that section can be diverted away from the load, thereby
reducing the effective transconductance delivered to the load and reducing
the gain. In this scheme the S11 of the block as a function of the gain setting
remains relatively constant.
The LNA shown in Figure 4.2a and described above is implemented in
0.18-␮m CMOS technology and achieves a maximum gain of 18/10 dB in
the high gain/low gain modes. In the high gain mode, this particular imple-
mentation achieves an LNA NF of 3 dB for the lower 802.11a bands and a
NF of 4.5 dB for the highest band. The overall system NF of this implemen-
tation is ~6 dB.
Current state-of-the-art CMOS LNAs are capable of obtaining <2 dB NF
in the 802.11a bands. Systems utilizing these latest LNAs are capable of
achieving <4 dB NF in the 802.11a band.
4.2 MIXER AND ITS LOCAL OSCILLATOR BUFFERS
Another key building block in the design of wireless transceivers is the fre-
quency conversion block or the mixer. The symbol for a mixer is simply a
multiplier. If two sinusoids f1 and f2 are applied to a multiplier, frequency
4.2 MIXER AND ITS LOCAL OSCILLATOR BUFFERS 143
conversion is achieved at the sum ( f1 + f2) as well as the difference (f1 – f2)
of the two frequencies:
cos( f1) cos(f2) = 1–2[cos( f1 + f2) + cos(f1 – f2)]
Many schemes can be used to obtain frequency translation. One very popu-
lar scheme used to obtain frequency conversion is a “Gilbert quad” to obtain
current-mode multiplication (Fig. 4.3). In the case of a bipolar Gilbert quad
with the inputs
Iin,d = AI cos(␻RFt) VLO = ALO cos(␻LOt)
one can get
冢冣
VLO
Iout,d = Iin,d tanh ᎏ
2VT
To maximize the conversion gain of the mixer and also improve its linearity
and noise performance, it is best to operate the Gilbert quad in a fully
switched mode rather than as a multiplier. In such a scheme, if ALO Ⰷ 4VT
(VT is the thermal voltage and is equal to 26 mV at room temperature), the
input current is “fully” switched. This is equivalent to multiplication by a
unit square wave with a fundamental component amplitude 4/␲:
2
Iout,d = AI ᎏ cos[(␻RF ± ␻LO)t]
␲
Similar results can be obtained for a CMOS mixer. However, in order to

ensure full switching, the amplitude of the LO has to be significantly larger
than that required in a bipolar mixer. This is because of the exponential rela-
tionship between Ic and Vbe in a bipolar transistor as compared to the square-
Ioutp Ioutm Iin, d = A1 cos(ωRF t )
+ VLO = ALO cos(ωLO t )

VLO
VLO
Iout, d = Iin, d · tanh
2VT
Iinp Iinm
Figure 4.3 Basic Gilbert cell mixing quad utilizing bipolar transistors. Associated basic
equations are also shown for when the quad is used in a multiplier mode.
law (or linear in the case of short channel length) relationship between Id
and Vgs in a MOSFET. As a result, the LO buffers used in CMOS designs
typically burn significantly more current than their bipolar counterparts.
The schematic for a receiver mixer cell is shown in Figure 4.2b (Bouras
et al., 2003). This mixer is utilized in an 802.11a direct-conversion receiver.
This mixer is implemented in a fully differential doubly balanced fashion to
maintain a high common-mode rejection ratio and also provide a high de-
gree of RF and LO rejection at the baseband output. The input transconduc-
tance is made of NMOS devices for maximum gm and minimum NF. Instead
of feeding the resultant output current from the transconductor devices di-
rectly into NMOS Gilbert quads, the output current is folded using the top
PMOS current sources and diverted into the PMOS Gilbert quad (this struc-
ture is known as a folded cascode in opamp design). Theoretically the use of
PMOS quad results in a reduced flicker noise contribution to the mixer NF
due to the switching devices.75 In reality, however, the use of a PMOS quad
would require the designer to use larger size devices for these switches (as
compared to the NMOS devices) for the same conversion gain performance.
For a given LO buffer power consumption, this would result in a reduced
swing at the LO port. As a result, a longer period of time would be spent at
or around the zero-crossing point of the quad devices, resulting in a higher
contribution by these devices to the mixer noise. Further, the thermal noise
of the PMOS current-source devices can also contribute significantly to the
overall NF. The optimal overall design, therefore, would depend on the par-
ticulars of the device technology and design techniques used. It is also im-
portant to note that, due to reduced power supply voltages available on
modern technologies, a folding technique may be required to accommodate
the voltage headroom constraints of the design.
This particular design achieves a single-sideband NF of 12 dB and an
IIP3 of +4 dBm while operating at the 5-GHz band. The mixer is typically
the limiting block in the receiver linearity performance. In order to be able
to receive large input signals, it is therefore desirable to achieve a higher
IIP3 that that achieved by this design. Current state-of-the art active mixer
designs utilized for 802.11a can achieve IIP3s of ~15 dBm. Passive mixer
designs can achieve IIP3s of > 20 dBm while obtaining NFs of < 10 dB.
75
The fundamental reason that the flicker noise of PMOS and NMOS devices is different is
because the underlying phenomena causing the flicker noise are believed to be different. In
the NMOS device, flicker noise is believed to be due to the random trapping and detrapping
of the free carriers in the channel and the resultant change in the number of free carriers
available in the channel. For a PMOS device, on the other hand, the cause of flicker noise is
believed to be the bulk mobility fluctuations through scattering phenomena. The exact cause
of flicker noise is an active device physics research area.
One method to linearize the mixer Gm is the use of the scheme shown in
Figure 4.4 (Bouras et al., 2003). In this scheme, the input signals are applied
at the positive terminals of the opamps U1 and U2, rather than directly at the
inputs of the PMOS transconductors M1 and M2. The opamps are config-
ured as unity gain buffers and apply the differential voltage across the vari-
able-switched degeneration resistor Rx. The output current is then set by the
differential voltage Vind divided by the degeneration resistance Rx. Effec-
tively, the opamps U1, U2, the transistors M1, M2, and the variable resistor
Rx form the composite differential transconductor for this circuit. The loop
gains of the opamps allow for this composite transconductor to have a very
high linearity. In this implementation, an IIP3 of +20 dBm (for a hypotheti-
cal 50-⍀ reference) is achieved. An example of a mixer, in this case a trans-
mit-side variable-gain mixer utilizing this transconductor linearization
scheme, is shown in Figure 4.4 (Bouras et al., 2003). As explained earlier, it
is desirable to maintain a large amplitude on the baseband section of a trans-
mitter in order to reduce the LOFT due to baseband DC offsets. However, in
order to maintain a large baseband signal, the baseband chain would need to
have a high degree of linearity. In particular, the transconductance stage of
the up-converting mixer needs to be linearized in some fashion.
The gain of this stage is programmable and can be adjusted by switching
in the proper value of resistance Rx. In this implementation 27 dB of pro-
grammable attenuation is achieved. It is important to note that maintaining
the desired LOFT at the higher attenuation settings is more difficult since
the signal level is attenuated but the DC offsets may not be. Therefore the
RFout
I I
M7 M8 M9 M10
Rx
LO
TxInn U1 M1 M2 U2 TxInp
M5 M6
M3 M4
Figure 4.4 Highly linear variable-gain up-conversion mixer cell utilized in some WLAN
applications. The loop gain of the opamps is utilized to maintain high linearity in this cell.
RC RC
P P
Input spectrum Output spectrum
Vout
in 2BW
F F
fc
fc F
BW
(a) (b) (c)
Figure 4.5 (a) Ideal hypothetical LO signal applied to LO buffer. (b) Basic bipolar LO
buffer showing noise on tail current source. (c) Output spectrum at buffer output showing up
conversion or tail current source and corruption of desired signal.
LOFT in decibels relative to the carrier will degrade at the higher attenua-
tion settings.
The output current of the transconductor stage is then folded through the
folding NMOS current sources and cascode devices M3 to M6 and fed into
the Gilbert quad M7 to M10. The signal is then unconverted directly to the
desired RF in the direct up-conversion transmitter. Note that in this case the
flicker noise associated with the switching quad is not of concern, since, un-
like a down-conversion mixer, their flicker noise will not show up at the
output spectrum. At the same time the flicker noise of the input transcon-
ductor devices, the current sources, and so on, do need to be taken into ac-
count. The inductors at the output are used to tune out the parasitic capaci-
tances at the output of the mixer.
In the actual implementation, two baseband paths and mixers are used to
accommodate the quadrature image-reject up conversion of the baseband
signal. The outputs of the mixers are connected to one another, and a shared
pair of inductors is used as the common load.
Another important but often overlooked radio block is the LO buffer(s)
used for applying the required synthesized LO signal to the receive and
transmit mixers. The VCO is rarely directly coupled to the mixers even if
the VCO frequency is the same as the LO frequency. This is because it is
important to maintain a high Q tank on the VCO in order to obtain a low
phase noise. Routing lines used between blocks often have a significant
amount of resistance associated with their capacitance (and inductance). As
a result, they could dequeue the VCO tank and degrade phase noise. The
longer the routing distance is, the more the potential for dequeuing the tank
would be. By adding a local buffer close to the VCO, the VCO can be iso-
lated from floor planning and routing issues, and the modeling of the VCO
parasitics are also simplified.
Another reason to use buffers between the receive and transmit mixers
and the VCO is to provide reverse isolation. In a half-duplex system such as
that of 802.11, as the system switches between receive and transmit, the
load seen by the driving circuit can change. This load change can cause load
pulling in the VCO. The more reverse isolation provided by the LO buffers,
the less the chance of VCO load pulling.
The primary task of the LO buffers are to provide the proper amplitude
LO signal to the mixers without adding significant noise to the synthesizer-
generated signal. For bipolar mixers, this amplitude can be fairly small (a
few times VT), but for MOS mixers it needs to be significantly larger than
that (often a few times Vgt = Vgs – Vt). In order to maintain the required am-
plitude over process, temperature, and supply, it is often desirable to hard
switch the buffer’s devices (Fig. 4.5). However, with the buffer hard
switched, the noise present at the tail current source will up-convert (with an
up-conversion gain of 2/␲) and mix with the desired LO signal. In a sense
the buffer acts as an up-converter mixer to the tail current noise. It is there-
fore quite important to maintain low noise on the bias lines. Bias line noise
(on the VCO or the buffers) is often one source of phase noise seen on mea-
sured response that may have been missed in simulations. This is because,
during simulations, in order to speed up simulations or resolve convergence
problems, designers may not include the entire bias generation circuitry. If a
designer opts not to include such biasing blocks in PN simulations, it is ad-
visable to use behavioral biasing models that include the noise sources. Fig-
ure 4.5 displays how the baseband bias noise can up convert and corrupt the
desired ideal LO signal.
Depending on the frequency of operation and devices used, LO buffers
can be resistively loaded or inductively loaded. For WLAN applications, es-
pecially at the lower 2.4-GHz band, SiGe bipolar buffers can often be de-
signed with resistive loads to achieve a small area. At the higher frequencies
and especially for CMOS designs where large parasitics are present and
large swings are required, inductively loaded stages are often used to allow
the resonating of the parasitic capacitances. In general, there is a trade-off
between the area consumption of the buffer and its power consumption.
Especially in CMOS designs where large LO swings are required, the de-
sign of the LOGEN circuitry and buffers is a very important part of the
overall design and floor planning. Often LOGEN should be included in the
very early stages of the top level floor planning. Also often LOGEN con-
sumes a significant percentage of the power consumption of the chip and
should therefore be budgeted for accordingly. This is especially true if low

noise and high swing performance is required out of the LO buffers.
4.3 POWER AMPLIFIER
Another major building block used in various transceivers is the power am-
plifier (PA). The term PA is probably one of the most liberally used in the
industry. Depending on the context, the system and the person, a PA can
produce –5 dBm of output power or it can generate +40 dBm of output pow-
er! Further, the term output power itself should be elaborated on. Sometimes
the specified power level is for the “saturated” output power of the PA (the
maximum possible output power of the PA, where increasing the input sig-
nal would generate no further increase in the output power). At other times,
the specified output power level is for the 1-dB compression point of the
PA. Yet at other times, the specified power level is the maximum “linear”
output power level of the PA. This latter specification requires further clari-
fication as to what modulation type is being transmitted by the PA. It should
be evident that designing a PA may be quite challenging or rather simple de-
pending on the context.
As discussed earlier, the PAR of a 802.11 OFDM signal can be as large
as 17 dB. The transmitter blocks, in particular the PA, is therefore required
to produce substantially larger peak signals than the average signal. In order
to maintain linearity, this typically requires a significant “backoff” from the
1-dB compression point of the PA (i.e., the average transmit power is set to
be several decibels below the P1dB point of the PA). This fact significantly
reduces the maximum available efficiency obtainable from a 802.11a/g PA.
Fortunately, in reality, the largest peaks of the OFDM signal occur very in-
frequently, and therefore a much smaller backoff produces reasonable sys-
tem performance while increasing the attainable efficiency.
An example of a CMOS three-stage power amplifier implemented for 5-
GHz WLAN applications is shown in Figure 4.6 (Zargari et al., 2002). In or-
der to maintain linearity, the PA is operated in class A mode. All stages are
cascoded and operate off of a 3.3-V supply. The cascode devices allow for
better stability, independent input and output matching, and a better device
reliability in the presence of large signals present at the drains of the output
devices. Each stage is capacitively level shifted so that the optimal com-
mon-mode voltage for each stage can be properly set. Capacitors are imple-
mented using stacked metal 2 through metal 5 layers. Inductive loads are
used to tune out the large capacitance present at the output of each stage and
the input of the following stage. The overall output of the PA is a differen-
4.3 POWER AMPLIFIER 149
Vpa = 3.3V
L3p L2p L1p L1n L2n L3n
C1p C1n
Vout+ C2p C2n Vout−
M3p M2p M2n M3n
L4p L4n
Bias Bias Bias Bias
Vin− Vin+
PSAT = 22 dBm
Figure 4.6 A three-stage CMOS PA achieving a saturated power of +22 dBm in 0.18-␮m
technology and utilizing a 3.3-V supply.
tial signal which requires an external balun to convert into a single-ended

output. This PA achieves a saturated output power of 22 dBm and a maxi-
mum transmit power (chip referred) of ~12.5 dBm for a 54-Mbps OFDM-
modulated signal. This PA is of interest as one of the first published PAs for
WLAN. However, the achieved efficiency is low since no special tech-
niques are utilized to enhance the efficiency of this PA.
Power amplifiers used in WLAN applications are one of the most chal-
lenging to design. PAs and diversity and time-duplexing switches are the
only main transceiver building blocks that are not commonly integrated
along with the rest of the transceiver blocks in WLANs. There have been
published examples of these functions being integrated on the same CMOS
substrate as the rest of the system. The achievable performance, however, is
often quite inferior to that obtainable by using other process technologies
(SiGe and GaAs).
When it comes to design of power amplifiers, CMOS devices in general
have many shortcomings as compared to GaAs (and even SiGe) devices. A
unit of merit that is quite applicable to PA design is the unity gain current
frequency and breakdown voltage product of the devices. Although state-of-
the-art CMOS devices have very high fT’s, they suffer from very low break-
down voltages. GaAs devices (both PHEMT and HBT), on the other hand,
simultaneously offer very high fT (and fmax) and very high breakdown volt-
ages. Further, in order to deliver a certain output power, the output devices
have to be sized properly and need to operate at the proper current density.
As a result, for a given output power, a CMOS device needs to be sized
much larger than the equivalent SiGe GaAs HBT device, resulting in much
larger parasitic capacitances. This is one of the factors causing a reduction
in the maximum attainable efficiency from the CMOS PA. In addition, this
factor reduces the maximum available gain per stage out of CMOS PAs.
Another important shortcoming in CMOS processes is the lack of a
through-wafer via. A through-wafer via is commonly available on GaAs
processes and allows for a very low inductance ground (~50 to 100 pH) to
be placed anywhere on the die. The lack of such a via technology in CMOS
processes essentially eliminates the possibility of designing a single-ended
CMOS PA at higher frequencies. This is because a small ground inductance
on the source of the PA device significantly reduces the gain attainable from
the CMOS gain stage. Clearly, the higher frequency, the more of an issue
this becomes, as the magnitude of the “inductive degeneration” rises with
increasing frequency. Because of this problem, reported CMOS PAs have
been implemented in a differential fashion. As such the virtual ground at the
common-source point of the transconductor devices minimizes the impact
of the lack of a low impedance ground. From a small-signal-gain point of
view, the use of differential circuitry essentially eliminates this problem.
However, from a large-signal point of view, the second-order harmonics of
the input signal still require a low impedance ground at the common-source
point (since they are essentially a common-mode signal rather than a differ-
ential signal, the common-source point is not a virtual ground to them). Sev-
eral techniques have been proposed in the literature to work around this
problem.
As mentioned earlier, the gain of a CMOS PA, especially at high frequen-
cies, could be quite limited. As such, for a given output power, the input of
such a PA would observe a larger signal swing as compared to a PA with a
high gain. The linearity of the PA can therefore be limited by the linearity of
its transconductance stage. In order to generate a large linear signal out of the
transmitter while maintaining reasonable power efficiency, a class AB pow-
er amplifier driver and power amplifier stages can be utilized (Fig. 4.7). The
transconductance of the class AB stages, however, need to be quite linear in
order to maintain the linearity required for 64-QAM OFDM modulation.
Further the transmitter stages need to have reasonable amount of gain. This
rules out source (inductive or resistive) degeneration as a possible solution.
4.3 POWER AMPLIFIER 151
I O+ IO−
Vbx M7 M8 Vbx
aux.
transconductance
stage
Vbias 2 = M5 M6
C4
Vbias 1–Vos
Vin −
C3
differential
input voltage Vbx Vbx
C2 M3 M4
Vin + main
transconductance
stage
C1 M1 M2
Vbias 1
Figure 4.7 Highly linear transconductor stage utilized in CMOS power amplifier for
WLAN.
Finally, it is desirable to allow for maximum voltage swing on the stage. A

pseudodifferential grounded differential amplifier (“main transconductance”
stage of Fig. 4.7) has minimal headroom requirements. However, as shown in
the plot of transconductance versus incoming voltage of Figure 4.8, such a
stage exhibits large variation in transconductance as a function of the incom-
ing voltage. By utilizing an additional grounded pseudodifferential amplifier
“auxiliary transconductance stage” operating with the same incoming AC
signal but shifted operating points implemented through AC-coupled stages
of Figure 4.7 (Behzad et al., 2004a), additional transconductance gm_sub of
Figure 4.8 can be generated. When these transconductances are added at the
drains of the differential pair transistor cascodes, a much more linear
transconductance curve (Gm_total of Fig. 4.8) would be generated. A signif-
icant reduction in transconductance variation has been achieved. This results
in significant HD3 and IM3 reduction, an increase in the 1-dB compression
point, and a higher linear maximum power operating point. The improvement
in HD3 or IM3 performance for this linearization scheme can be solved math-
ematically; however, the deviation is fairly algebraically involved and will
not be presented here. Several points are in order:
104.0m Gm_total
101.0m
98.00m
95.00m
92.0m
30.0m Gm_sub
20m
10m
0.0m
89.0m Gm_main
85.0m
81.0m
77.0m
73.0m
−500m −250m 0 250m 500m
Vin [V]
Figure 4.8 Plots of DC transconductance for main stage, auxiliary stage, and overall stage
(linearized).
앫 The technique can be easily applied to 2 to N stages. In this example, a

two-stage technique has been shown. Trade-offs can be made between
maximum peak-to-valley deviation of the transconductance, the “in-
band” ripple of the transconductance curve, and the linearized range
of the transconductance curve. Due to the complex shape of the over-
all transconductance curve, simple extrapolation concepts such as in-
tercept points no longer apply.
앫 The differential pairs described in this linearization technique operate
in the class AB mode with grounded sources. The operation in this
mode is quite different than linearization techniques operating in the
class A mode with a constant tail current source.
앫 Unlike many other linearization techniques, such as emitter degenera-
tion, this technique can achieve fairly large and linear transconduc-
tance levels simultaneously.
앫 For a given input voltage swing and a particular number of stages with
certain device sizes, an optimal offset voltage can be found which re-
sults in a very large improvement over an uncompensated Gm stage.
However, if properly designed, the scheme is tolerant of reasonable
4.4 FULLY INTEGRATED VCO 153
size device mismatches and resultant offsets and can result in several
decibels in linearity improvement even in the presence of 3-sigma de-
vice mismatches.
As will be seen shortly, the general technique is applicable to low frequency

applications also.
It should now be clear that traditional design techniques utilized in the de-
sign of SiGe and GaAs PAs need to be augmented with newer and more in-
novative techniques in order to obtain reasonable performance out of CMOS
PAs. These techniques may include various analog, digital, and mixed-mode
linearization techniques, dynamic bias boosting techniques, envelope track-
ing techniques, digital predistortion techniques, and even some of the most
exotic techniques such as LINC (linear amplification using nonlinear compo-
nents). Needless to say, CMOS PAs are a very active research area.
4.4 FULLY INTEGRATED VCO
In recent years, fully integrated VCOs with adequately high performance

for general radio needs have become commonplace. Similarly, all of today’s
commercial WLAN radios utilize integrated VCOs.
In a VCO, a resonant structure (typically an LC tank) sets the center fre-
quency of oscillation and a control voltage can then adjust the frequency of
operation by changing the tank resonance frequency. Due to parasitic losses
in the tank, an active circuit needs to provide gain and compensate the loss-
es in the tank in order to be able to sustain an oscillation. A cross-coupled
pair of active devices (CMOS or bipolar) can provide a negative resistance
through the use of positive feedback. This negative resistance acts to cancel
the positive resistance present in the tank due to the losses. As a result a sus-
tained oscillation condition is achieved.
Some fundamental equations govern the basic operation of most integrat-
ed LC-based oscillators. The center frequency is set by
1
␻0 = ᎏ
兹L
苶C苶
where ␻0 is the frequency of oscillation, L is the effective inductance of the

tank, and C is the effective capacitance of the tank. Note that all parasitic ca-
pacitances and inductances must be considered in applying the above equa-
tion. The effective parallel resistance (Rp) of the tank can be calculated by
RP = ␻0LQL
where QL is the Q of the inductor used in the tank. For a VCO whose bias
current (Itail) is set by a tail current source, the maximum voltage swing
(Vmax) is given by
Vmax ⬇ ItailRP
In order to ensure that oscillation starts, the active devices need to have
enough loop gain to compensate for the losses in the tank. Some margin is
also necessary here. A reasonable rule of thumb is to design the VCO such
that the large signal transconductance (Gm) satisfies the relation
3
Gm > ᎏ
RP
A very important characteristic of a VCO is its phase noise. Phase noise

is often specified in decibels relative to the carrier per hertz at a certain
frequency offset from the center frequency. Phase noise in oscillators has
been the subject of intense research for the past few decades and continues
to attract significant attention from researchers. The following relation
does a good job of relating phase noise to physical characteristics of the
VCO:
⌫2rmsin2 ␻
PN(⌬␻) = ᎏ
2I tailQ ⌬␻
2 2
ᎏ冢冣
where ⌬␻ represents the offset frequency of interest, ␻ is the center fre-
quency of the VCO, Itail is the tail current, Q is the Q of the tank, and ⌫rms is
the RMS value of the impulse sensitivity function for the VCO and is relat-
ed to how the timing of the injection of the noise affects the zero-crossing
point of the VCO and therefore its phase noise.
This equation shows that, in order to minimize phase noise, the voltage
swing of the VCO should be maximized. This requires a large tail current.
However, care must be taken to ensure low levels of noise on the bias lines.
The bias lines are often the source of degraded PN performance in a VCO. It
is common to heavily filter the tail current sources to ensure low levels of
noise on the bias lines.
At the same time, the noise added by the switching transistors near the
zero-crossing point is proportional to their transconductance. It is therefore
desirable to keep Gm just large enough to ensure oscillation startup. From
this point of view, a MOSFET device is desirable to a bipolar device since
the MOSFET has a smaller transconductance for a given current.
Unfortunately, however, as compared to a bipolar device, a MOSFET de-
4.4 FULLY INTEGRATED VCO 155
vice also has very large flicker noise. This flicker noise is typically uncon-
verted to the RF and causes significant degradation in close-in PN of the
VCO.
So to summarize, for low PN, a high Q tank (which usually requires large
area), large bias current (therefore high power consumption), and low bias
current noise are required. The bias current noise is required to be low at
baseband frequencies, the fundamental frequency of operation of the VCO,
as well as at the harmonics of the VCO frequency. This is because the noise
at these various harmonic frequencies can convert in frequency (due to the
nonlinear nature of the operation of the VCO) and show up at the fundamen-
tal frequency and degrade PN.
A fairly common topology used in the design of CMOS VCOs is shown
in Figure 4.9 (Bouras et al., 2003). Several interesting points can be made
about this VCO topology:
1. Two pairs of cross-coupled active devices are used to generate the re-
quired negative Gm: an NMOS pair and PMOS pair.
2. In theory, the use of these two pairs of devices creates more symmet-
ric rise and fall times. This symmetry helps reduce the up conversion
of flicker noise from baseband to the operating frequency of the VCO.
1
ωo =
LC
Rp = ωoLQL
capacitance
bank
Vmax ≈ ItailRP
nwell 3
Gm >
RP
2
vcontrol Γ2rmsin2 ω
PN(Δω) =
2I2tailQ2 Δω
Figure 4.9 Example of fully integrated CMOS VCO utilized in some WLAN radios. Some
common VCO design equations are also listed.
3. The use of the top and bottom pair of cross-coupled devices reduces
the swing of the output signal of the VCO. This may result in a higher
reliability design as the devices are not stressed beyond their “normal”
region of operation. However, at the same time, a reduced swing out-
put would degrade the PN performance of the VCO. Further this de-
sign requires a larger voltage headroom than some alternative designs.
Many applications require a wide tuning range out of the VCO in order
to accommodate tuning to a variety of channels. For example, in a world-
wide 802.11a implementation, the LO is required to tune from 4.9 to 5.9
GHz. Given the very low supply voltages available in modern process
technologies, this wide tuning range would require a very high gain VCO.
For example, if the compliance range of the charge pump is 1 V, a VCO
gain of 1 GHz/V would be required to cover the 802.11a band (in other
words a 1-␮V change on the control line would change a 1-kHz shift in
the center frequency of the VCO!). The control voltage of the VCO is one
of the most sensitive nodes of a transceiver, and this degree of sensitivity
would certainly create PN problems in the system (due to noise directly
coupling on the control line or through the supplies). It is therefore highly
desirable to reduce the gain of the VCO. One approach would be to intro-
duce banks of switched capacitors in the VCO that would allow discrete
step adjustments to the center frequency. With this scheme, the switched
capacitors can be used to place the VCO close to the desired frequency,
and the continuous-voltage-control line would then be controlled by the
PLL and adjust the varactor capacitance to lock the exact frequency. Often
automatic calibration schemes are used to find the required number of
switch capacitors to be turned on. The continuous control would have to
have enough range to be able to maintain a lock over the temperature
range of operation. Otherwise, periodic partial switched-capacitor calibra-
tions would be required to maintain a lock over temperature. Using this
scheme a Kvco of as low as 20 MHz can be used to cover the entire
802.11a band. Care must be exercised to ensure that the queue of the
switched-capacitor network is high in order to avoid dequeuing the tank.
This scheme has been deployed in the design of Figure 4.9 and is proba-
bly the most common scheme utilized in VCOs to enable wide tuning
range while maintaining good PN performance.
Alternatively, multiple VCOs can be utilized to cover wide bandwidths.
This approach often achieves a lower power consumption and better PN, at
the expense of a larger area. Yet as another alternative, switched-inductor
networks can be utilized in conjunction with the switched-capacitor net-
work. Care should be taken to ensure than the switches utilized with the in-
4.5 MULTIFREQUENCY (STACKED) MIXER 157
ductors do not dequeue the tank significantly as this will result in a degrad-
ed PN performance.
4.5 MULTIFREQUENCY (STACKED) MIXER
Another radio building block that is useful in designing certain type of trans-
ceivers is a stacked (multifrequency) mixer as shown in Figure 4.10 (Behzad
et al., 2003). This circuit provides two consecutive mixing operations in one
circuit block and can be useful in certain receivers, transmitters, as well as LO
generation circuitry. One example of the utilization of such a circuit will be
provided in the case study design of Chapter 6. In this application, an LO is to
be synthesized in a direct conversion transceiver. In order to avoid any
pulling issues, the VCO is operated at two-thirds the RF. Further a low fre-
quency correction signal, FAFC, is needed to correct for the crystal oscillator
frequency inaccuracies. The objective is to generate an LO signal at
Fl0 = Fafc + 1.5Fvco
Two consecutive mixing operations can clearly be performed with two

standard Gilbert-style mixers. However, by instead utilizing the circuit
RF out
VCO
(3.5G) Vdd
1/2
LO_I+ LO_I−
BB in
VCO+
VCO−
Mix5
Mix1 Mix2
1/2VCO_I+ 1/2VCO_Q+
1/2VCO_I− 1/2VCO_Q−
AFCI+ Gm1+VGA1 Gm2+VGA2 AFCQ+

AFCI− AFCQ−
Figure 4.10 Multifrequency stacked mixer implementation used in generating Frf = 1.5
Fvco + Fafc in LOGEN block of WLAN radio.
shown in Figure 4.10, one additional stage of current-to-voltage conver-

sion and then voltage-to-current conversion are eliminated. As a result, one
set of load inductors as well as one set of transconductors can be eliminat-
ed, resulting in a smaller die area, lower power consumption, and higher
linearity. In this application of this design, the baseband input voltages are
applied at the transconductor inputs (labeled Gm + VGA at the bottom of
the schematic). The signal is then converted to a current and applied to an
optional current-mode variable-gain block. The gain controlled output is
then passed through the first set of mixers (Mix 1, Mix 2) and unconvert-
ed to 0.5 times the VCO frequency. The output current is then further ap-
plied to mix 5 so that it can be mixed with the LO frequency of this mix-
er running at the VCO frequency. The overall unconverted current at 1.5
times the VCO frequency is converted into a voltage at the output of the
mixer. Signals at 1.5Fvco ± Fafc are therefore generated at the output of this
mixer.
The basic idea of a stacked mixer is also applicable to the design of su-
perheterodyne receivers and transmitters if no other signal processing (e.g.,
gain, filtering) is required at the intermediate stage.
It is important to note that the headroom constraints of this design have to
be carefully analyzed due to the existence of multiple stacked devices.
4.6 OPEN-LOOP TRANSCONDUCTANCE

LINEARIZATION CIRCUIT
Various techniques can be utilized to achieve high linearity in circuit build-

ing blocks. Feedback techniques provide many advantages but for certain
applications may not be the optimal solutions. For example, they may re-
quire a relatively large area to compensate the loop or they may consume
more power than an open-loop technique. Further, feedback techniques at
high frequencies are not as effective since obtaining high amounts of loop
gain at these frequencies is not possible. A generic open-loop transconduc-
tance linearization technique is demonstrated in Figure 4.11 (Behzad et al.,
2003). This general technique in slightly varied forms is applicable to re-
ceivers, transmitters (see, e.g., Fig. 4.7), and LO generation circuitry. In this
example the technique is applied to a LO generation path and will be dis-
cussed in some detail in Chapter 6. The objective is to generate a highly lin-
ear and reasonably large transconductance output from this block while con-
suming a minimal amount of supply headroom.
A pseudodifferential grounded differential amplifier (Gm_main stage of
Fig. 4.11) has minimal headroom requirements. However, as shown in the
plot of transconductance versus incoming voltage in Figure 4.11, such a
4.6 OPEN-LOOP TRANSCONDUCTANCE LINEARIZATION CIRCUIT 159
Gm_I+ Gm_I− Construction of Linearized Transconductance

: Gm_main
VGA 2.2 m
Gm_main [S]
AFC_I+ AFC_I−
Gm_main 700 μS
Gm1 1.9 m
: Gm3 : Gm4
Gm_overall [S] Gm_linearization [S]

1.9 m : Gm2 : Gm1
Gm2
Gm3
0.3 m
: Gm_out
Gm4 6.97 m
I_bias
38 μS
6.91 m
−400 m −200 m 0 200 m 400 m
Vin [V]
(a) (b)
Figure 4.11 (a) Highly linear open-loop transconductor linearization technique utilized in
LOGEN block of CMOS WLAN radio. (b) Obtained Gm for main stage, linearization stage,
and overall block.
stage exhibits large variation in transconductance as a function of the in-

coming voltage. In this example, a variation of 700 ␮S is observed over an
input signal voltage range of –400 to + 400 mV, with a peak transconduc-
tance of 2.2 mS. By utilizing a derivative of the technique introduced for
power amplifiers in Figure 4.7, additional grounded pseudodifferential am-
plifier stages Gm1 through Gm4 can be generated. Each stage operates with
the same incoming AC signal, but with a shifted operating point implement-
ed through DC IR drops (as shown in Fig. 4.11a), additional transconduc-
tances Gm1 through Gm4 of Figure 4.11b can be generated. These addition-
al transconductances have their peak transconductance placed at a different
input differential voltage. When all of these transconductances are added at
the drains of the differential pair transistors, the much more linear transcon-
ductance curve (Gm_overall) of Figure 4.11b would be generated. Now
over the same input voltage range, an overall variation of 38 ␮S is observed
with a peak transconductance of 6.97 mS. An overall transconductance vari-
ation of about 30% has been reduced to 0.5%. In this case, this reduction in
transconductance variation results in more than 20 dB improvement in HD3
performance. The improvement in HD3 performance for this linearization

scheme can be solved for mathematically; however, this is fairly alge-
braically involved and will not be presented here.
As described here, the technique is applied to a low frequency applica-
tion. However, as described earlier in the case of a CMOS PA, the gener-
al technique is quite applicable to very high frequency analog and RF cir-
cuits.
CHAPTER 5
Calibration Techniques
The radios and their internal blocks must be built with adequate calibration
and programming capabilities to allow them to adjust for optimum perfor-
mance. Autocalibration can be used to correct and control the radio perfor-
mance over temperature and process corners. Auto calibration can be used
to fix the bandwidth and center frequency of the filters by adjusting the RC
constant on the chip. Autocalibration can also help in calibrating and setting
the VCO frequency in the center of its compliance range to achieve higher
margins over process and temperature. In addition, autocalibration can be
used to adjust overall gain in the system. Figure 5.1 is a block diagram of a
robust radio with built-in autocalibration and programming capabilities
(Rofougaran et al., 2005). A more specific example of a radio that can be
calibrated for receive and transmit quadrature imbalances, transmit LOFT,
and receive DC offsets is seen in Figure 5.2 (Bouras et al., 2003). Some of
the details of this calibrated radio will be discussed shortly.
Depending on the type of autocalibration and the specific requirements of
the system, calibration can be done at the factory and stored in nonvolatile
memory. However, this adds to manufacturing cost and is not the preferred
method. Preferably, autocalibration can be performed at chip power-up and
periodically thereafter as necessary. Autocalibration may be self-contained
or require the assistance of the baseband DSP.
Many RF and analog blocks would have a calibration unit built in. In ad-
dition, many radio elements can be programmed and calibrated. Many of the
radio blocks may be monitored with small sensor blocks such as ADCs.
Each block’s performance could be measured and evaluated through an al-
gorithm, then tuned to achieve the block’s best performance. Some of the
calibration algorithms may need to be fast to calibrate within microseconds
on a packet-to-packet basis.
In addition to self-contained autocalibration, DSP-assisted calibration
can be performed through interfacing with the baseband. Both of these
methods would assist with the system’s adaptiveness and robustness. As-
sisted calibration can initially be used to set the radio to its optimum perfor-
mance by selecting the right bias current in the blocks and adjusting the on-
chip frequency tuning. DSP-assisted calibration can also improve the image
162 CHAPTER 5 CALIBRATION TECHNIQUES
Control
Automatic
Calibration Control and
Data Interface
I/Q Output
RF
Input
LO PLL
Generation Frac N
I/Q Input
RF Output
Figure 5.1 Block diagram of general radio with built-in autocalibration and programmabil-
ity to ensure high performance.
DAC
Calibration at power-up or between

+ ADC
frames
DAC Use loop-back paths
90° DAC
DAC
Digital correction:
+ ADC I/Q mismatch
LO leakage
Analog correction
DC offset
DAC Filter cutoff
DAC
90°
DAC
DAC
TRANSCEIVER CHIP DIGITAL BASEBAND CHIP/HOST
Figure 5.2 Example of 802.11a with quadrature and LOFT calibration capabilities (Bouras
et al., 2003).
5.1 VCO CALIBRATION 163
rejection on chip by measuring the I/Q channel imbalance and adjusting the
phase and amplitude on the I/Q signals. Another important use of program-
mability is its ability to adjust the radio blocks to their optimum perfor-
mance based on feedback from the processed radio data with a special algo-
rithm from the baseband. This adjustment can be very critical in obtaining a
functioning radio for harsh environments where interference, jamming, and
other noise can degrade radio performance. Although calibration will for the
most part be completed at the start of the communication, a few calibrations
also take place during the on-going communication and can improve system
performance by the radio “adapting” to its environment.
Autocalibration, whether DSP assisted or self-contained in the radio,
would allow the inherent tolerances required of the radio to be significantly
relaxed. This would result in much higher yields, which in turn would result
in lower cost. At the same time, autocalibration would allow for better per-
formance than available from the uncalibrated radio. The utilization of such
calibration algorithms is increasingly more important in future generation
radios.
Several calibration techniques will now be examined. The details of each
calibration technique can occupy a whole book chapter. However, we will
discuss some very briefly and others in some detail.
5.1 VCO CALIBRATION
As described earlier a low VCO gain (Kvco) is desirable in order to maintain

a good PN and high rejection of noise coupling on the VCO control line and
the supplies. In order to accommodate a low Kvco and at the same time be
able to cover a wide bandwidth, banks of switch capacitors need to be uti-
lized. In order for a proper operation, for a desired frequency band, the
proper switched capacitors are enabled such that the VCO control line is set
to about the midpoint of the charge pump compliance range (typically about
supply voltage Vdd/2) for the PLL to lock. The switch capacitor banks can
be linearly weighted or binary weighted. An example of VCO tuning curves
as a function of the VCO control voltage with the various switch capacitor
codes is given in Figure 5.3. This VCO tuning system is designed for a radio
that covers the lower U.S. 802.11a band. Clearly, in order to enable locking
across the entire worldwide 802.11a bands while maintaining the same
VCO gain, many more switched-capacitor banks would be required.
Due to process, temperature, and supply variations, it is not sufficient to
simply set the required switched-capacitor banks for a given channel based
on a simple look-up table. It is essential to use an autocalibration loop to en-
able proper operation over these parameters. Various algorithms can be uti-
5400
VCO Output Frequency [MHz]
5100
0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4
VCO Control Voltage [V]
Figure 5.3 VCO tuning curves covering lower U.S. 802.11a band. The calibration algo-
rithm selects the optimal curve such that the VCO can operate at a voltage around the middle
of the charge pump compliance range.
lized for autocalibrating the VCO switch capacitors. These include open-
loop calibration, closed-loop calibration, or a combination of the two. Each
scheme has its advantages and disadvantages (e.g., the calibration settling
time would vary depending on the type of calibration).
In a closed-loop calibration scheme, the PLL is programmed to the de-
sired channel and the PLL loop is engaged in the normal fashion. Then a bi-
nary or linear search algorithm is engaged which enables the various switch-
capacitor networks. After each setting, the control voltage of the VCO is
monitored. If the control voltage falls between a predetermined set of values
as determined by a pair of comparators, then the desired calibration value is
achieved. Otherwise, the next search step is enabled and the procedure is re-
peated until the algorithm is successful in finding the proper code for the
switch-capacitor network. A closed-loop calibration scheme is usually quite
accurate but would take a long time to converge since for every step the
PLL is required to settle.
Alternatively, an open loop calibration scheme can be used. In this
scheme, the PLL is disengaged, the PLL dividers are properly programmed
for the desired frequency channel, and the control voltage is forced to a de-
sired voltage (usually the midrange of the charge pump compliance volt-
age). Then, for predetermined reference divider cycles, the number of the
VCO divided output transitions is counted. The switched-capacitor code is
5.2 AUTOMATIC FREQUENCY CONTROL 165
changed via a linear or binary search algorithm until the desired count value
is achieved. The advantage of an open-loop calibration algorithm is that it is
quite fast since it does not have to wait for the PLL to settle after each code
change. However, it may not be as accurate as the closed-loop calibration.
Clearly, a combination open–closed loop calibration is possible that
would provide a compromise between calibration speed and accuracy.
5.2 AUTOMATIC FREQUENCY CONTROL
A receiver that has its final stage centered at DC would have to be able to re-
ject DC offsets which would result from self-mixing of the receive mixer or
receiver baseband mismatches. In order to accomplish this some form of a
high pass filter is often used.76 For example (Behzad et al., 2003), there are
three high pass filters distributed in the receive path. The poles of these high
pass filters cannot be too low in frequency as they would result in long tran-
sient settling during gain changes or TX-to-RX switching. On the other
hand, the poles cannot be placed too high in frequency as they will attenuate
the lowest OFDM subcarriers and cause significant group delay variation
and therefore cause a degradation in the system performance. In the ideal
case and during steady-state operation, the poles in the receiver described in
this example are placed at about 120 kHz. Figure 5.4a. shows an OFDM-
modulated signal with its 52 subcarriers and their payloads. The lowest sub-
carriers are at ±312 kHz, and the highest subcarriers are at ±8.125 MHz. In
the ideal case, as shown in Figure 5.4a, none of the subcarriers are attenuat-
ed by the filtering in the receive chain. However, since the standard requires
only a 20-PPM crystal, a total of 214 kHz of frequency offset (107 kHz RX
plus 107 kHz TX) can be present in the received spectrum relative to the lo-
cation of the baseband filter poles. This would result in the lowest frequency
subcarrier as well as possibly the highest subcarriers to get heavily attenuat-
76
Other alternatives also exist. For example, DC offset cancellation DACs can be employed
at various points along the receive chain. There are advantages and disadvantages to this
technique. One advantage is that an AFC circuit would not be necessary. Further, the inner
tones of the OFDM-modulated signal would not take a hit due to amplitude roll-off or group
delay variation. Another advantage of this scheme is that the receiver is capable of settling
quickly in response to any transient changes (e.g., gain change). On the other hand, after an
initial calibration and possibly periodic calibrations thereafter, the cancellation is performed
open loop and would need to track the gain settings accurately. Further, the offset cancella-
tion DACs will need to be designed to have low noise levels in order to avoid an SNR hit due
to these blocks. Finally, for a multistage DAC-based DC offset cancellation scheme requires
carefully developed algorithms to ensure that the proper offset levels are applied at the prop-
er points.
−8.125 −.312 .312 8.125 MHz
(a)
Ideal
Subcarriers
(b) with
Frequency payload
offset
Δf
(c)
Frequency
offset
+ fading
Fading HPF LPF
Figure 5.4 (a) Baseband spectrum of received and properly centered 802.11a signal. HPF
and LPF corners are shown. (b) Same spectrum after being subjected to ⌬f frequency offset.
(c) Spectrum of (b) additionally subjected to multipath fading.
ed by the receive filters (Fig. 5.4b). This can have a severe impact on the
EVM and PER of the received signal. The situation can be even worse in the
presence of a multipath channel (Fig. 5.4c). Under a multipath environment,
many of the subcarriers are heavily attenuated by the channel, and as a re-
sult the receiver has to rely on the none-attenuated subcarriers more heavily.
When these subcarriers are subject to the heavy receive filtering, overall
system performance could degrade quite severely.
Most receivers require an automatic frequency correction in order to cor-
rect for frequency offsets. However, the correction is typically done entirely
in the digital domain and will therefore not be able to avoid the filtering
problem described above. In the implementation described here, the system
corrects for the frequency offsets of the receiver and transmitter in the ana-
log domain and therefore eliminates the filtering of the desired OFDM sub-
carriers. The estimation of the frequency offset and the generation of the
correction baseband frequency, however, are done in the digital domain.
Therefore this operation takes place in both the analog and the digital do-
mains [hence the term mixed-mode automatic frequency control (AFC)].
The block diagram of the mixed-mode AFC system is shown in Figure
5.5. During the receive cycle, the received in-phase and quadrature-phase
signals are applied to the baseband ADC. A frequency estimation of the ef-
fective frequency offset (⌬f) is made (this estimation includes frequency
offsets from the transmitting source as well as that from the receiver itself).
20 MHz Xtal
Rx LO = 5.25 + Δf Rx I
ADC
Rx Q
Frequency
PLL/VCO Estimation
3.5 GHz
1/2 Δf
(a) 1.75 GHz + Δf
I
LPF DAC cos
AFC Q
LPF DAC sin
Tx LO = 5.25 + (Δf = 0)
Radio Chip BB Chip
TX RX
(b)
Δf
Figure 5.5 Block diagram of mixed-mode automatic frequency correction (AFC) loop uti-
lized in 802.11a system. The correction frequency ⌬f is only applied during RX mode.
Therefore the effective LO frequency is “hopping” (Behzad et al., 2003).
As a result, correction frequency signals sin(⌬f) and cos(⌬f) are generated

in the digital domain and passed on to high precision, low offset DACs.
These signals are then passed on to the radio chip where they are filtered.
The AFC I and Q signals are then applied to the first set of mixers in the LO
generation block. Assuming a VCO frequency of 3.5 GHz, the first mixer
would have an output image-rejected frequency of 1.75 GHz + ⌬f. This sig-
nal is then mixed with the VCO frequency in the second set of LO genera-
tion mixers, resulting in the output frequency of 5.25 GHz + ⌬f. In the trans-
mit mode, ⌬f is set to zero, and an output LO of 5.25 GHz would be
generated. The LO generation signal, therefore, is constantly switching back
and forth between the TX and the RX frequencies as shown in Figure 5.5b.
Also note than in order to reject the image of the AFC tone, the entire AFC
signal path is implemented in the complex form (I and Q). In summary, the
relations for the RX and TX LO outputs are
fLO_TX = 3–2 fvco fLO_RX = 3–2 fvco + ⌬fafc
The correction frequency ⌬f is no larger than 240 kHz.

It is important to note that in a 802.11a system the AFC correction must
occur on a per-packet basis and therefore needs to occur during the pream-
ble processing and needs to be quite fast. This fact along with potential spur
problems rules out a fractional synthesizer as an alternative solution. Fur-
thermore, unlike a cellular system in which the transmitter (a base station)
has excellent frequency accuracy, an 802.11 access point is subject to the
same frequency tolerance (20 PPM) as a client. Therefore, the receiver has
to correct for the frequency offsets of its own receiver and the transmitter.
Since the transmitter can change from packet to packet, a static frequency
correction similar to the one used in cell phones (using a VCXO) is not a
feasible solution for the 802.11 system.
The simplified block diagram of the LO generation mixer is shown in
Figure 5.6. The filtered AFC signals are applied to the transconductance
stages (Gm1 to Gm4) of the mixers. The resulting signals are gain con-
trolled through current-mode gain control blocks VGA1 to VGA4. The gain
control is placed after the transconductance stage so that the DC offsets of
the transconductance stage scale with gain control. The resulting signals are
unconverted with an LO of 0.5fvco and then further unconverted with an LO
of fvco, resulting in the desired 1.5fvco + ⌬f output frequency.
Ideally, at the output of the first set of mixers, a single tone at 0.5 fvco + ⌬f
would be present. However, in reality, due to the nonideal image rejection
of the mixers, an image tone would also be present at 0.5 fvco – ⌬f. Addition-
ally, due to the DC offsets at baseband, an LOFT term exactly at 0.5 fvco
would be present. Finally, due to the nonlinearities of the transconductance
+3Δf (HD3)
wanted
−Δf (image)
+2Δf (HD2)
Vdd Vdd
LOFT
LO_I LO_Q
f
1.5fVCO
fVCO Mix5 fVCO Mix6
0.5fVCO_I Mix1 Mix2 0.5fVCO_Q Mix3 Mix4
Gain control VGA1 VGA2 Gain control VGA3 VGA4
fAFC_I Gm1 Gm fAFC_Q Gm3 Gm4

Δf 2 Δf
Figure 5.6 Simplified block diagram of LO generation mixer utilized in mixed-mode AFC
loop.
stage, third- and possibly second-order harmonics of the AFC signal will be
present at 0.5 fvco + 3 ⌬f and 0.5 fvco + 2 ⌬f. All these spurs will be uncon-
verted to the final 5 GHz frequency by the second set of mixers (mix 5 and
mix 6). The challenge in the design of the LO generation mixer is to gener-
ate output signals large enough for the receive and transmit path mixers over
temperature and process variations, while maintaining these spurs to less
than 40 dB below the desired signal. The simplified schematic of the in-
phase side of the LO generation “stacked” mixers is shown and discussed in
Figure 4.10. A similar block generates the desired quadrature-phase output.
An AFC self-calibration mode is integrated in the system by which the
LOFT of the AFC block as well as the image term in the AFC block can be
automatically canceled at startup. In this calibration mode, a test AFC signal
is generated and applied to the receiver RF as well as the LO paths. The
down-converted signal is sampled by the ADCs and analyzed. The correc-
tion quadrature terms and DC terms are then applied to the AFC DACs in
order to obtain a pure AFC-shifted LO signal at the receiver mixer port.
It is important to note that a mixed-mode correction is most important in
the presence of large crystal frequency offsets. If high quality (low PPM
variation) crystals can be guaranteed in the system, the AFC block can be
eliminated with minimal performance penalty. Low PPM crystals are typi-
cally available at some additional cost. So the decision to utilize mixed-
mode AFC circuitry is a trade-off between bill-of-material cost, design
complexity, and desired performance levels. Note that the quality of the
crystal on both the receive side as well as the transmit side must be consid-
ered in making this decision.
The performance of the receiver in the presence of frequency offsets and
multipath distortion is examined in Figure 5.7. As shown in Figure 5.7a, due
to the effect of the severe multipath channel of 200 ns RMS delay, –2 dBc
multipath signal strength, and 180° of relative phase, the received spectrum
displays deep nulls. Also, the multipath channel results in an increase in the
error vector magnitude of the OFDM subcarriers that falls at the frequency
of the nulls. However, the more severe effect on the error vector spectrum is
due to the large 200-kHz frequency offset that is present on the received
baseband signal (relative to the location of the receive high pass filter poles)
which causes severe attenuation of the lowest frequency subcarriers. This
results in a very large increase in the EVM of the lowest frequency subcarri-
er (subcarrier –1). On average the EVM has increased from less than 5% to
over 24% for this subcarrier, and the peak EVM has increased to over 60%
for this subcarrier. This results in the outlier points in the constellation dia-
gram of Figure 5.8a. The average EVM in this case is –24.3 dBm, which is
not sufficient for good PER performance.
AFC Disabled AFC Enabled
170
A: Ch1 Spectrum A: Ch1 Spectrum
Span = 36 MHz Span = 36 MHz
A: Ch1 OFDM Err Vect Spectrum A: Ch1 OFDM Err Vect Spectrum
60% 60%
LinMag LinMag
6%/div 6%/div
0% 0%
Start: −26 carrier index Stop: +26 carrier Start: −26 carrier index Stop: +26 carrier
(a) (b)
Figure 5.7 Spectrum and EVM plots of 802.11a receiver in presence of multipath channel (200 ns rms delay, –2 dBc multipath
signal strength, 180° phase) as well as total LO frequency offsets of 240 kHz with AFC loop (a) disabled and (b) enabled.
AFC Disabled AFC Enabled
A: Ch1 OFDM Meas A: Ch1 OFDM Meas
(a) (b)
Figure 5.8 Constellation plots of same receiver (a) with and (b) without AFC enabled. With AFC enabled, the EVM has improved by more than 4
dB, enabling operation and low PER at 54 Mbps.
171
Now with the AFC enabled, as shown in Figure 5.7b, the impairments
due to the multipath channel are still present, but the effects of the frequen-
cy offset have been significantly reduced as apparent in the error vector
spectrum plot of Figure 5.7b. In this case most of the constellation diagram
outlier points have been eliminated, and even in the presence of a very se-
vere multipath channel, a receive EVM of –28.4 dB is achieved (Fig. 5.8b).
This EVM is more than sufficient for reliable 54-Mbps performance. It is
also important to note that while in the presence of relatively mild multipath
channels, the AFC would improve high data rate sensitivity level, but in the
case of a severe multipath channel (such as the example described here) and
without AFC, the receiver PER floor may be raised to a level at which high
data rate operation may not be possible at all.
5.3 QUADRATURE ERROR AND LOCAL OSCILLATOR

FEEDTHROUGH CALIBRATION
As discussed earlier, one of the main analog impairments impacting the per-
formance of high order modulation systems is quadrature imbalances on the
transmitter and the receiver. Traditionally, a designer would utilize good de-
sign and layout matching techniques to achieve good IQ imbalance. More
recently, some newer architectures have been proposed that inherently pos-
sess a higher tolerance to quadrature imbalances. At times, the systematic
mismatches are characterized in the lab, and a fixed correction is applied in
the digital domain in the form of pre- and/or postdistortion coefficients (us-
ing a scheme known as a Gramm–Schmidt orthogonalization method). The
problem with this approach is that it cannot account for process, voltage,
and temperature variations. Despite all these techniques, IQ imbalance re-
mained as one of the main system performance bottlenecks and production
yield issues. The most recent developments, however, enable the calibration
of IQ imbalances. Many methods have been proposed. Some utilize an en-
tirely analog approach. The most powerful and common techniques utilized
to combat IQ imbalances in WLAN systems, however, operate on a mixed-
mode (analog-and-digital) scheme.
One such mixed-mode scheme is utilized in the transceiver of Figure 5.2
(Bouras et al., 2003) based on an algorithm proposed by Cavers (1997). The
transmit quadrature error calibration mode is shown. An envelope detector
is utilized to measure the quadrature imbalance at some point after the quad-
rature up-conversion stage. Ideally, the envelope detector would generate a
tone at twice the frequency of the applied baseband tone at the output of the
envelope detector if an image is present (i.e., quadrature imbalance exists).
This information can then be utilized to “predistort” the digital baseband
5.3 QUADRATURE ERROR AND LOCAL OSCILLATOR FEEDTHROUGH CALIBRATION 173
signal to correct the IQ imbalance in the system (typically introduced by the

RF LO generation circuitry). In this implementation, the output of the enve-
lope detector is fed to the input of one of the receive signal path ADCs and
passed on to the digital PHY section for predistorting the transmit digital
data. These calibrations can be performed at system startup and periodically
thereafter as required.
Calibrating of the IQ imbalance in the digital domain by utilizing predis-
tortion is a very powerful technique for calibrating any reasonable amount
of transmit quadrature imbalance (although certain limitations should be
considered in the design of the calibration circuitry and the dynamic range
of the ADCs and DACs).
Once the transmitter quadrature errors are corrected for, the signal is
looped back as shown in Figure 5.9. The looped-back signal is down con-
verted through the receiver quadrature down converters, passed through the
baseband receive analog circuitry, and then sampled by the ADCs. The sig-
nal is then analyzed in the digital domain, and the proper postdistortion IQ
calibration coefficients are calculated and applied to the received signals
during normal operation. Figure 5.10 displays the constellation diagram of a
received (non-OFDM) QPSK signal before and after the quadrature correc-
tion is applied to the receiver. Note that no frequency locking has been ap-
plied to the demodulated signal (hence the “circular” constellation pattern).
For a perfect quadrature, a perfect circle centered at coordinates (0,0) should
be observed. As can be seen in this figure, in the presence of quadrature im-
balances, the constellation diagram has an oval shape and is not centered at
(0,0).
RF IC
A/D
I COMPUTE TX
I/Q
DIGITAL CHIP/HOST
Q MISMATCH
A/D
DET_OUT
D/A
I CALIBRATION
SEQUENCE
Q
D/A
Figure 5.9 Radio of Figure 5.2 shown in TX calibration mode (Bouras et al., 2003).
RF IC A/D
I COMPUTE I/Q diagram
0.5
DIGITAL CHIP/HOST
RX I/Q
Q MISMATCH Q
A/D
DET_OUT
I
0.0
D/A
I CALIBRATION
SEQUENCE −0.5
Q
−0.5 0.0 0.5
D/A
Before calibration
After calibration
Figure 5.10 Radio of Figure 5.2 shown in RX calibration mode. The received constellation
diagrams for a received QPSK signal before and after calibration are also shown (Bouras et
al., 2003).
It is important to note that most often the IQ imbalances in a radio are

caused by the LO generation circuitry. As such, the IQ imbalances are often
constant across the bandwidth of the received signal and a fixed pre- or
postdistortion phase and amplitude correction terms are sufficient to cali-
brate the system. If the IQ mismatches, however, are caused by the base-
band circuitry, a (baseband) frequency-dependent IQ calibration is likely to
be required. The estimation methodology outlined above, however, is still
applicable. Multiple test tones at different baseband frequencies, however,
would be required.
The same envelope detector used for estimating the IQ imbalances on the
transmitter can be utilized to measure the magnitude of the LOFT as well.
Ideally, the envelope detector output would show a tone at the frequency of
the applied baseband tone if LOFT is present in the transmitter output. Once
the magnitude of the LOFT is estimated, a calibration algorithm can cancel
the LOFT by applying the proper DC voltages or currents in the transmitter
baseband (digital or analog path). Implementing the LOFT compensation
entirely in the digital domain may seem attractive. However, such a scheme
can pose certain system level problems, especially if a significant amount of
gain control is required at the transmitter baseband.
Other schemes can also be utilized for the detection of the LOFT. For ex-
ample, the power detector which is typically integrated in the transmit chain
to monitor the transmitted output power of the transmitter can be used to es-
timate the power of the LOFT tone when no other signals are applied at the
transmitter input. A search algorithm can then be applied with the goal of
5.4 BIAS CURRENT CALIBRATION (R CALIBRATION) 175
reducing the power detected by the power detector. This scheme can be ap-
plied to applications where a relatively loose LOFT rejection is acceptable
in the system. The degree of LOFT rejection in this approach is typically
limited by the dynamic range of the power detector.
Because of the importance of this topic, we will consider a more detailed
implementation of a high performance transmitter with quadrature and
LOFT cancellation schemes as our second case study in Chapter 6. The im-
plementation presented in Chapter 6 has the additional advantage that the
LOFT cancellation can be maintained to a high degree even as the baseband
transmitter gain control is varied.
5.4 BIAS CURRENT CALIBRATIONS (R CALIBRATION)
Using certain reference voltage generation circuitry, such as bandgaps, rela-

tively constant voltages on the chip can be synthesized. These voltages have
little variation as a function of process, temperature, and supply voltage.
Typically, however, in order to generate a current, these voltages are present-
ed across a resistor to generate a bias current. Any current generated using this
scheme would inherently possess the process and temperature variations of
this resistor. Modern CMOS process technologies offer unsilicided polysilicon
resistors with reasonably low temperature coefficients (often P-type unsilicid-
ed polysilicon with a temperature coefficient of approximately 400 PPM).
However, the foundries typically specify a process variation of ±30%.77 This
would indicate that even if the reference voltage is perfect and has no varia-
tions over process, the generated bias current would have a variation of ±30%.
This is a very large variation and unacceptable for many applications.
One solution would be to reference the on-chip generated voltage on an a
tight-tolerance external (on-board) resistor to generate the desired bias cur-
rent. This scheme has the limitation that every such current would require a
separate pin and an external resistor. Alternatively, a calibration scheme can
be used where the generated current based on an on-chip resistor is com-
pared against the current generated with the same reference voltage but with
an external tight-tolerance resistor. The calibration algorithm can then at-
tempt to equalize the currents by switching in the proper fractional currents
or adjusting the on-chip resistors until the currents are equal. The obtained
calibration code can then be applied to all the current generation circuitry on
chip. Utilizing this scheme, bias currents with variations in the few percent
range can easily be generated.
77
Often the real 3-sigma variation is significantly smaller than this number, but the foundries
would not guarantee this!
This calibration technique works quite well for circuits in which the gen-
erated current is (inversely) linearly related to the value of the resistor such
as a bandgap and proportional to absolute temperature (PTAT) currents. At
times, bias currents may be needed in which the generated current is not lin-
early related to the value of the resistor. One common example is a MOS
Gm-based bias circuit, in which case the bias current is inversely related to
the MOSFET Gm. In this case the generated bias current is related to 1/R2. A
small variation in the value of R therefore can result in a large variation in
the bias current. The application of a calibration circuit to this case is even
more crucial that the previously discussed cases. However, it should be not-
ed that a small residual calibration error can result in fairly large bias current
error.
One important point is that if a constant voltage swing is desired from a
certain resistively loaded stage (e.g., on a high frequency divider), a calibrat-
ed current must not be used, assuming that the stage is utilizing the same type
of resistor as that used for generating the bias current. In such a block the vari-
ation of the resistor is canceled in the generation of the output voltage.
5.5 FILTER TIME-CONSTANT CALIBRATION

(RC CALIBRATION)
Many stages of filtering are often used in transceivers. For example, a base-
band receive filter is typically used in WLAN systems to reject any adjacent
channel interferers. In this case, if the filters are too narrow, the desired
channel would get prematurely cut off. This in turn would result in degraded
system performance due to the attenuation of the higher order OFDM sub-
carriers as well as group delay variation introduced close to the filter corner.
On the other hand, if the filters are too wide, sufficient rejection of the adja-
cent channel interferer may not be achieved. It is therefore important to be
able to achieve the proper filter bandwidths despite process and temperature
variations. The source of filter bandwidth variations in a filter is the varia-
tion of the resistors and capacitors used in the filter.78
Various filter time-constant calibration techniques have been proposed
and used. Most of these techniques rely on off-line calibration where the fil-
ter is calibrated at startup or periodic intervals when it is not in use. Further,
78
Resistors and capacitors are used to establish the poles and zeros in an “opamp-RC ”-based
filter. Alternatively, transconductances and capacitors are used to establish these poles and
filters in “gm-C ” type filters. Clearly the master blocks used for calibrating these blocks need
to be of the same kind of basic building blocks in order to achieve the desired results. We
specifically discuss an RC-based calibration approach. A similar gm-C based approach can
be used where appropriate.
5.6 OTHER CALIBRATIONS 177
most of these techniques rely on a replica (master) RC block that is calibrat-

ed. The filter (slave) block is built with the same type of resistors and capac-
itors as the master block. Once the master block is calibrated and the tuning
code is obtained, the same tuning code is applied to the slave (filter) block.
One such approach is to generate a master RC-based relaxation oscillator.
The number of cycles “counted” by this RC oscillator is then compared to a
certain number of clock cycles of a known high accuracy clock (typically
the crystal oscillator circuit which is available on most radios). Switched ca-
pacitors or switched resistors are then turned on or off in order to calibrate
the RC oscillator cycle counts against that of the crystal oscillator. The cali-
bration code is then achieved and applied to the slave (filter) block(s).
5.6 OTHER CALIBRATIONS
Various other calibration schemes can be utilized in a radio as necessary.

For example, many transmitters integrate a power detector at the final gain
stage output. This enables the system to be able to calibrate out gain varia-
tions over process, voltage, and temperature to maintain the desired output
power level. In particular, this is important for CMOS-based transmitters
which can have a significant amount of gain variation over temperature.
This is because not only the Q of the inductors is significantly degraded
over temperature, but also the transconductance of the CMOS devices takes
significant hit at hot temperatures.79 Of course, the accuracy of the power
level calibration is dependent on the accuracy of the integrated power detec-
tor. Integrated power detectors have their own sources of inaccuracies. Cer-
tain calibration techniques can be applied to correct for the inaccuracies of
the power detectors.
Another example of a block that can be utilized for automatic calibrations
on the radio is an integrated temperature sensor. Typically a relatively
coarse temperature measurement is sufficient to correct for many issues that
may arise over temperature. If a finer resolution temperature measurement
is required, a high accuracy temperature sensor would be required. The de-
sign of high accuracy temperature sensors can be challenging. A tempera-
ture sensor can be used, for example, to compensate for the variation of the
IQ compensation over temperature. As a further example, a temperature
sensor can also be used to determine when a VCO recalibration may be re-
quired.
79
For bipolar devices, the transconductance is inversely proportional to the absolute tempera-
ture. Therefore, by using a PTAT-based biasing, the transconductance of the bipolar device
can be kept constant over temperature.
CHAPTER 6
Case Studies
Now that we have discussed the 802.11 system requirements, understood

analog impairments that can impact the system performance, and looked at
various calibration techniques, it is time to look at two case studies. In the
first case study we will discuss a 802.11a radio implementation in some de-
tail (Behzad et al., 2003). In the second case study we will look at a high-
performance WLAN transmitter utilizing quadrature and LOFT calibration
algorithms (Lee et al., 2006). These case studies allow us to tie in the vari-
ous topics that have been discussed together and represent how these issues
are taken into account in the design of a transceiver.
6.1 CASE STUDY 1: A CMOS 802.11A TRANSCEIVER
6.1.1 Architecture and Circuit Implementation

At the time of design, the goal of this work was to achieve the lowest cost,
highest performance, and lowest power consumption radio for the 802.11a
standard. It was therefore decided to use a direct-conversion architecture
without requiring any external filters. To allow for low cost and future inte-
gration with DSP, a CMOS process was chosen. Furthermore, an integrated
PA was added to the transmitter to reduce the bill-of-materials cost. Finally,
extensive use of autocalibration schemes enhanced performance and in-
creased yield.
However, these choices result in a host of challenges that need to be dealt
with in the architectural implementation and/or the circuit design of the
blocks. For example, the choice of a direct-conversion architecture with an
integrated power amplifier requires the designer to deal with the following
issues:
앫 DC offsets which result from self-mixing of the receive mixer as well

as DC offsets which result from baseband block mismatches and the
high gain of the baseband stages. If these DC offsets are not properly
rejected, they will result in clipping of the subsequent stages.
180 CHAPTER 6 CASE STUDIES
앫 Flicker noise on the receive path can impair the SNR of the lowest in-
dex OFDM subcarriers.
앫 The receive baseband path can have potential oscillation problems due
to the fact that most of the receive path gain is implemented at a single
frequency (baseband).
앫 The transmit path can have potential oscillation problems since large
amounts of gain are required at the 5-GHz RF.
앫 LO pulling issues by the on-chip PA can cause system problems.
앫 LOFT issues on the transmitter have to be dealt with.
앫 The on-chip power amplifier is required to have a very high linearity
in order to be able to accommodate the large PARs present in the
OFDM signal.
Among the autocalibration schemes that are incorporated in this radio, the
AFC is the most challenging to implement (the AFC was discussed in some
detail in Chapter 5).
The simplified radio architecture is shown in Figure 6.1. The transceiver
consists of a receiver (RX), a transmitter (TX), a frequency synthesizer, a
high-speed custom JTAG digital control block, and calibration blocks for
bias currents (Ibias) and RC time constants. A fully differential signal path is
Sensors out
RSSI’s out
Balun RX Baseband
RX_I out
RX_Q out
JTAG 4 wires JTAG

SW
XO Crystal
LO Generation PLL
Clock out
AFC_I in
Optional AFC
AFC_Q in
BPF
TX_I in
Balun + TX Baseband
TX_Q in
RC & R
calibration
Figure 6.1 Simplified high level block diagram of transceiver of Case Study 1 (Behzad et
al., 2003).
6.1 CASE STUDY 1: A CMOS 802.11a TRANSCEIVER 181
used throughout the transceiver to reduce LOFT, LO leakage, and common-

mode noise. The Ibias calibration block uses an external 1% resistor to gener-
ate a code for various bandgap circuits, resulting in biasing independent of
on-chip resistance variations. The RC time constant calibration circuit uses
an RC-based oscillator with a reference provided by the crystal oscillator to
generate a 5-bit time constant code for the on-chip filters. RC calibration is
performed at startup only since the variation of the resistors and capacitors
utilized here with temperature is small. An integrated temperature sensor al-
lows the DSP to make optimal system level adjustments as a function of
temperature. The JTAG block controls all of the radio functions, including
receive and transmit gain controls.
The transceiver, as shown, along with a companion baseband PHY/MAC
chip, two external baluns, an optional bandpass filter (BPF), and a transmit-
receive (TR) and/or diversity switch constitutes a full 802.11a system. We
will now discuss each building block in more detail.
6.1.2 Receiver
The receiver is shown in detail in Figure 6.2. The RF signal is amplified
first by an on-chip tuned LNA and then down converted to baseband by two
quadrature mixers. The output of the mixers is fed into the first high pass
variable-gain amplifier (HPVGA). The output of the first HPVGA is fed
into a fifth-order Chebyshev low pass filter (LPF) for channel selection. The
output of the LPF is then fed to second and third HPVGAs. The outputs of
the last HPVGA are passed on to ADCs on the baseband chip. The entire
signal path is differential but is shown as single ended after the LNA for the
sake of simplicity. The receiver front end includes on-chip matching for the
5-GHz input. A high gain, low noise, high linearity, and gain controllable
RSSI RSSIw out

RSSI RSSIn out
HP LPF HP HP RX_I out

RF In
LNA
(Diff)
HP LPF HP HP RX_Q out
15/27 0/21 0/6 0/21 0/18 dB
Figure 6.2 Simplified block diagram of receiver of Case Study 1. All signal path circuits
are implemented in a fully differential topology (single ended shown to simplify diagram).
front end allows for optimal system trade-offs between sensitivity and lin-
earity. The RX gain is carefully distributed before and after mixers to mini-
mize the 1/f noise contribution to the overall system NF. Three stages of
HPVGAs are incorporated throughout the baseband signal path and provide
both high gain and DC offset rejection. These HPVGAs are programmable
in 3-dB-gain steps from 0 to 21 dB (0 to 18 dB for the last HPVGA). Since
the preamble duration is 16 ␮s, the DC offset cancellation has to be very
fast, and at the same time, it must not attenuate the lowest subcarriers of the
signal. Therefore the HPVGAs are designed to accommodate dynamic DC
offsets which result from gain changes. A fifth-order Chebyshev LPF is in-
tegrated between the first and second HPVGAs that acts to reject any CW or
modulated interferers. The LPF is automatically calibrated within ±2% tol-
erance to ensure precise channel selection. Dual receive signal strength indi-
cators (RSSIs) are integrated before and after the LPF. These RSSIs allow
for the system to determine whether a received signal strength is dominated
by an out-of-band interference signal or by an in-band desired signal. For
example, if the second RSSI output voltage is smaller than the first, this will
be an indication that the large incoming signal is due to an out-of-band in-
terference. Based on this determination, optimal front-end gain can be set
for the proper trade-off between sensitivity and linearity.
The receiver NF and gain (as measured with a noise head) as a function
of the baseband frequency are shown in Figure 6.3a. Note that the x axis is
in the logarithmic scale. An average NF of better than 4 dB in the receive
12 100 −60
−65
10 96 8.9dB
−70
Rx Sensitivity [dBm]
Spec (σ = 0.4dB)
−75
Gain (dB)
8 92
NF (dB)
−80
6 88 Measurement
−85
11.7dB (σ = 0.3dB)
−90
4 84
−95
2 80 −100
0.1 1 10 0 20 40 60
BB Frequency [MHz] Data Rate [Mbps]
(a) (b)
Figure 6.3 Measured receiver gain and NF versus frequency (a) and sensitivity versus data
rate (b).
path is achieved. It is also important to note that the NF at the frequency of

the lowest frequency subcarriers are maintained to better than 5.5 dB, allow-
ing for these subcarriers to maintain high SNR. The overall receiver transfer
function with both high pass and low pass characteristics is apparent in the
gain plot of Figure 6.3a. The receiver sensitivity is shown in Figure 6.3b
along with the 802.11a requirement as a reference. For the lowest data rate
of 6 Mbps, a typical sensitivity of –93.7 dBm and a standard deviation of
0.3 dB are achieved. At the highest data rate of 54 MBps, a typical sensitiv-
ity of –73.9 dBm and a standard deviation of 0.4 dB are achieved. All sensi-
tivity measurements are obtained with the actual baseband companion chip
to this RF transceiver operating with a hard Viterbi decoder. A soft Viterbi
decoder in the digital baseband can offer several decibels of improvement in
the sensitivity of the system at the higher data rates.
6.1.3 Transmitter
The transmitter block diagram is shown in Figure 6.4. Like the receiver, the
transmitter is based on a direct-conversion architecture and is fully integrat-
ed on-chip. It incorporates third-order Butterworth LPFs which receive the
signals from the baseband I and Q DACs. The outputs of the LPFs are then
applied to baseband VGAs. The signals are directly up converted to the RF
and combined before a RF VGA. The signal is then amplified by a power
amplifier driver (PAD) and applied to a high linearity, high power integrat-
ed class AB power amplifier. On-chip matching is provided for the PA. The
transmitter incorporates baseband and RF gain control for optimum trade-
off between linearity, noise, LOFT, IQ balance, and power consumption. A
gain control of 33 dB is provided at the baseband, 3 dB at the mixer, and 35
dB at the RF amplifiers. Some gain control is needed to compensate for
power variations resulting from changes in process, temperature, and power
supply. The gain control is also used to allow for transmit power control for
LPF TX_I in
Pwr Detect
RF Out (Diff) +
LPF TX_Q in
−9/26 −3/0 −27/0 0/6 dB
Figure 6.4 Simplified block diagram of transmitter of Case Study 1. All signal path circuits
are implemented in a fully differential topology (single ended shown to simplify diagram).
the future versions of the 802.11a standard. An integrated power detector al-
lows for the DSP to set a constant output level in the presence of process,
temperature, or supply variations. A scheme for the cancellation of the
LOFT is also integrated in the transmitter. This scheme utilizes DACs at the
mixer transconductance stage to cancel out the LOFT at RF. A transconduc-
tance linearization technique similar to that discussed in Chapter 4 is uti-
lized in the PA driver and the PA of this transmitter. The transmitter shown
in Figure 6.2 achieves a 1-dB compression point of +19 dBm and a saturat-
ed output power of +23 dBm.
The measured transmit output power versus the data rate is shown in
Figure 6.5. At the highest data rates associated with QAM-64 modulation, the
maximum transmit power is limited to 12.8 dBm by the required EVM and
the high PAR of the OFDM signal. Under these conditions, the integrated PA
consumes 63 mA from 3.3 V and has an efficiency of 9.2%. As the data rate
is reduced and the modulation is switched to QAM-16, the maximum trans-
mit output power is limited equally by both the EVM requirements and the
spectral mask requirements of the standard. For example, at 36 Mbps, a max-
imum transmit power of 18.7 dBm is achieved. In this case, the integrated PA
consumes 77 mA from 3.3 V and has an efficiency of 32.9%. As the data rate
is further reduced, the maximum transmit power can no longer be increased
and is still limited by the spectral mask requirements. It is interesting to note
that if the spectral mask requirements were to be ignored, at the lowest data
rates, a maximum transmit power equal to the saturated output power of the
24
saturated power
Average OFDM Output Power [dBm]
limited
22 EVM
limited
20
spectral mask limited
18
16
14
12
10
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Data Rate [Mbps]
Figure 6.5 Average OFDM TX output power as function of data rate. Note that at the low-
er rates the maximum TX power is limited by the required EVM, whereas at the higher rates
the TX power is limited by the spectral mask requirements of the standard.
transmitter (+23 dBm) could be achieved while still satisfying the EVM re-
quirements of the standard. It is also important to note that what is shown on
the y axis is the average transmit power and, that during statistical peak ex-
cursions of the OFDM signal, output power levels significantly higher than
the average level (at times equal to the saturated power) are observed.
Figure 6.6a displays the measured transmitter output spectrum while
transmitting a +12.8-dBm, 54-Mbps, QAM-64 modulated signal. In this
case the maximum transmit power is limited by EVM requirements. In ap-
plications in which a higher 54-Mbps transmit power is required, an exter-
nal PA can be used and the internal gain of this chip can be backed off to ac-
count for the gain of the external PA and the desired output power. Figure
6.6b, on the other hand, displays a +18.7-dBm, 36-Mbps, QAM-16 signal.
In this case the maximum transmit power is equally limited by the EVM re-
quirements as well as the spectral mask requirements.
The measured constellation diagram of a QAM-64, 54-Mbps, +6-dBm
transmitted signal with an EVM of –33 dB is shown in Figure 6.7. Recall that
the 802.11a standard requires an EVM of –25 dB, and therefore 8 dB of mar-
gin is present here. That the constellation points fall within a small radius
around the center of the crossing points of the constellation circles is an indi-
cation of the high quality of the transmitted signal. This is an indication that all
transmit signal impairments, including phase noise, thermal noise, nonlinear-
ity, phase and amplitude imbalance, and group delay, are maintained to very
tight tolerances. Note that the two darker constellation points on the real axis
are from the pilot tones, which are always transmitted with BPSK modulation.
RBW 100 kHz RF Att RBW 100 kHz RF Att

20dB Ref Lvl VBW 30 kHz 20dB Ref Lvl VBW 30 kHz
10 dBm SWT 84 ms Unit dBm 10 dBm SWT 84 ms Unit dBm
10 10
0 0
−10 −10
−20 −20
−30 −30
−40 −40
−50 −50
−60 −60
−70 −70
−80 −80
−90 −90
Center 5.28 GHz 0 MHz/ Span 100 MHz Center 5.28 GHz 0 MHz/ Span 100 MHz
(a) 12.8 dBm, 54 Mbps, QAM64 (b) 18.7 dBm, 36 Mbps, QAM16
Figure 6.6 Measured output power spectrum: (a) EVM limited; (b) EVM and spectral
mask limited.
Figure 6.7 Measured constellation diagram at TX output (EVM = –33 dB, QAM64, 54
Mbps, +6 dBm).
6.1.4 Phase-Locked Loop

An external 20-MHz crystal is used with an on-chip oscillator as a reference
for the integer-N PLL with programmable loop bandwidth (Figure 6.8).
Various PLL-related issues typically impair the operation of a direct-
conversion transceiver. These impairments include pulling effects by the
on-chip PA, large in-band LO leakage, and large DC offsets as a result of
LO self-mixing. In order to reduce these impairments, a “fractional VCO” is
used in which the desired RF is 1.5 times higher than the VCO frequency
(Darabi et al., 2001). Furthermore, in order to reduce negative effects due to
the crystal tolerance, a mixed-mode AFC design is used.
The measured phase noise of the system is shown in Figure 6.9. An in-
band phase noise of –100 dBc/Hz at an offset frequency of 30 kHz and with
Crystal
PLL XO Clock out
1/2
3rd-LPF AFC_I in
3rd-LPF AFC_Q in
Figure 6.8 Simplified block diagram of PLL of Case Study 1. All signal path circuits are
implemented in a fully differential topology (single ended shown to simplify diagram).
Residual PM = 0.0075 rad = 0.43 deg ToFrom 1 kHz

305.8116kHz
dBc/Hz PHASE NOISE REFERENCE
−70
−80
Target Specifications
−90
−100
−110
−120
−130
−140
−150
−160
1.0 k 10.0 k 100.0 k 1.0 M 10 M 100 M
Figure 6.9 Measured phase noise of PLL of Case Study 1 at 5240 MHz. The two curves
correspond to results based on two differently programmed loop filter bandwidths.
a carrier frequency of 5.24 GHz is achieved. The reference spurs are main-
tained to very low levels. The target specification over the bandwidth of one
subcarrier is indicated by the solid line in Figure 6.9. The integrated phase
modulation within the bandwidth of one subcarrier is a very important fac-
tor in the performance of an OFDM system and in this case is maintained to
less than 0.45°. Also specified in the plot are the target spot specifications at
8 and 50 MHz which determine the interchannel interference performance
of the system. Also shown is the capability of the PLL to adjust the loop
bandwidth using JTAG programming. The loop bandwidth has greater than
an octave of tuning range (not shown in Fig. 6.9).
The RF transceiver has been integrated in a 0.18-␮m digital CMOS
process, with a single polysilicon and five metal layers. It occupies a
total area of 11.7 mm2 including the padring. The chip is housed in a
LPCC-48 pin package with an exposed paddle to provide good grounding.
The die photo of the transceiver is shown in Figure 6.10. The chip con-
sumes 150 mW of power in the receive mode and 380 mW of power in the
transmit mode while transmitting a 15-dBm OFDM signal. The entire chip
operates with a 1.8-V supply, except for the power amplifier, which oper-
ates with a 3.3-V supply. The chip passes 2.5-kV ESD testing using the
human body model. The performance of the transceiver is summarized in
Table 6.1. All system level measurements are referred to the chip inputs
and outputs.
PLL/AFC
TX
Figure 6.10 Die photo of transciever of Case Study 1.
In summary, at the time of publication of the original work (Behzad et

al., 2003), this integrated circuit (IC) represented the highest performance,
highest integration, smallest size, and lowest power consumption 802.11a
transceiver. This chip along with the companion single-chip PHY/MAC
constitutes a full 802.11a system. The transceiver achieves a 4-dB receive
Table 6.1 Summary of Performance Characteristics of Transceiver of Case Study 1

Measured (This Work) Unit
Frequency band 5.15–5.35 GHz
RX NF 4 dB
RX sensitivity (6 Mbps) –93.7 ± 0.9 dBm
RX sensitivity (54 Mbps) –73.9 ± 1.2 dBm
RX IIP3 –4.8 dBm
RX IIP2 >30 dBm
RX gain range 15–93 dB
TX power range –30 to +18.7 dBm
TX Psat +23 dBm
TX P1dB +19 dBm
Vdd 1.8 V
Vdd PA 3.3 V
Phase noise at 30 kHz –100 dBc/Hz
RX power consumption 150 mW
TX power consumption 380 (15 dBm OFDM output) mW
ESD >±2.5 on all pins kV
Technology 0.18 ␮m 1P5M CMOS —
Die size 11.7 (including padring) mm2
6.2 CASE STUDY 2: HIGH PERFORMANCE WLAN TRANSMITTER 189
NF and a +23-dBm transmitter saturated output power. It achieves low cost

through the use of a direct-conversion architecture in digital CMOS. Vari-
ous integrated self-contained or system level calibration capabilities allow
for high performance and high yield.
6.2 CASE STUDY 2: HIGH PERFORMANCE WLAN

TRANSMITTER UTILIZING QUADRATURE AND
LOFT CALIBRATION
Some of the requirements of the next generation WLAN transmitters are

low transmit EVM, a low LOFT, a small I/Q imbalance, a wide gain control
range, and preferably a minimum number of real-time calibrations. This
case study presents a highly linear transmit mixer incorporating a wide gain
control range and a one-time LOFT and I/Q imbalance cancellation scheme
(Lee et al., 2006). First, the system architecture with the peak detector will
be presented. Second, the proposed gain-controllable transconductor will be
introduced. Third, the two types of LOFT and the calibration methodology
to remove them as well as I/Q imbalance will be discussed. Lastly, the ex-
perimental results will be presented. Previously published methods for IQ
and LOFT calibration require recalibration as a function of transmitter base-
band gain control and do not distinguish between the two mechanisms of
LOFT generation. Further, depending on the method of LOFT compensa-
tion, recalibration of the IQ imbalance may be required, which is highly un-
desirable.
Figure 6.11 shows a simplified block diagram of a direct-conversion
transmitter. Each in-phase (I) and quadrature-phase (Q) baseband signal
(FBB) is up converted by its respective mixers. The high frequency envelope
detector is driven by the PA driver output and generates a filtered and am-
plified baseband ripple with spectral components at FBB due to LOFT and at
2FBB due to I/Q imbalance (see Fig. 6.13 below). The idea for using an en-
velope detector to detect LOFT and IQ imbalance was proposed by Cavers
(1997). Shown in Figure 6.11 is also the envelope detector along with the
(simplified) required circuitry to amplify the detected envelope, reject the
DC content, and level shift the signal to the desired common-mode level of
the ADC. A wide gain control range is utilized to accommodate a wide
range of possible LOFT and IQ imbalance.
In order to maximize the signal-to-offset ratio and therefore minimize
LOFT in decibels relative to the carrier, it is essential to keep the baseband
signal as large as possible throughout the baseband chain and any baseband
gain control must be performed as close as possible to the mixer quad. A
large signal in turn requires a high linearity transconductance stage for the
LOI
To ext PA or
Antenna
BB_I DAC LPF Gm
Transconductance
Stage I
BB_Q DAC LPF Gm RFPGA PAD
Transconductance
Stage Q
LOQ
CM
REFERENCE
OUT VARIABLE
GAIN
ENVELOPE
DETECTOR
R1 +
500 KHz RC LPF
HIGH PASS
FILTER
R2
Figure 6.11 Transmitter architecture of Case Study 2.
transmitter mixer. The core of the transconductance stage is shown in Fig-

ure 6.12. The structure is similar to that proposed by Mehr et al. (1997) ex-
cept that in this implementation folding is used to reduce headroom require-
ments. The input pair M1 and M2 is put in feedback to linearize the
effective transconductance. The signal currents flow through M3 and M4
and are mirrored to M5 and M6. The effective transconductance of the cir-
cuit is 1/R1 (R9/R7) under high levels of degeneration. The degeneration re-
sistors R3 to R12 reduce the circuit offsets. Note that R1 and R2 are not
used as part of gain control. When R1 and R2 are changed, the overall ratio
of the signal to offsets will change since the offset contribution of all the de-
vices in the signal path following R1 and R2 will remain constant whereas
all offsets prior to R1 and R2 will scale by the change in the gain.
The circled devices in Figure 6.12 constitute the proposed gain control
scheme. The gates of both the shunt device, M7, and the cascode devices,
M5 and M6, are tied together. To a first order, the current gain will be given
by the ratio of their widths and lengths (W/Ls). Therefore, the gain control
scheme is independent of process, voltage, and temperature variation and
possessed a high linearity (Bult et al., 1992). A variable gain is implemented
by using multiple shunt devices.
RF_LOFT_IP RF_LOFT_IN
To a Gilbert cell mixer
VDD Quad
R3 R4 R5 R6
VCASC
M5 1/gm5,6 1/gm5,6 M6
Gain
iout Control
M1 M2 M7
ip in
1/gds7
R1 R2 BB_LOFT_IP iin BB_LOFT_IN
M5 M3 M4 M6
R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R12
GND
Figure 6.12 Simplified schematic of linearized transconductance stage used in up-conver-

sion mixer of Case Study 2.
Two types of LOFT exist in a direct-conversion up-converter mixer. The

first type, baseband LOFT (BB_LOFT), originates from the device offsets
in the DAC, LPF, the transconductance stage, and any other baseband cir-
cuits in the signal path. The offsets will mix with the LO and generate an
LO component at the output of the mixer. The second type, RF_LOFT, is a
direct-coupling component either through parasitic capacitance or mutual
inductance, which becomes more severe with tighter die area. The two types
of offsets require a dual-cancellation scheme to cancel both components at
their sources. Shown in Figure 6.12 are the two sets of currents that remove
LOFT by introducing an artificial offset. BB_LOFT_IP and BB_LOFT_IN
cancel all the offsets prior to the gain control stage. Note that the baseband
gain control is also done at these nodes and will scale the cancellation cur-
rent by the same factor, maintaining proper cancellation current without the
need for a recalibration. Also note that the devices M5 and M6 are after the
gain control shunt devices and could contribute a BB_LOFT at very high at-
tenuation settings. In practice, these devices can be made sufficiently large
to have minimal offsets. A second set of correction currents, RF_LOFT_IP
and RF_LOFT_IN, are at the drain nodes of M5 and M6. The injection is
done immediately before the switching quads of the mixer but after the gain
control shunt devices so that the cancellation currents will not be affected by
Transmitter output Envelope detector output
192
Inject I/Q sinusoidal signals at BB
Detector measures the strength of LOFT and I/Q
imbalance by looking at the ripple’s spectrum
FIM= FLO−FBB FLO FBB+FLO 0 FBB 2*FBB
Set BB gain to minimum

Attenuates offset-related LOFT
FIM FLO FBB+FLO 0 FBB 2*FBB
Cancel LOFT using RF IDACs

Direct-coupled RF LOFT is removed
Set BB gain to maximum

Best visibility into BB offset-related LOFT
Cancel LOFT using BB IDACs

All LOFT components are removed at their sources;
Gain control without re-calibration is possible
Cancel I/Q Imbalance by adjusting the

sinusoids’ phase and amplitude
Store the phase and amplitude information
Figure 6.13 LOFT calibration algorithm used in transmitter of Case Study 2.

the gain change. Each set of correction currents are binary-weighted current
DACs (IDAC).
A straightforward algorithm can be devised to separate the two LOFT
components and remove LOFT as well as I/Q imbalance. Figure 6.13 shows
a flow chart of the proposed algorithm. First, a set of I and Q sinusoid is in-
jected at the baseband. Spectral analysis of the detector’s output will reveal
the magnitude of the LOFT (FLO) and I/Q imbalance (FIM). Second, the gain
is set to minimum to significantly attenuate the baseband offsets. The re-
maining LOFT will be from RF. Third, the RF_LOFT is canceled using the
RF IDAC. The digital engine could sweep through the proper IDAC codes
until the FBB component is minimized. Fourth, with the RF_LOFT can-
celed, the gain is changed to maximum. This will allow the good visibility
in the event that the BB_LOFT is small. Fifth, the remaining BB_LOFT can
be canceled using the BB IDAC. Note that the maximum amount of LOFT
suppression will depend on the resolution of both IDACs and the achievable
amount of suppression of the BB_LOFT in step 2. Lastly, keeping the gain
52.13dB
Figure 6.14 Two-tone linearity test for transmitter of Case Study 2.

Before Calibration After Calibration
194
16.4dB
Gain=max 45.3dB
34dB 49.6dB
Gain=min
28.3dB 32.4dB
>46dB
Figure 6.15 Spectrum plots of transmitter of Case Study 2 shown before and after LOFT and IQ balance calibration.
at maximum, 2FBB components can be removed by adjusting the baseband

signal’s phase and amplitude to correct the I/Q imbalance. The phase and
amplitude information can then be used to predistort the modulated signal in
the DSP.
This chip has been fabricated in a 0.18-␮m CMOS process and is in use
in a multiband WLAN transceiver. Figure 6.14 shows the two-tone test re-
sult of the transmitter. To allow maximum visibility into the linearity of the
transconductance stage, the transconductance stage was set to minimum
gain and the following RF drivers were set to maximum gain. The small sig-
nal going into the mixer quads and the RF drivers will keep the RF stages
from being the limiting components. The two-tone inputs, running at the
maximum swing level of the DAC (1 Vpp) at 5 and 6 MHz, generate third-
order intermodulation components that are more than 51 dBc down from the
signal tones.
Figure 6.15 show the plots of transmitter output before and after the pro-
posed calibration at maximum and minimum gain settings. Gain steps are
Figure 6.16 Constellation diagram of entire TX chain of Case Study 2 after calibration. Out-
put frequency is at 5.24 GHz: P0 = –5 dBm, EVM <–40 dB (limited partially by lab baseband
signal generator).
G-Band Mixer A-Band Mixer
Dual-band Variable Gain

Transconductance
Figure 6.17 Chip microphotograph of dual-band mixer of Case Study 2.
2.5 dB and with a 17.5-dB range. The I and Q CW tones were applied at 1
MHz with the LO running at 5.24 GHz. The postcalibration LOFT is better
than 32 dBc and image rejection is better than 46 dBc for all gain settings.
After calibration, the residual LOFT varies slightly for different gain set-
tings, indicating that the residual is a combination of both BB_LOFT and
RF_LOFT and can be further suppressed by having a finer resolution
IDACs or by using the baseband signal path DACs. The transmitter as a
whole is capable of producing an output EVM of <–40 dB in the A band
(Fig. 6.16) and <–41 dB in the G band. The actual EVM of the chip is some-
what better than shown in Figure 6.16, and is affected by the performance of
the laboratory baseband signal generators used for this measurement.
This case study has presented a highly linear transconductance stage that
incorporates gain-independent cancellation of LOFT and I/Q imbalance.
The achievable performance of the scheme is limited to the resolution of the
IDACs and the amount of calibration time available at the startup of the cir-
cuit. Results indicate that no other calibration other than at startup is neces-
sary to maintain sufficient performance. The dual-band variable-gain
transconductor block along with the LOFT and IQ imbalance detection cir-
cuitry occupies less than 0.1 mm2 of die area. The chip microphotograph is
shown in Figure 6.17.
CHAPTER 7
Brief Discussion of 802.11n
and Concluding Remarks
In this chapter, we will briefly review some of the highlights of the topics
discussed in previous chapters, and how they relate to the latest 802.11 of-
fering, the 802.11n. A specific 802.11n transceiver case study will be pre-
sented. We will then state some concluding remarks.
7.1 NEED FOR 802.11n
The IEEE 802.11a and g WLAN protocols provide communications data up

to 54 Mbps using a 20-MHz channel bandwidth in the 2.4- and 5-GHz ISM
and UNII bands, respectively. The rapid adoption of these systems in the past
few years resulting from advancements in transceiver design and integration
has led to a demand for more robust wireless links as well as higher data rates.
These demands can be met by the adoption of MIMO techniques, the use of
wider band channels, utilization of higher order constellations, and/or the use
of lower coding rates for the modulation. The emerging 802.11n standard will
adopt some or all of these techniques to provide a robust and high data rate
wireless link. Such a standard would therefore need to utilize a high perfor-
mance transceiver. In order to keep the cost down, the transceiver would need
to be highly integrated and preferably implemented in CMOS technology.
As discussed in Section 1.7, multipath fading has traditionally been a
fundamental barrier to achieving high data rates in wireless communication
systems. Multipath is a phenomena caused by the multiple arrivals of the
transmitted signal to the receiver due to reflections off of “scatterers.” For
traditional communication systems, multipath fading is more problematic
when a direct LOS path does not exist between the transmitter and the re-
ceiver (this is commonly known as a Rayleigh fading scenario, Fig. 1.6).
One problem with multipath is that it can create a selective fading response
at the received signal, particularly when the bandwidth of the modulated
signal is wide as compared to the “coherence bandwidth” of the channel. As
shown in Figure 7.1 (Rappaport, 1996), another problem is that the received
198 CHAPTER 7 BRIEF DISCUSSION OF 802.11n AND CONCLUDING REMARKS
−30
−35
Received Power (dBm)
−40
−45
−50
−55
−60
−65
−70
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
T-R Separation (meters)
Figure 7.1 Received power variation with transmitter–receiver separation for multi-
gigahertz communication system.
amplitude can vary significantly with a small change in the distance be-
tween the receiver and the transmitter.
In an all-white-Gaussian-noise (AWGN) channel, a “reasonable” SNR is
sufficient for obtaining a low probability of error in the system. This is due
to the fact that the only factor that can impact an error event is large additive
noise. On the other hand, in a faded environment, a very large SNR would
be required for a low probability of error for both coherent and noncoherent
communication systems (Fig. 7.2) (Tse et al., 2005). This is due to the fact
10−2
10−4
10−6
10−8
Pe
BPSK over AWGN

10−10
Noncoherent
10−12 orthogonal
Coherent BPSK
10−14
10−16
−20 −10 0 10 20 30 40
SNR (db)
Figure 7.2 Probability of error as function of SNR in AWGN channel as well as faded
channel.
7.1 NEED FOR 802.11n 199
that even in the presence of high SNR errors can occur due to the deep fade
present in the channel.
As mentioned above, without the use of some form of “diversity,” perfor-
mance in a faded environment can be quite poor. One or more dimensions
(degrees of freedom) are therefore exploited in a faded wireless system to
enable diversity. Diversity can be implemented in the form of time diversity
(e.g., interleaving of coded symbols), frequency diversity (e.g., intersymbol
equalization, spread-spectrum techniques, OFDM), or spatial diversity (e.g.,
selection diversity, space–time coding). These diversity techniques can then
be utilized to improve the reliability of the link.
As discussed in Chapter 1, one of the methods utilized in 802.11a/g stan-
dards for combating multipath is the use of OFDM coding. Using OFDM, the
wideband modulation is subdivided in many subcarriers, each of which has a
narrow bandwidth in comparison to the coherence bandwidth of a typical in-
door environment. Therefore a frequency-selective fade over the wide band-
width (Fig. 7.3) is effectively translated into flat-band fading as observed by
each subcarrier. OFDM also allows for close packing of the subcarriers, due to
the orthogonal nature between each two subcarriers (Figs. 1.8 and 1.9). Due to
this orthogonality, the subcarriers are allowed to have overlap, since the peak
magnitude of each subcarrier in frequency occurs during the null of all of the
other subcarriers in an ideal environment. In reality the impairments of the
transmitter, the channel, and the receiver would deteriorate the orthogonality
of the subcarriers and result in reduced performance. This is one reason for the
need for a high performance radio to be utilized in OFDM-based systems.
Another key feature of 802.11n is the use of multiple antennas to enhance
the achievable rate as a function of the distance between the receiver and the
−8.125 8.125 MHz
Multipath channel
Broadband channel with no OFDM subdivision response
−8.125 −.312 .312 8.125 MHz
−26 −1 +1 +26 Subcarrier Index

Broadband channel with many OFDM (narrowband) subcarriers
Figure 7.3 Subdivision of wideband channel by using OFDM subcarriers.

transmitter. Multiple antennas, in general, can be used for achieving power

gain [e.g., receiver maximum ratio combining (MRC), transmitter beam
forming (TxBF)], diversity gain (e.g., selection diversity, space–time cod-
ing), and/or degree-of-freedom gain. Whereas achieving power gain and di-
versity gain requires multiple antennas only on one end of the link (i.e.,
transmitter or receiver), achieving a degree-of-freedom gain requires a true
MIMO system with multiple antennas on both the receiver side and the
transmitter side (Tse et al., 2005). At the same time, a degree-of-freedom
gain is the only one of the mentioned techniques that allows for an increase
in the channel capacity. The 802.11n draft standard allows for the utilization
of the multiple-antenna techniques mentioned in a mandatory and/or option-
al mode. In general, if each Rx antenna has a complete analog path to digi-
tal, RX diversity is often referred to as single-in, multi-out (SIMO). If each
TX antenna has a complete analog path from digital, TX diversity is often
referred to as MISO. If each RX and TX antenna has a complete analog path
to and from digital, RX and TX diversity is often referred to as MIMO.
These three configurations are illustrated at a high level in Figure 7.4.
The channel capacity of a legacy single-in, single-out (SISO) system is
given by Shannon’s famous relation
CSISO = BW log2(1 + SNR)
where BW is the bandwidth of the channel. It can be seen that capacity in-
creases linearly with bandwidth, which of course is a very expensive com-
modity. Also, the channel capacity increases only with the logarithm of the
SNR. It would therefore require a very large increase in the SNR to obtain a
Ant1. Ant1. Ant.1

TX TX RX
Ant.1
RX
Ant. Ant.1
TX RX
CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL
Ant2. Ant2. Ant.2

TX TX RX
Ant.2
RX
RX Diversity TX Diversity RX and TX Diversity
Figure 7.4 Illustration of system with receiver diversity, system with transmitter diversity,
and system with receiver and transmitter diversity.
7.1 NEED FOR 802.11n 201
modest increase in channel capacity. On the other hand, the upper bound of
the channel capacity in a MIMO environment is given by
CMIMO = min(n, m) BW log2(1 + SNR)
where n is the number transmitter antennas and m is the number of receiver

antennas. The channel capacity can now be increased in a linear fashion
with the minimum of the transmitter and receiver antennas. Although this
relation provides for an upper bound of the capacity, in practice, numbers
very close to the upper bound are achievable.
Many analog techniques have been utilized in the past to effectively com-
bat multipath fading in a wireless system. These include simple antenna di-
versity selection or more sophisticated analog maximum-ratio-combining
techniques using phase shifters or programmable delay elements. However,
a “true MIMO” system (one where each receiver and transmitter antenna is
connected to the baseband processor through a dedicated analog chain) pro-
vides for many advantages (Fig. 7.5). For example, phase shifting, combin-
ing, and beam forming can be performed easily at digital baseband on a per-
subcarrier basis in OFDM systems. Further, such a true MIMO system
allows for “spatial multiplexing,” thereby increasing the channel capacity
dramatically, as discussed earlier. On the other hand, such true MIMO sys-
tems consume more power and area than analog-only multiantenna solu-
tions.
The draft 802.11n standard combines the capabilities offered by OFDM
coding along with those offered by multiple antennas. As a result, a
MIMO–OFDM system is constructed which offers diversity gain as well as
Ant1.
Ant.1
TX
RX
DAC ADC
CHANNEL
Tx MIMO Ant2. Ant.2 Rx MIMO

TX RX
PHY + MAC PHY + MAC
DAC ADC
Figure 7.5 “True” MIMO system in 2 × 2 configuration.

power gain and utilizes a rich scattering environment to offer a significant

increase in the channel capacity. In such a MIMO–OFDM system (Fig. 7.6),
a high speed data stream is split into multiple slower streams and the inde-
pendent data streams are sent on each transmit antenna at the same time and
at the same frequency band using a space–time processor. The received data
streams which have been subject to the scattering channel are received on
the multiple receive antennas, separated out by the space–time processor on
the receive side, decoded, and then combined to regenerate the high speed
data stream.
The draft 802.11n standard offers many features and capabilities. These
include spatial division multiplexing (SDM) through the use of
MIMO–OFDM, bandwidth expansion, higher rate binary convolutional
codes, new frame formats, reduced interframe spacing, short guard inter-
vals, space–time block codes, transmit beam forming, low density parity
check codes, new modulation and coding schemes (MCS), and a variety of
aggregation techniques. The radio presented in this case study is capable of
supporting all of these functions (Behzad et al., 2007a).
7.2 802.11a/b/g/n MIMO TRANSCEIVER
A single-chip fully integrated multiband direct-conversion CMOS MIMO

transceiver targeted for WLAN applications is described in this case study
Space-Time Processing
Space-Time Processing
A1 B1
C1
A2 B2
C2
A3 B3 C3 RX
TX
A1 B1 C1
A2 B2 C2
A3 B3 C3
Figure 7.6 MIMO–OFDM system concept.

7.2 802.11a/b/g/n MIMO TRANSCEIVER 203
(Behzad et al., 2007b). This transceiver is capable of satisfying the require-

ments of the Enhanced Wireless Consortium (EWC) and the draft version of
the 802.11n as it stands today. The transceiver presented here is implement-
ed in a 2 × 2 format (i.e., two receivers and two transmitters) and is capable
of supporting data rates of over 250 Mbps. Each receiver and transmitter is
capable of operating at the 2.4- to 2.5-GHz as well as the 4.9- to 5.9-GHz
bands. Additionally each receiver and transmitter is capable of working
with modulated signals with (RF) modulation bandwidths of 10 to 40 MHz.
The receivers and transmitters are fed by a shared PLL through LO genera-
tion and distribution circuitry. The receivers and transmitters achieve an
EVM of better than –41 dB (0.9%) and –40 dB (1.0%) operating in legacy G
and A modes, respectively (results limited by lab OFDM signal generators).
From a 1.8-V supply and with both cores operating, the chip consumes 275
mA in the RX mode and 280 mA in the TX mode. As compared to the pre-
viously published MIMO transceivers for WLAN (Chien et al., 2006;
Palaskas et al., 2006; Rahn et al., 2005), this transceiver is implemented in a
low cost 0.18-␮m CMOS technology, covers both the G band as well as the
entire worldwide A band, is significantly smaller in area, is capable of oper-
ating over RF channel bandwidths of 10, 20, or 40 MHz, and achieves much
lower NF, PN, and EVM. Furthermore, for the first time, transceiver perfor-
mance under various draft 802.11n MCSs are presented and PHY rates of
> 270 Mbps are shown.
7.2.1 Architecture and Circuit Implementation

The full 2 × 2 MIMO transceiver is composed of two multiband RX chains,
two multiband TX chains, a PLL and LO generation and distribution sec-
tion, various calibration blocks, a digital control section, and some other
miscellaneous circuits. The high level block diagram is shown in Figure 7.7.
Each subblock is described in the following sections.
7.2.1.1 Receiver
A block diagram of each receiver slice is shown in Figure 7.8a. (Note that
for simplicity all block diagrams are shown with single-ended traces, but the
actual transceiver is designed with fully differential signaling throughout
the chip.) The 5- or 2-GHz signal is received and amplified by the appropri-
ate differential LNA, then directly down converted by the quadrature mixers
associated with that band. The down-converted signal is then applied to the
first high pass VGA (HPVGA1) where the signal is amplified and the DC
offsets associated with the self-mixing of the mixers and device mismatches
are rejected. The signal is then filtered by the fourth-order Butterworth fil-
Figure 7.7 Transceiver high level block diagram.
I
B/G LOI2G To ADCs
Q
RF In LOQ2G
LOI5G
A (a)
LOQ5G
LOI5G (b)
A
LOQ5G
RF Out LOI2G I
B/G From DACs

LOQ2G
Q
Figure 7.8 Block diagram of (a) each receive slice and (b) each transmit slice.
ters which act to reject any interferers. The signal is then further amplified
by HPVGA2 and HPVGA3, each with their own DC offset cancellation
loops. The resultant I and Q outputs are then buffered and sent to the I and Q
ADCs on the companion PHY+MAC chip. Each HPVGA has a program-
mable gain of 0 to 30 dB in 3-dB steps. The corner frequency of the HPFs in
the HPVGAs are calibrated using an on-chip RC calibration loop. Further,
the HPF corners are programmable over a wide range to satisfy the integrity
of the lower index OFDM subcarriers during the payload while allowing for
fast settling during the preamble. The corner frequency of the LPF is also
calibrated to the desired bandwidth (5, 10, or 20 MHz) to ensure the proper
system operation in the presence of large adjacent channel interferers. Two
wideband RSSI signals as well as one narrowband RSSI ensure the proper
operation of the system over a very wide dynamic range and in the presence
of large (CCK, OFDM, BT, CW, etc.) interferers. Each receiver slice is ca-
pable of >100 dB of total gain, >100 dB of gain control range, an input IIP3
of +5 dBm with the RF front end at low gain, and a NF of 4 dB with the RF
front end at maximum gain.
7.2.1.2 Transmitter
Figure 7.8b displays the block diagram of each transmitter slice. Received
quadrature signals from the DACs are applied to the programmable band-
width and gain low pass filters. The output of the LPFs are then applied to
the appropriate up-conversion quadrature mixers which directly convert the
baseband signal to the desired RF band. The up-conversion mixers (with as-
sociated transconductors) are designed for high linearity and low LOFT
over a wide gain control range (Lee et al., 2006). The RF signal is then am-
plified through two stages of programmable gain. The final gain stage is ca-
pable of driving a 50-⍀ load through a balun and is internally matched to a
100 ⍀ differential. The RF gain stages are designed such that their power
consumption is reduced at lower gain settings.
The core of the transconductance stage for this chip was shown in Figure
6.12 and is repeated for convenience in Figure 7.9. The input pair, M1 and
M2, is put in feedback to linearize the effective transconductance. The sig-
nal currents flow through M3 and M4 and are mirrored to M5 and M6. The
effective transconductance of the circuit is 1/R1 × R9/R7 under high levels of
degeneration. The degeneration resistors R3 to R12 are used to reduce the
device offsets. Note that R1 and R2 are not used as part of gain control.
When R1 and R2 are changed, the overall ratio of the signal to offsets will
change since the offset contribution of all the devices in the signal path fol-
lowing R1 and R2 will remain constant whereas all offsets prior to R1 and
R2 will scale by the change in the gain. The circled devices in Figure 7.9
RF_LOFT_IP RF_LOFT_IN
To mixer quad
VDD
R3 R4
VCASC
M5 M6 Gain
Control
iout Stage
M1 M2 M7
ip in
R1 R2 BB_LOFT_IP iin BB_LOFT_IN
M5 M3 M4 M6
R7 R9 1 R9 (w / l )5,6
Gm ≈ • •
GND R1 R7 (w / l )5,6 + 2 • (w / l )7
High-Linearity Gm Core
Figure 7.9 High linearity TX mixer transconductor and gain control stage. LOFT cancella-
tion current sources also shown.
constitute the proposed gain control scheme. The gates of both the shunt de-
vice, M7, and the cascade devices, M5 and M6, are tied together. To the
first order, the current gain will be given by the ratio of their W/L’s. There-
fore, the gain control scheme is independent of process, voltage, and tem-
perature variation and possesses a high linearity. A variable gain is imple-
mented by using multiple shunt devices. The four current sources that are
shown are utilized to cancel LOFT due to DC offsets as well as direct RF
coupling during startup calibration. No calibration is required as the gain of
the block is changed. The calibration algorithm was discussed in Section
6.2.
Figure 7.10 shows the simplified schematic of the PA driver. A three-
stage transconductance linearization is used to improve linearity over a wide
range of inputs (Behzad et al., 2004). The first stage, biased well in the class
A region, supplies the majority of the gain but is only linear over a small
range of inputs. The second and third stages, biased at class AB and class B,
respectively, contribute more to the gain as input increases and counteract
the gain roll-off in the first stage. The class AB nature of the driver saves
valuable DC when the circuit is not transmitting large signals. The obtained
transconductance curves for each subsection of the PA driver as well as the
overall resultant transconductance are shown in Figure 7.11. The transmitter
has an output P1dB of +14 dBm in the A band and an output P1dB of +16
dBm in the G band.
VDD
L1 R1 L2
R2
To Output Balun
M11 M12 M7 M8 M3 M4
M9 M10 M5 M6 M1 M2
b3 Stage3 b3 b2 Stage2 b2 b1 Stage1 b1
Figure 7.10 A-band PA driver transconductance linearization.
7.2.1.3 PLL and LO Generation

A shared integer-N PLL is used to synthesize the proper LO (Fig. 7.12). The
on-chip crystal oscillator whose divided down output provides the reference
to the PFD is capable of operating with a 20-, 40-, or 80-MHz crystal. In or-
der to minimize the impact of the VCO noise, The PFD comparison fre-
quency is chosen to be as high as possible to allow wide PLL bandwidth.
Further, in order to minimize the phase noise arising from the loop filter and
charge pump, a low programmable KVCO (30 MHz/V at 3.5 GHz, typical)
Total
Gm [ms]
Main
Aux1
Aux2
Vin [V]
Figure 7.11 Transconductance curves for A-band PA driver stage. The main, aux1, aux2,
and total transconductance curves are shown.
LN Reg. LN Reg. LN Reg.
Prog Ref
XO PFD CP
Div
VCO
3∼4 GHz
Retiming ÷N
Figure 7.12 Block diagram of shared integer-N PLL utilized on MIMO transceiver. Very
low noise regulators are utilized on sensitive blocks to obtain a very low phase noise design.
and high charge pump current are used. The PLL utilizes a single VCO with
a wide tuning range to cover both 802.11 frequency bands. A 9-bit high ac-
curacy VCO calibration is implemented to choose the best VCO subband
for the desired channel. Every block in the synthesizer, including the crystal
oscillator and the bias and supply generation circuitry for the PLL, are de-
signed, simulated, and optimized for optimal noise performance. Three very
low noise regulators are integrated on-chip and provide a low noise supply
voltage to the crystal oscillator, the charge pump, as well as the VCO. All of
the components of the PLL other than a large capacitor in the loop filter are
integrated on-chip. The block-by-block noise simulation results are then
used to obtain an overall closed-loop PLL phase noise response for the vari-
ous channels. The simulation results for 5420 MHz are shown in Figure
7.13. These simulated results match the measured results very closely.
Ch5420 Phase Noise, TT

−100.00
−110.00
Phase Noise (dBc/Hz)
−120.00
−130.00
−140.00
−150.00
−160.00
1.00E+03 1.00E+04 1.00E+05 1.00E+06 1.00E+07
Frequency (Hz)
VCO LF Ref Div CP/PFD FB Div Total
Figure 7.13 Contribution of various PLL blocks to overall PLL phase noise at 5420 MHz.
In order to avoid any pulling effects by any of the transmitters on the

VCO, the VCO operates at two-thirds the channel frequency for the 802.11a
band and at three-fourths the channel frequency for the 802.11b/g bands
(Fig. 7.14). A differential and quadrature LO signal is required for the oper-
ation of each RX and TX mixer at the 2.4- or 5-GHz bands. Proper LO
buffering and distribution are therefore essential for the robust operation of
the system over PTV as well as for reducing power consumption. Therefore,
the LO distributions channels were accounted for in the very early stages of
the floor planning of the chip. Each local buffer is designed to be able to
drive the local mixer as well as the routing and the next buffer stage (Fig.
7.14). As such the LO distribution of the chip is scalable to larger integrated
M × N MIMO systems.
7.2.1.4 Calibration Techniques

The transceiver utilizes extensive self-contained and/or DSP-assisted auto-
calibration circuitry. These calibrations include independent and multiphase
LOFT calibration (RF coupling and DC offsets) on each transmit core; inde-
pendent quadrature (phase and amplitude) calibration on each receive and
transmit core; resistor calibration for bias current generation blocks; LPF
and HPF corner calibration on filters; multiphase VCO calibration (open-
loop, closed-loop, and refresh mode); and VCO gain calibration and trans-
mitter power calibration. Additionally a high accuracy temperature sensor
allows for temperature-based calibrations if necessary. Some of these cali-
brations may have been desirable but not absolutely necessary for some
legacy WLAN ICs but are essential for obtaining the performance at the lev-
gRX1 aRX1 gTX1 aTX1 aTX2 gTX2 aRX2 gRX2
÷2 ÷2
Integer-N
Synthesizer
LOI5G
4.8~5.9 GHz LOO5G ÷2
3.2~3.9 GHz
Figure 7.14 LO generation and distribution (Q path not shown).

els that are required by this RFIC. These calibrations ensure optimal opera-
tion over process, temperature, and voltage as well as a high yielding part.
The transmitter LOFT and IQ calibration technique has been discussed in
Section 6.2 and will not be repeated here.
In order to obtain optimal receiver performance, especially for the 5-GHz
band, RX IQ calibration is required. One method would be to utilize the cal-
ibrated transmitter to transmit a single-sideband test tone and couple this
test tone to the receiver. Then the down-converted I and Q signals at the re-
ceiver baseband can be used to calibrate the RX I and Q in digital baseband.
In the basic implementation of such a scheme in a MIMO radio, the TX1
output would be used to calibrate RX1, and the TX2 output would be use to
calibrate RX2 (Fig. 7.15). The issue with this approach is that the loading of
BUF21 is different during calibration and during normal operation. The
same can be said about the loading of BUF22. With this scheme, therefore,
postcalibration image rejection can be limited to –35 dBc. In the current
chip, an alternative cross-core calibration method has been utilized (Fig.
7.16). In this approach the output of TX2 is coupled to the input of RX1
during calibration. Therefore the loading of BUFF22 is constant during cal-
ibration and normal operation. The procedure is repeated for RX2 once RX1
is calibrated. With this approach, postcalibration image rejection is better
than –50 dBc.
RF IN RF OUT RF OUT RF IN
aRX1 aTX1 aTX2 aRX2
LO LO LO LO
(I,Q) (I,Q) (I,Q) (I,Q)
BUF22 BUF21
LO
Figure 7.15 RX IQ calibration—same core method.

RF IN RF OUT RF OUT RF IN
aRX1 aTX1 aTX2 aRX2
LO LO LO LO
(I,Q) (I,Q) (I,Q) (I,Q)
BUF22 BUF21
LO
Figure 7.16 RX IQ calibration—cross-core method.
7.2.2 Packaging Issues

In addition to the challenges associated with designing a single transceiver
for high EVM performance, there are many other potential complications
that need to be addressed in order to be able to integrate multiple such trans-
ceivers on the same Si substrate. For example, this chip includes 16 RF
input/outputs (IOs), 16 baseband analog signal path IOs, several other ana-
log IOs (RSSIs, TSSIs, temperature sensor, etc.), and tens of high speed dig-
ital IOs. Unfortunately such a chip cannot be integrated in a “RF-friendly”
package such as a leadless package chip carrier (LPCC), and larger, more
complex packages are required. In this case a 165-ball fine-pitch ball-grid
array (fpBGA) package is utilized. Full three-dimensional electromagnetic
simulations were conducted on the package to ensure proper operation and
isolation of the numerous RF sections of the chip (Fig. 7.17). In order to en-
sure optimal performance, the chip design, chip floor planning, package de-
sign, and many aspects of the board design were conducted simultaneously
and further complicated the overall design task.
7.2.3 Measurement Results

The phase noise of the PLL for the 5.240-GHz A bands is shown in Figure
7.18. The phase noise plot is obtained with the PLL and crystal oscillator
Figure 7.17 Design of fpBGA package substrate. The RF section of one core shown.
(XO) voltage supply being provided by the integrated ultralow noise regula-
tors and with a 20-MHz crystal used as the reference. As shown in the
EVM–subcarrier plot of Figure 7.19, operating in the legacy 802.11g mode,
each transmitter achieves an EVM of –41 dB while transmitting –2 dBm. As
shown in the constellation diagram of Figure 7.20, in the legacy 802.11a
mode, each transmitter achieves an EVM of –40 dBm at –5 dBm TX power.
The constellation diagram at the nominal received power level as well as at
From 10.1282 kHz

Residual PM = 0.0027 rad = 0.16 deg
To 309.4551 kHz
PHASE NOISE
−80
−90
−100
−110
dBc/Hz
−120
−130
−140
−150
−160
1.0 k 10.0 k 100.0 k 1.0 M 10.0 M
Hz
Figure 7.18 Measured PN at transmitter output (5.24 GHz).

% EVM
Subcarrier Index
Figure 7.19 Measured TX EVM (P0 = –2 dBm; –41 dB at 2.484 GHz).
Figure 7.20 Measured TX constellation diagram (P0 = –5 dBm; –40 dB at 5.2 GHz).
the sensitivity level of the receiver for the legacy 802.11g 54-Mbps packets is
shown in Figure 7.21 (2.412 GHz). Chip-referred sensitivity level of –78
dBm (at each antenna) is achieved in the MRC mode. Under similar condi-
tions the sensitivity for a 802.11a signal at 5.24 GHz is –79 dBm. In the draft
802.11n MCS15, 40-MHz mode, AWGN channel, with standard guard inter-
val (GI) (270 Mbps PHY rate), a chip-referred sensitivity of –72 dBm is
achieved. These EVM and sensitivity results are an indication of the excellent
analog characteristics of the transceiver, such as phase noise, IQ balance, lin-
earity, and noise figure. All RX and TX EVM measurements are limited and
affected by the EVM of the lab signal generation and VSA equipment, which
are only a few decibels better in performance than the device under test.
Figure 7.22a displays the average effective throughput of the system in a
Chariot test. The chipset is set to the MCS15 mode, with channel bandwidth
of 40 MHz, and standard GI. In this setting the PHY rate is 270 Mbps. The
2442-MHz G band channel is utilized for this test. A throughput of >200
Mbps is achieved. This measurement is performed in an unconstrained sys-
tem where the central processing unit or transmission control protocol
would not limit the throughput of the system. Figure 7.22b displays short-
EVM = −40dB
Pin = −45dBm
MRC Enabled
2.484GHz
(a)
EVM = −20dB
(sensitivity level)
Pin = −78dBm
MRC Enabled
2.484GHz
(b)
Figure 7.21 Measured RX constellation diagram.

Throughput
210.00
180.00
150.00
120.00
Mbps
90.00
60.00
30.00
0.0
0:00:00 0:00:20 0:00:40 0:01:00 0:01:20 0:01:40 0:02:00 0:02:20
Elapsed Time
(a)
Throughput
200.00
196.00
192.00
188.00
184.00
Mbps
180.00
176.00
172.00
168.00
164.00
160.00
0:00:00 0:00:10 0:00:20 0:00:30 0:00:40 0:00:50 0:01:00
Elapsed Time
(b)
Figure 7.22 Real-world system performance/throughput. (a) Cable test, 2 × 2 system,

throughput > 200 Mbps, PHY rate = 270 Mbps, 2.442-GHz channel. (b) Close range (10 ft)
over the air at 5.24 GHz, 2 × 2 system, max throughput > 193 Mbps.
range over-the-air testing at 5.24 GHz where a maximum throughput of

>193 Mbps is achieved.
Figure 7.23 displays the throughput versus range for a combined line-of-
sight and non-line-of-sight channel. This test is performed in a 2 × 2
configuration with the radio set to the 2.442-GHz channel. The results are
200
180
Draft 802.11n
160
Throughput [Mbps]
140
120
100
80
Legacy 802.11g
60
40
20
0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
Range [ft]
Figure 7.23 Effective system throughput versus range for system utilizing this radio and
comparison against a legacy 802.11g system.
compared against a legacy 802.11g system. The advantages of the draft

802.11n MIMO system as compared to a legacy system are apparent at both
the short and long range.
As mentioned earlier, small antenna displacements can result in large
channel capacity variations. When three antennas are available in the sys-
tem, the best two antennas can be selected by utilizing a spatial probing al-
gorithm. This algorithm is operated as an extension of the rate selection al-
gorithm. The radio presented here can be utilized in this 3 × 3 dynamic
antenna selection system when three antennas are available. This dynamic
antenna selection algorithm maximizes throughput at a particular location,
maximizes the throughput under worst channel conditions, and maximizes
the average throughput of the system. As a result, the system is able to
maintain consistent and high throughput over time.
The transceiver performance summary is presented in Table 7.1.
7.2.4 MIMO Case Study Conclusion

A very high performance, low power, small area, multiband draft 802.11n
transceiver has been implemented in a digital CMOS process and presented
as a case study here. The transceiver is capable of supporting PHY rates of
>270 Mbps and an effective throughput of >190 Mbps in real-world over-
the-air testing. Various calibration techniques have been utilized to enable
high performance, low power, and/or high production yield.
The chip die photo is shown in Figure 7.24b. The chip integrates the equiv-
alent of approximately 100 single-ended inductors. The IC occupies a total die
area of 18 mm2 in a digital 0.18-␮m CMOS process and is packaged in a 165-
ball fpBGA package. The chip is designed such that it can be utilized in a mul-
7.3 CONCLUDING REMARKS 217
Table 7.1 Transceiver Performance Summary

Measured Spec. Unit
Frequency band (A/G) 2.4–2.5/4.8–5.9 GHz
RX max. gain (A/G) >100/>100 dB
RX min. gain (A/G) 5/5 dB
RX NF at max. RF gain (A/G) 4/4.5 dB
RX IIP3 at min. RF gain (A/G) +5/+6 dBm
RX IIP3 at max. RF gain (A/G) –12/–10 dBm
RX-RX isolation (A/G) >60/>60 >30 dB
RX LPF BW 5/10/20 MHz
TX P1dB (A/G) +14/+16 dBm
TX EVM (A/G) <–40/<–41 <–30 dB
TX-TX isolation (A/G) >35/>43 >15 dB
In-band PN at 150 kHz effect (A/G) –108/<–109 <–100 dBc/Hz
Legacy 54 Mbps, chip-referred –79/–78 –65 dBm
MRC-enabled sensitivity (A/G)
EWC MCS15, 40-MHz channel, std. –72/–72 dBm
GI, 270 Mbps, chip-referred sensitivity
Vdd 1.8 V
RX mode total current consumption 275 mA
TX mode total current consumption 280 mA
(both cores active)
Technology 0.18 ␮m CMOS
Die size 18 mm2
ESD HBM performance > ±2 kV
titransceiver configuration to build a larger MIMO system (e.g., 4 × 4). The

chip passes better than ±2-kV ESD performance on all pins. As a comparison,
the die photo of a first-generation 802.11a transceiver implemented in the same
process technology is shown to scale in Figure 7.24 (Behzad et al., 2004b).
This 802.11a transceiver occupies 12 mm2. The fact that a dual-core, dual-
band, triple-mode transceiver can be implemented in only 1.5 times the area of
a single-core, single-band transceiver of only a few years ago is testimony to
the advancements in architectures and circuit techniques in the past few years.
7.3 CONCLUDING REMARKS
In conclusion we have briefly touched upon the various topics in the area of
WLAN radio design. Complex trade-offs between the following topics were
discussed: the various flavors of WLAN, the radio architectures, the analog
impairments, choice of process technology, and various forms of autocali-
bration. Two specific case studies were presented.
All indications at this point are that a trend toward higher data rates and
higher spectral efficiencies on the high end of the market will continue.
218
RX
PLL/AFC
TX
(a) (b)
Figure 7.24 (a) Die microphotograph of SISO 802.11a transceiver (Behzad et al., 2003). (b) Die microphotograph of this dual-band MIMO trans-
ceiver.
7.3 CONCLUDING REMARKS 219
Trends toward lower cost, smaller size and lower power consumption, and
lower end of the market will also continue. Further, the trend of integration
into embedded applications is emerging and will drive the growth of WLAN
chip sales in the next several years.
Radios will become cheaper, smaller, and better by utilizing innovative
systems and circuit techniques as well as taking advantage of the power of
DSP for self-calibration. Multifunction and multistandard transceivers will
become more commonplace and researchers will continue to work toward
“software-definable” radios.
Figure 7.25 displays two sides of one module with a single-chip Blue-
tooth BCM2035 mounted on the top side of the printed circuit board (PCB)
Figure 7.25 Two sides of one module with single-chip Bluetooth BCM2035 (top picture)
on one side and single-chip WLAN BCM4317 (bottom picture) on the other side.
and a single-chip wireless LAN BCM4317 on the bottom side of the PCB.
As can be seen, the packaged IC dimensions are small, the external compo-
nents are few, and the whole system has been integrated in a very small
footprint. BCM2035 integrates the Bluetooth PHY, MAC, and transceiver.
BCM4317 integrates a WLAN PHY, MAC, transceiver, as well as the pow-
er amplifier and the TR and diversity switches.
A more recent example of the advancement of the art is the BCM4325
which integrates full 802.11a/b/g functionality, Bluetooth enhanced data
rate (EDR), as well as an FM receiver in a single 65-nm digital CMOS IC.
In order to satisfy the needs of the communication gear of tomorrow, in-
novations in process technology, IC design, system design, MAC design,
packaging technology, PCB technology, and many other areas of engineer-
ing will have to continue. These innovations will lead us to a ubiquitous
connected world.
References
Adler, R. (1946), “A Study of Locking Phenomena in Oscillators,” Proc. I.R.E. Waves Elec-
trons, pp. 351–357.
Behzad, A., et al. (2003, Feb.). “A Direct-Conversion CMOS Transceiver with Automatic
Frequency Control for IEEE 802.11a Wireless LAN,” IEEE ISSCC Dig. Tech. Papers,
pp. 356–499.
Behzad, A., et al. (2004a), “A 4.92–5.845 GHz Direct-Conversion CMOS Transceiver for
IEEE 802.11a Wireless LAN,” IEEE RFIC Dig. Tech. Papers, pp. 335–338.
Behzad, A., et al., (2004b, Dec.), “A 5 GHz Direct-Conversion CMOS Transceiver Utilizing
Automatic Frequency Control for IEEE 802.11a Wireless LAN Standard,” IEEE JSSC,
pp. 2209–2220.
Behzad, A., et al. (2007a, Feb.), “A Fully Integrated MIMO Multiband Direct Conversion
CMOS Transceiver for WLAN Apllications (802.11n),” IEEE ISSCC Dig. Tech. Papers,
pp. 560–561.
Behzad, A., et al. (2007b, Dec.), “An 802.11a/b/g/n Direct Conversion MIMO Transceiver in
Digital CMOS,” IEEE JSSC, to be published.
Bouras, I., et al. (2003, Dec.), “A Single-Chip Digitally Calibrated 5.15-5.825-GHz 0.18␮m
CMOS Transceiver for 802.11a Wireless Lan,” IEEE JSCC, pp. 2221–2231.
Bult, K., et al. (1992, Dec.), “An Inherently Linear and Compact MOST-Only Current Divi-
sion Technique,” IEEE J. Solid-State Circuits, vol. 27, no. 12, pp. 1730–1735.
Cavers, J. (1997, Aug.), “New Methods for Adaptation of Quadrature Modulators and De-
modulators in Amplifier Linearization Circuits,” IEEE Trans. Vehic. Technol., vol. 46,
no. 3, pp. 707–716.
Chien, G., et al. (2006, Jun.), “A Fully-Integrated Dual-Band MIMO Transceiver IC,” IEEE
RFIC Dig. Tech. Papers, 4 pp.
Cutler, B. (2002, May), “Effects of Physical Layer Impairments on OFDM Systems,” RF De-
sign.
Darabi, H., et al. (2001, Dec.), “A 2.4-GHz CMOS Transceiver for Bluetooth,” IEEE JSCC,
pp. 2016–2024.
Gray, P. and Mayer, R. (1984). Analysis and Design of Analog Integrated Circuits, Second
Edition, Wiley.
Hajimiri, A. and Lee T. H. (1998, Feb.), “A General Theory of Phase Noise in Electrical Os-
cillators,” IEEE JSSC, pp. 179–194.
Kim, J., et al. (2005). “Prediction of Error Vector Magnitude Using AM/AM, AM/PM Dis-
tortion of RF Power Amplifier for High Order Modulation OFDM System,” Microwave
Symp. Dig., IEEE MTT-S International.
222 REFERENCES
Lee, T. H. (1998), The Design of CMOS Radio Frequency Circuits, Cambridge University
Press, New York.
Lee, C. P., et al. (2006, Feb.), “A Highly Linear Direct-Conversion Transmit Mixer
Transconductance Stage with Local Oscillation Feedthrough and I/Q Imbalance Cancel-
lation Scheme,” IEEE ISSCC Dig. Tech. Papers, pp. 368–369.
Mehr, I., et al. (1997, Apr.), “A CMOS Continuous-Time Gm-C Filter for PRML Read
Channel Applications at 150 Mb/s and Beyond,” IEEE J. Solid-State Circuits, vol. 32, no.
4, pp. 499–513.
Palaskas, Y., et al. (2006, Feb.), “A 5GHz 108Mb/s 2×2 MIMO Transceiver with Fully Inte-
grated +16dBm PAs in 90nm CMOS,” IEEE ISSCC Dig. Tech. Papers, pp. 368–369.
Rahn, D., et al. (2005, Aug.), “A Fully Integrated Multiband MIMO WLAN Transceiver
RFIC,” IEEE JSSC, pp. 1629–1641.
Rappaport, T. S. (1996), Wireless Communications—Principles & Practice, IEEE Press,
New York.
Razavi, B. (1998), RF Microelectronics, Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ.
Rofougaran, A. R., et al. (2005, Mar.), IEEE Commun. Mag.
Sevic, J., et al. (1996, Oct.), “Simulations of Adjacent Channel Power for Digital Wireless
Communication Systems,” Microwave J.
Su, D., et al. (2002), “A 5GHz CMOS Transceiver for 802.11a Wireless LAN,” IEEE ISSCC
Dig. Tech. Papers, .
Tse, D., et al. (2005), Fundamentals of Wireless Communications, Cambridge University
Press, New York.
Zagari, M., et al. (2002, Dec.), “A 5-GHz CMOS Transister for IEEE 802.11a Wireless LAN
Systems,” IEEE JSSC, pp. 1688–1694.
Annotated Bibliography
1. A. Behzad, Wireless LAN Radios: System Definition to Transistor Design, IEEE Expert
Now interactive course, http://www.ieee.org/web/education/Expert_Now_IEEE/mod-
ules.html.
An interactive course on the material covered in this book.
2. http://www.ieee802.org/.
The official link to the IEEE 802 LAN/MAN standard committee.
3. http://grouper.ieee.org/groups/802/11/QuickGuide_IEEE_802_WG_and_Activities.htm.
The link to the quick guide into the IEEE 802.11 working group and activities.
4. A Montalvo, “Highly Integrated RF & Wireless Transceivers,” IEEE International
Solid-State Circuits Conference Tutorial, San Francisco, 2003.
This tutorial provides an introduction to the challenges associated with highly integrated
RF and wireless transceivers. Both system level and circuit level challenges are ad-
dressed. The focus is on transceivers for high data rate systems such as EDGE, WCD-
MA, and 802.11, which require linearity in both the TX and RX paths. Some of the topics
that will be addressed are architectures such as direct-conversion RX and TX which en-
able elimination of external components, circuit level issues associated with implement-
ing these architectures, the impact of finite isolation, and manufacturability.
5. T. Tuttle, “Introduction to Wireless Receiver Design,” IEEE International Solid-State
Circuits Conference Tutorial, San Francisco, 2002.
An introduction to integrated receivers focuses on performance requirements for GSM
cellular handset applications: (1) overview of radio standards for sensitivity, blocking,
AM suppression, and intermodulation; (2) comparison of heterodyne, direct-conver-
sion, and low IF receiver architectures; (3) discussion of design specifications and
trade-offs.
6. D. Shoemaker et al., “Wireless LAN: Architecture and Design,” IEEE International
Solid-State Circuits Conference Tutorial, San Francisco, 2003.
An overview of competing wireless LAN architectures in the 2.4- and 5.0-GHz spectra is
presented. RF and analog requirements will be discussed. A detailed discussion of com-
peting modem algorithms (OFDM, QAM, QPSK, CCK, etc.) will be presented, with ad-
vantages and disadvantages identified for each. Filtering requirements and some aspects
of the software protocol stack will be compared. The tutorial will end with some imple-
mentation ideas for the harder issues and a performance analysis for each system.
7. B. Cutler, “Effects of Physical Layer Impairments on OFDM Systems,” RF Design, May
2002, pp. 36–44.
The effects of common signal impairments using single-carrier modulation formats are
224 ANNOTATED BIBLIOGRAPHY
generally well understood by system designers. The effects of these same impairments on
an OFDM signal, however, can be quite different and are discussed in this article.
8. R. VanNee and R. Prasad, OFDM for Wireless Mulimedia Communications, Artech
House, 2000.
A book on the digital PHY section of OFDM systems. It offers a detailed treatment of prac-
tical OFDM system concepts and their applications to practical communication concepts.
9. I. Bouras et al., “A Digitally Calibrated 5.15GHz–5.825GHz Transceiver for 802.11a
Wireless LANs in 0.18 ␮m CMOS,” ISSCC, 2003.
This paper presents a single-chip 5-GHz fully integrated direct-conversion transceiver
for IEEE 802.11a WLAN systems manufactured in 0.18-␮m CMOS. The IC features a
system architecture which takes advantage of the computing resources of the digital
companion chip in order to eliminate I/Q mismatch and achieve accurately matched
baseband filters. The integrated VCO and synthesizer achieve an integrated phase noise
of less than 0.8° RMS. The receiver has an overall noise figure of 5.2 dB and achieves
sensitivity of –75 dBm at 54-Mb/s operation, both referred to the IC input. The transmit
error vector magnitude is –33 dB at –5 dBm output power from the integrated power am-
plifier–driver amplifier. The transceiver occupies an area of 18.5 mm2.
10. M. Zargari, “Challenges in the Design of a CMOS RF Transceiver for IEEE 802.11a
Wireless LAN,” VLSI Symposium Short Course, Hawaii, 2003.
This paper presents the challenges involved in the design of integrated IEEE 802.11
wireless LAN transceivers with focus on radio architecture and circuit implementation.
In particular, examples of critical blocks in receiver and transmitter are discussed.
11. D. Su et al., “A 5GHz CMOS Transceiver for 802.11a Wireless LAN,” IEEE Interna-
tional Solid-State Circuits Conference Tutorial, San Francisco, 2002.
A 5-GHz transceiver comprising the RF and analog circuits of an IEEE 802.11a-compli-
ant WLAN has been integrated in a 0.25-␮m CMOS technology. The IC has 22 dBm
maximum transmitted power, 8 dB overall receive chain noise figure, and –112 dBc/Hz
synthesizer phase noise at 1-MHz frequency offset.
12. A. Behzad et al., “A Direct-Conversion CMOS Transceiver with Automatic Frequency
Control for IEEE 802.11a Wireless LAN,” IEEE International Solid-State Circuits Con-
ference Tutorial, San Francisco, 2003.
A 11.7-mm2 5-GHz direct-conversion 0.18-␮m CMOS transceiver achieves a sensitivity
of –93 dBm, a system NF of 4.5 dB (high gain), and IIP3 of –4.8 dBm (low gain). Dissi-
pation is 150 mW in RX mode and 380 mW while transmitting 15-dBm OFDM signal.
13. T. Schwanenberger et al., “A Multi Standard Single-Chip Transceiver Covering 5.15 to
5.85GHz,” IEEE International Solid-State Circuits Conference Tutorial, San Francisco,
2003.
This transceiver achieves a transmit 1-dB output compression point of +15 dBm, and the
overall receiver noise figure is 5 dB. A power gain range of >45 dB/65 dB for
transmit/receive and a PLL synthesizer frequency range of 4.9 to 5.85 GHz with –79
dBc/Hz phase noise at 10-kHz offset have been measured. The IC is realized in 0.5-␮m
SiGe BICMOS technology and occupies 17 mm2.
14. J. Troychak, “The Design and Verification of IEEE 802.11a 5GHz Wireless LAN Sys-
tem,” Technical Note, Agilent-EESOF.
This article reviews the IEEE 802.11a physical layer, discuses system level design con-
siderations, and describes an integrated software/hardware design flow for IC design
and verification.
ANNOTATED BIBLIOGRAPHY 225
15. “Making 802.11g Transmitter Measurements,” Application Note 1380-4, Agilent.

This application note outlines the transmitter measurements required for 802.11g and
examines how they relate to measurements needed for 802.11a and 802.11b testing.
16. “RF Testing of Wireless LAN Products,” Application Note 1380-1, Agilent.
This application note looks at the modulation technology behind several WLAN stan-
dards and the measurement techniques that can be used to troubleshoot and quantify
their RF performance. The emphasis will be on 802.11b, 802.11a, and HIPERLAN Type
1 and Type 2. The principal focus of this document is the physical RF layer of WLAN sig-
nals, as opposed to the MAC layer or higher layers of a WLAN signal. This includes
time, frequency, and modulation domain analysis and troubleshooting as well as the ba-
sic modulation theory behind these standards.
17. B. Come, “Impact of Front-End Non-Idealities on Bit Error Rate Performance of
WLAN-OFDM Transceivers,” paper presented at the Radio and Wireless Conference,
Denver, 2000.
Given the high data rates with required low bit error rates of 802.11a and given the na-
ture of the OFDM signal, a conservative analysis of the front-end requirements lead to
severe, overdimensioned specifications. Such a design would never meet this market, by
necessity low cost and low power. To extract more optimal front-end specifications, this
paper assesses the BER performance of the complete WLAN–OFDM link. As a result, it
first shows that the transmitted symbols’ word length can be restricted to 8 bits and the
normalized crest factor digitally limited at baseband to 4. Then it shows that the power
amplifier can operate with only 5.4 dB backoff between the average input power and the
input-referred P1dB. Finally, we quantify in terms of implementation loss the influence
of the I/Q imbalance and of the frequency synthesizer phase noise.
18. A. Abidi, “Direct Conversion Radio Transceivers for Digital Communication,” JSSC,
Dec. 1995.
This paper briefly covers case studies in the use of direct-conversion receivers and trans-
mitters and summarizes some of the key problems in their implementations. Solutions to
these problems arise not only from more appropriate circuit design but also from ex-
ploiting system characteristics, such as the modulation format in the system.
19. A. Abidi, “CMOS Wireless Transceivers: The New Wave,” IEEE Communications
Magazine, Aug. 1999, pp. 119–124.
This article reviews some of the RF CMOS circuit design techniques and shows how an
understanding of the strengths and weaknesses of these circuits influences choice of ra-
dio architecture. The CMOS approach to radio design calls for the elimination of dis-
crete components in favor of high levels of on-chip integration which freely use transla-
tors and mix analog and digital functionality; in these respects, it departs from
traditional RF circuit practices.
20. F. Behbahani et al., “CMOS Mixers and Polyphase Filters for Large Image Rejection,”
IEEE Journal of Solid-State Circuits, June 2001, pp. 873–887.
This paper presents an in-depth treatment of mixers and polyphase filters and how they
are used in rejecting the image in transmitters and receivers. A phasor-based analysis is
used to explain all common image-reject topologies and their limitations, and it is shown
how this can replace complex trigonometric equations commonly found in the literature.
Practical problems in design and layout that limit the performance of image-reject up-
conversion and down-conversion mixers are identified, and solutions are presented or
limits explained. This understanding is put to work in a low IF CMOS wideband, low IF
down-conversion circuit, which repeatedly rejects the image by 60 dB over the wide
band of 3.5 to 20 MHz without trimming or calibration.
21. R. Carsello, “IMT-2000 Standards: Radio Aspects,” paper presented at the IEEE Person-
al Communications Conference, San Diego, Aug. 1997.
This article starts by comparing the significant differences between second-generation
mobile systems and the major objectives envisioned for IMT-2000, with particular em-
phasis on the satellite component. It also describes the flexible modular architecture for
IMT-2000, which will facilitate the introduction and evolution of new capabilities. The
article overviews the technology facilitators that, by the year 2000, will greatly assist the
economic implementation of these new systems. Finally, the ITU process for the selection
of radio technologies that will fulfil these ambitious requirements is also outlined.
22. J. Crols et al., “Low-IF Topologies for High-Performance Analog Front Ends of Fully
Integrated Receivers,” IEEE Transactions on Circuits and Systems—II, Mar. 1998, pp.
269–282.
In this paper, the fundamental principles of the low IF receiver topology are introduced.
Different low IF receiver topologies are synthesized and fully analyzed in this paper.
This is done by applying the complex signal technique—a technique used in digital appli-
cations to the study of analog receiver front ends.
23. T. H. Lee, The Design of CMOS RF ICs, 2nd Ed., Cambridge University Press, New
York, 2004.
This is a detailed book on the various aspects of the design of CMOS RF ICs. It covers
the following: 1. A nonlinear history of radio; 2. Overview of wireless principles; 3. Pas-
sive RLC networks; 4. Charateristics of passive IC components; 5. A review of MOS de-
vice physics; 6. Distributed systems; 7. The Smith chart and S-parameters; 8. Bandwidth
estimation techniques; 9. High frequency amplifier design; 10. Voltage references and
biasing; 11. Noise; 12. LNA design; 13. Mixers; 14. Feedback systems; 15. RF power
amplifiers; 16. Phase-locked loops; 17. Oscillators and synthesizers; 18. Phase noise;
19. Architectures; 20. RF circuits through the ages.
24. B. Razavi, RF Microelectronics, Prentice-Hall, Upper Saddle River, NJ, 1999.
This is another thorough book on the design of RF ICs and systems. This book begins
with a thorough introduction to the fundamental concepts of RF design, including non-
linearity, interference, and noise. It reviews modulation and detection theory, multiple
access techniques, and current wireless standards—including CDMA, TDMA, AMPS,
and GSM. It presents case studies of transceiver architectures designed by several lead-
ing manufacturers. Finally, it offers detailed explanations of low noise amplifiers, mix-
ers, and oscillators; frequency synthesizers; and power amplifiers.
25. R. Adler, “A Study of Locking Phenomena in Oscillators,” Proceedings of the Institute
of Radio Engineers, vol. 34, pp. 351–357, June 1946.
This is one of the first papers on this topic. Impression of an external signal upon an os-
cillator of similar fundamental frequency affects both the instantaneous amplitude and
instantaneous frequency. Using the assumption that time constants in the oscillator cir-
cuit are small compared to the length of one beat cycle, a differential equation is derived
which gives the oscillator phase as a function of time. With the aid of this equation, the
transient process of “pull-in” as well as the production of a distorted beat note are de-
scribed in detail. It is shown that the same equation serves to describe the motion of a
pendulum suspended in a viscous fluid inside a rotating container. The whole range of
locking phenomena is illustrated with the aid of this simple mechanical model.
26. M. Steyaert et al., “A 2V CMOS Cellular Transceiver Front-End,” IEEE Journal of

Solid-State Circuits, Dec. 2000, pp. 1895–1907.
This work presents the design and implementation of a 2-V cellular transceiver front end
in a standard 0.25-μm CMOS technology. The prototype integrates a low IF receiver
(low noise amplifier, I/Q mixers, and VGAs) and a direct up-conversion transmitter (I/Q
mixers and preamplifier) on a single die together with a complete phase-locked loop, in-
cluding a 64/79 prescaler, a fully integrated loop filter, and a quadrature VCO with on-
chip inductors. Design trade-offs have been made over the boundaries of the different
building blocks to optimize the overall system performance. All building blocks feature
circuit topologies that enable comfortable operation at low voltage. As a result, the IC
operates from a power supply of only 2 V, while consuming 191 mW in receiver (RX)
mode and 160 mW in transmitter (TX) mode. To build a complete transceiver system for
1,8-GHz cellular communication, only an antenna, an antenna filter, a power amplifier,
and a digital baseband chip must be added to the analog front end. This work shows the
potential of achieving the analog performance required for the class I/II DCS-1800 cel-
lular system in a standard 0.25-μm CMOS technology without tuning or trimming.
27. J. Fenk, “Highly Integrated RF ICs for GSM and DECT Systems—A Status Review,”
JSSC, Dec. 1997.
TDMA-based digital systems like GSM for cellular and DECT for cordless application
have created an increasing market within Europe and gained widespread acceptance
also outside Europe. This paper gives an overview of both systems. The system require-
ments and their influences on highly integrated RF ICs for GSM and DECT are dis-
cussed in detail. The various trends of progresses in integration of both systems will be
shown, with the different advantages and the disadvantages of the concepts in use. The
challenges of increasing the level of integration and an outlook to the future will be pre-
sented.
28. J. Strange et al., “A Direct Conversion Transceiver for Multi-Band GSM Application,”
paper presented at the IEEE RFIC Symposium, Boston, 2000.
The use of direct-conversion receiver topologies has been marked by many technical
problems, particularly when used in a TDMA environment. This paper describes a re-
ceiver architecture that overcomes many of the traditional problems associated with di-
rect conversion. This architecture has been applied in the design of a GSM multiband
transceiver that also features a development of the offset PLL transmitter together with a
fast-locking fractional-N synthesizer.
29. A. Behzad et al., “A 5-GHz Direct-Conversion CMOS Transceiver Utilizing Automatic
Frequency Control for IEEE 802.11a Wireless LAN Standard,” JSSC, Dec. 2003.
A fully integrated CMOS direct-conversion 5-GHz transceiver with automatic frequency
control is implemented in a 0.18-␮m digital CMOS process and housed in an LPCC-48
package. This chip, along with a companion baseband chip, provides a complete
802.11a solution The transceiver consumes 150 mW in receive mode and 380 mW in
transmit mode while transmitting +15-dBm output power. The receiver achieves a sensi-
tivity of better than –93.7 and –73.9 dBm for 6 and 54 Mb/s, respectively (even using
hard-decision decoding). The transceiver achieves a 4-dB receive noise figure and a
+23-dBm transmitter saturated output power. The transmitter also achieves a transmit
error vector magnitude of –33 dB. The IC occupies a total die area of 11.7 mm2 and is
packaged in a 48-pin LPCC package. The chip passes better than ±2.5 kV ESD perfor-
mance. Various integrated self-contained or system level calibration capabilities allow
for high performance and high yield.
30. D. H. Morais and K. Feher, “The Effects of Filtering and Limiting on the Performance of
QPSK, Offset QPSK, and MSK Signals,” IEEE Transactions on Communications, vol.
28, pp. 1999–2006, Dec. 1980.
The effects on spectral densities, symbol wave shapes, and Pe versus S/N performances,
resulting from the addition of filtering followed by hard limiting on raised cosine filtered
QPSK, offset QPSK, and MSK point-to-point radio systems, are studied. A mathematical
model and physical insight are presented into the crosstalk phenomenon between quad-
rature channels, created in the systems by the effect of limiting on filtered signals. This
crosstalk is shown to result whether the filtering is ideal or otherwise. Computer gener-
ated and measured eye diagrams showing crosstalk as predicted on a filtered, then limit-
ed, offset QPSK signal are given. Measured and computed spectral density results are
given which are in close agreement with each other, indicating that the computer model
provides a good representation of the real system. In addition, an explanation of the
shape of the power spectra associated with filtered, then limited, modulated signals is
provided by studying the symbol wave shapes of these signals. Using the spectral density
results and the Pe (S/N) performance findings, it is shown that for a microwave system
which (1) incorporates an amplitude-limiting amplifying device in the transmitter, (2)
must operate within the FCC limits for radiated spectrum, and (3) must operate at a
spectral efficiency greater than 1 bit/s/Hz, offset QPSK modulation is the best choice of
the three modulation methods studied.
31. J. F. Sevic and J. Staudinger, “Simulations of Adjacent Channel Power for Digital Wire-
less Communication Systems,” Microwave Journal, pp. 66–80, Oct. 1996.
A comparison of nonlinear analysis methods for simulation of power amplifier adja-
cent-channel power ratio is presented. Adjacent-channel power ratio is the linearity
figure of merit for digital wireless communication systems employing nonconstant-
envelope modulation techniques, such as OQPSK and ␲/4-QPSK. Trade-offs in the per-
formance of each method are discussed. Using modulation for the TIA IS-95 and the
TIA IS-54 standards, measured and simulated results for a single-stage power amplifi-
er are presented
32. A. Hajimiri and T. Lee, “ Design Issues in CMOS Differential LC Oscillators,” JSSC,
pp. 717–724, May 1999.
An analysis of phase noise in differential cross-coupled inductance–capacitance (LC)
oscillators is presented. The effect of tail current and tank power dissipation on the volt-
age amplitude is shown. Various noise sources in the complementary cross-coupled pair
are identified, and their effect on phase noise is analyzed. The predictions are in good
agreement with measurements over a large range of tail currents and supply voltages. A
1.8-GHz LC oscillator with a phase noise of –121 dBc/Hz at 600 kHz is demonstrated,
dissipating 6 mW of power using on-chip spiral inductors
33. P. Gray, P. Hurst, S. Lewis, and R. Meyer, Analysis and Design of Analog Integrated
Circuits, 4th ed., Wiley, New York, 2001.
This edition of the book features coverage of several topics—more advanced CMOS de-
vice electronics to include short-channel effects, weak inversion, and impact ionization.
In addition, coverage of state-of-the-art IC processes shows how modern integrated cir-
cuits are fabricated, including heterojunction bipolar transistors, copper interconnect,
and low permittivity dielectric materials. A comprehensive and unified treatment of bipo-
lar and CMOS circuits is presented.
34. T. H. Lee, Planar Microwave Engineering, Cambridge University Press, New York,
2004.
This book covers many practical techniques for microwave design and measurements.
The book covers the following: 1. A microhistory of microwave technology; 2. Introduc-
tion to RF and microwave technology; 3. The Smith chart and S-parameters; 4. Imped-
ance matching; 5. Connectors, cables, and waveguide; 6. Lumped passive components;
7. Microstrip, stripline, and planar passive elements; 8. Impedance measurement; 9. Mi-
crowave diodes; 10. Mixers; 11. Transistors; 12. Small-signal amplifiers; 13. Low noise
amplifiers; 14. Noise figure measurement; 15. Oscillators; 16. Synthesizers; 17. Oscilla-
tor phase noise; 18. Phase noise measurement; 19. Sampling oscilloscopes, spectrum an-
alyzers, and probes; 20. Power amplifiers; 21. Antennas; 22. Lumped filters; 23. Mi-
crostrip filters.
35. J. G. Proakis and M. Salehi, Communication Systems Engineering, Prentice-Hall, Upper
Saddle River, NJ, 2002.
With an emphasis on digital communications, this edition of the book introduces the ba-
sic principles underlying the analysis and design of communication systems. In addition,
this text gives a solid introduction to analog communications and a review of important
mathematical foundation topics.
36. S. Mehta et al., “An 802.11g WLAN SoC,” IEEE International Solid-State Circuits
Conference Digest of Technical Papers, pp. 94–95, Feb. 2005.
A single-chip IEEE-802.11g-compliant wireless LAN system-on-a-chip (SoC) that imple-
ments all RF, analog, digital PHY, and MAC functions has been integrated in a 0.18-␮m
CMOS technology. The IC transmits 0-dBm EVM-compliant output power for a 64-QAM
OFDM signal. The overall receiver sensitivities are better than –92 and –73 dBm for
data rates of 6 and 54Mb/s, respectively.
37. D. Tse and P. Viswanath, Fundamentals of Wireless Communications, Cambridge Uni-
versity Press, New York, 2005.
This textbook takes a unified view of the fundamentals of wireless communication and
explains the web of concepts underpinning these advances at a level accessible to an au-
dience with a basic background in probability and digital communication. Topics cov-
ered include MIMO (multiple input, multiple output) communication, space–time coding,
opportunistic communication, OFDM, and CDMA. The concepts are illustrated using
many examples from wireless systems such as GSM, IS-95 (CDMA), IS-856(1xEV-DO),
Flash OFDM, and ArrayComm SDMA systems. Particular emphasis is placed on the in-
terplay between concepts and their implementation in systems. An abundant supply of ex-
ercises and figures reinforce the material in the text. This book is intended for use on
graduate courses in electrical and computer engineering and will also be of great inter-
est to practicing engineers.
38. A. Behzad et al. “A Fully Integrated MIMO Multiband Direct Conversion CMOS Trans-
ceiver for WLAN Apllications (802.11n),” IEEE International Solid-State Circuits Con-
ference Digest of Technical Papers, pp. 560–561, Feb. 2007.
A single-chip, multiband, direct-conversion CMOS MIMO transceiver (2×2) targeted for
WLAN applications is presented. This transceiver is capable of satisfying the require-
ments of the draft 802.11n standard and achieves PHY rates of >270 Mbps. The re-
ceivers and transmitters achieve an EVM of better than –41 dB (0.9%) and –40 dB
(1.0%) operating in legacy g and a modes, respectively. From a 1.8-V supply and with
both cores operating, the chip draws 275 mA in RX mode and 280 mA in TX mode.
39. D. Rahn et al., “A Fully Integrated Multiband MIMO WLAN Transceiver RFIC,” JSSC,
pp. 1629–1641, Aug. 2005.
A multiple input–multiple output (MIMO) transceiver RFIC compliant with IEEE
802.11a/b/g and Japan wireless LAN (WLAN) standards is presented. The transceiver
has two complete radio paths integrated on the same chip. When two chips are used in
tandem to form a four-path composite beam forming (CBF) system, 15 dB of link margin
improvement is obtained. The transceiver was implemented in a 47-GHz SiGe technolo-
gy with 29.1 mm2 die size. It consumes 195 mA in RX mode and 240 mA in TX mode from
a 2.75-V supply.
40. G. Chien et al., “A Fully-Integrated Dual-Band MIMO Transceiver IC,” RFIC Digest of
Technical Papers, 4 pp., 2006.
A monolithic MIMO transceiver IC consisting of two transmitters and three receivers is
implemented in a 0.35/spl mu/m SiGe BiCMOS process. The receivers achieve a NF of 4
dB in 2.4 GHz and 5.5 dB in 5 GHz, while the transmitters deliver an OP1dB of 11 dBm.
The MIMO transceiver in full operation consumes approximately 260 mA in RX mode
and 245 mA in TX mode from a 3-V supply.
41. Y. Palaskas et al., “A 5GHz 108Mb/s 2×2 MIMO Transceiver with Fully Integrated
+16dBm PAs in 90nm CMOS,” IEEE International Solid-State Circuits Conference Di-
gest of Technical Papers, pp. 368–369, Feb. 2006.
This paper presents a fully integrated 5-GHz 2 × 2 MIMO WLAN transceiver RFIC im-
plemented in 90-nm CMOS. The paper identifies the key MIMO integration issues and
proposes techniques to optimize MIMO performance. It is shown that crosstalk between
the multiple transceivers residing on the same die can degrade MIMO performance and
has to be carefully minimized, especially when power amplifiers are integrated on die. A
shared LO generation and distribution network is designed to maximize MIMO phase
noise immunity without introducing undesired crosstalk. The fabricated MIMO receiver
achieves a sensitivity of –63 dBm while receiving 108 Mbps in MIMO spatial multiplex-
ing mode in the presence of a 25-ns Rayleigh fading channel. The sensitivity of a single
receiver in the presence of AWGN noise is –76 dBm. Linearized 3.3-V, 5-GHz power am-
plifiers with P1dB = 20.5 dBm deliver average power of +13 and +16 dBm each in
MIMO and SISO modes, respectively (EVM = –27/–25 dB). The measured performance
demonstrates the effectiveness of the isolation techniques employed. The system in a
package includes an 18-mm2 die and microstrip front-end matching networks implement-
ed on a flip-chip package.
42. C. P. Lee et al., “A Highly Linear Direct-Conversion Transmit Mixer Transconductance
Stage with Local Oscillation Feedthrough and I/Q Imbalance Cancellation Scheme,”
IEEE International Solid-State Circuits Conference Digest of Technical Papers, pp.
368–369, Feb. 2006.
Some of the requirements of the next generation WLAN transmitters are low transmit
EVM, a low local oscillator feedthrough (LOFT), a small I/Q imbalance, a wide gain-
control range, and preferably a minimum number of real-time calibrations. In this paper,
a highly linear transmit mixer transconductance stage is presented that incorporates a
wide gain-control range and a one-time LOFT and I/Q imbalance cancellation scheme
to meet these goals.
43. K. Bult et al., “An Inherently Linear and Compact MOST-Only Current Division Tech-
nique,” IEEE Journal of Solid-State Circuits, vol. 27, no. 12, pp. 1730–1735, Dec. 1992.
A technique is presented for dividing currents accurately and linearly by using MOS tran-
sistors only. This technique is valid in all operating regions of an MOS transistor. With this
technique, a volume control circuit is realized with an attenuation of 0 to –84 dB in steps of
2 dB. The measured THD is better than –85 dB and the dynamic range is better than 100
dB. The chip is realized in a standard digital CMOS process and chip area is 0.22 mm2.
44. A. Behzad et al., “A 4.92–5.845 GHz Direct-Conversion CMOS Transceiver for IEEE
802.11a Wireless LAN,” RFIC Digest of Technical Papers, 2004, pp. 335–338.
A fully integrated CMOS direct-conversion 5-GHz transceiver is implemented in a 0.18-
␮m digital CMOS process and housed in an LPCC-48 package. This chip, along with a
companion baseband chip, provides a complete 802.11a solution covering all of the world-
wide 4.92- to 5.845-GHz bands. The receiver achieves a 3.5-dB NF while the transmitter
achieves a +23-dBm saturated output power. The integrated PA utilizes a linearization
technique to allow for high efficiency while maintaining the linear operation required by
QAM64 OFDM signals. The transceiver achieves low cost and high yield through the use
of various integrated self-contained or system level calibration techniques.
45. A. Behzad, “Radio Design for MIMO Systems with an Emphasis on IEEE 802.11n,”
course presented at IEEE International Solid-State Circuits Conference, San Francisco,
2007.
Essential to the overall system design of a MIMO system is the radio design. This course
provides a brief introduction to the legacy 802.11 a/b/g systems, followed by a discussion
of the history of multiple antenna systems and the conventional analog-based techniques
such as MRC. A general introduction to the 802.11n then follows, which includes the
channelization and modulation types, the definition and the description of the concepts
behind the multiple spatial streams (M × N), and additional PHY and MAC techniques
allowing for higher rates and/or longer reach. These features include the use of short
guard interval (GI), implicit and explicit beamforming, space–time block codes (STBC),
the use of Greenfield mode, and aggregation techniques. The requirements of the
802.11n standard such as sensitivity and EVM and their relation to analog impairments
such as phase noise, quadrature imbalances, linearity, and crosstalk are also discussed.
Some specific circuit examples are presented and some unique circuit implementation
challenges of MIMO radios are discussed. Some measured performance numbers (range
and throughput) will be also presented. The course wraps up by discussing the future
trends of MIMO radio implementation.
46. C. Balanis, Antenna Theory, 3rd ed., Wiley, Hoboken, NJ, 2005.
The discipline of antenna theory has experienced vast technological changes. In re-
sponse, the author has updated his classic text, offering a recent look at the necessary
topics. New material includes smart antennas and fractal antennas, along with the latest
applications in wireless communications. Multimedia material on an accompanying CD
presents PowerPoint viewgraphs of lecture notes, interactive review questions, Java ani-
mations and applets, and MATLAB features. Like the previous editions, this third edition
is appropriate for electrical engineering and physics students at the senior undergradu-
ate and beginning graduate levels and practicing engineers as well.
47. R. J. Baker, CMOS Circuit Design, Layout and Simulation, 2nd ed., Wiley/IEEE, Hobo-
ken, NJ, 2005
This book covers the practical design of both analog and digital integrated circuits, of-
fering a contemporary view of a wide range of analog/digital circuit blocks, the BSIM
model, data converter architectures, and other topics. This edition takes a two-path ap-
proach to the topics; design techniques are developed for both long- and short-channel
CMOS technologies and then compared. The results are multidimensional explanations
that allow readers insight into the design process.
48. R. J. Baker, CMOS Mixed-Signal Circuit Design, Wiley/IEEE, Hoboken, NJ, 2002.
This book builds on the fundamental material in the author’s previous book, CMOS: Cir-
cuit Design, Layout, and Simulation, to provide a textbook and reference for mixed-sig-
nal circuit design. The coverage is both practical and in-depth, integrating experimental,
theoretical, and simulation examples to drive home the why and the how of doing mixed-
signal circuit design. Some of the highlights of this book include a practical/theoretical
approach to mixed-signal circuit design with an emphasis on oversampling techniques;
coverage of delta–sigma data converters, custom analog and digital filter design, design
with submicrometer CMOS processes, and practical debug prototyping techniques.
Index
AACI (alternate adjacent channel AWGN (all-white-Gaussian-noise) channel,

interference) requirement, 88, 104, 196–197
131
ACI (adjacent channel interference) Backoff, 89, 98, 116, 122–123, 148
requirement, 88, 104 Baluns, 94, 149, 178, 179, 203, 205
AD (amplitude distortion), 96, 97 Band-select filters, 44, 45–46, 47, 48, 52,
Adjacent channel interference (ACI) 56, 77, 103
requirement, 88, 104, 131 Bandpass filters, 52–54, 61, 65, 84, 91, 104,
AFC (automatic frequency control), 105–106
165–171 Baseband blocks:
All-white-Gaussian-noise (AWGN) HD-related interference, 119–121
channel, 196–197 in receiver architecture, 59, 82–83
Alternate adjacent channel interference in transceiver case study, 178
(AACI) requirement, 88, 104 in transmitter architecture, 65–66, 119
AM-AM distortion, 96–99, 121, 123 Baseband filters, 44–45, 47, 49, 51, 52, 61,
AM-PM distortion, 96–99, 121, 123 165
Amplifiers. See Differential amplifiers; Bias current calibration, 175–176
HPVGAs (high pass variable-gain BiCMOS (bipolar CMOS), 70
amplifiers); LNAs (low-noise Bipolar devices:
amplifiers); PAs (power amplifiers) comparison of SiGe transistors with
Amplitude distortion (AD), 96, 97 CMOS transistors, 67–71
Amplitude modulation (AM). See AM-AM comparison with MOSFET devices,
distortion; AM-PM distortion 81–82, 154–155
Antennas: flicker noise, 81–82
and direct-conversion receivers, 56, 57,
91 Calibration:
and FCC requirements, 33 bias current, 175–176
and IEEE 802.11a/g receivers, 87 closed-loop, 164
and LO leakage, 75–76, 77 in CMOS 802.11a/b/g/n MIMO
and low IF receivers, 52 transceiver case study, 209–210
multiple, 197–200, 212, 214 for CMOS-based transmitters, 177
and receiver phase noise, 129 DSP-assisted, 161, 163
and superheterodyne receivers, 44, 50 filter time-constant, 176–177
Autocalibration, 119, 161–163, 178–179, open-loop, 164–165
207. See also Calibration self-contained, 161, 163
Automatic frequency control (AFC), VCO, 163–165
165–172 WLAN radio overview, 161–177
234 INDEX
Calibration (continued) and polar modulators, 66–67

in WLAN transmitter case study, and quadrature balance, 110–114
189–196 transmitter output, 66–67, 110–114,
Cascodes: 185–186
folded, 144, 146 VSA examples, 34–41
in low-noise amplifier design, 140–141, Cumulative distribution function (CDF), 97,
142 134
and mixers, 144, 146
in power amplifiers, 148, 151 Data rates:
and VCO pulling, 126 and automatic frequency control, 171
in WLAN transmitter case study, 190 in CMOS 802.11a/b/g/n MIMO
CCDF (complementary CDF), 97, 98, 100, transceiver case study, 201
134 CMOS 802.11a transceiver case study,
CDF (cumulative distribution function), 97, 182–183, 184
134 and far-out phase noise, 130
CDMA (cellular code division multiple- in history of IEEE 802.11, 6–8
access) standard, 11, 18, 31, 61, 90, IEEE 802.11a, 8–9, 21–23
91, 129 IEEE 802.11b, 5, 8–9, 11–12
Channel allocations: IEEE 802.11g, 5, 8–9, 21–23
IEEE 802.11a, 13–15 and multipath fading, 17
IEEE 802.11b, 10–12 receiver issues, 26, 74, 75, 88, 89, 107,
IEEE 802.11g, 10–12 182–183
Channel-select filters, 44, 46, 47, 52, 104 transmitter issues, 28, 123–124, 184
Closed-loop calibration, 164 DC offsets, receiver-related, 75–79
CMOS (complementary metal-oxide- Differential amplifiers, 151, 158–160
semiconductor): Direct-conversion architecture:
comparison with BiCMOS, 70–71 advantages and disadvantages, 56–59
comparison with bipolar SiGe transistors, example, 55, 56
67–71 overview, 44, 55–56
flicker noise in devices, 81 and receiver flicker noise, 82–83
in low-noise amplifiers, 139–142 and receiver image rejection, 106–107
in mixers, 143–144 receivers, 44, 55–59, 76–79, 91–92
in power amplifier design, 149–153 transmitters, 44, 64–66, 117–119
power-level calibration, 177 Direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS), 6,
three-stage PA example, 148–149 7, 11
transceiver case study, 178–189 Diversity, 149, 181, 199–200, 201, 219
in VCO design, 154–155 DSB (double-sideband) NF vs. SSB (single-
CMOS 802.11a transceiver case study: sideband) NF, 46, 103
architecture, 178–180 DSSS (direct sequence spread spectrum), 6,
block diagrams, 179–180 7, 11
circuit implementation, 179–180
performance characteristics, 187–189 EVM (error vector magnitude):
receiver, 181–183 receiver, 169, 170
transmitter, 183–185 relationship to image rejection, 114–116
Code rates, 21, 22, 23 relationship to quadrature balance,
Complementary CDF (CCDF), 97, 98, 100, 109–116
134 transmitter, 26–28
Constellation diagrams:
IEEE 802.11a, 34, 35, 36, 37 Fading, multipath, 15–17
INDEX 235
Far-out phase noise, 130–131 High pass filters. See HPFs (high-pass
FCC (Federal Communications filters)
Commission), 10, 13, 31, 33, 75, 77, High pass variable-gain amplifiers. See
104, 119, 129 HPVGAs (high pass variable-gain
Feedback techniques vs. open-loop amplifiers)
transductance, 158–160 HPFs (high-pass filters), 36, 50, 54, 58, 77,
FER (frame error rate), 88 78–79, 165–166, 169, 205
FHSS (frequency hopping spread HPVGAs (high pass variable-gain
spectrum), 6, 11 amplifiers), 181–182, 203, 205
Filters:
band-select, 44, 45–46, 47, 48, 52, 56, IEEE 802.11 standard:
77, 103 comparison with HyperLAN standard, 6
bandpass, 52–54, 61, 65, 84, 91, 104, comparisons among PHY versions, 8–10,
105–106 12, 13
baseband, 44–45, 47, 49, 51, 52, 61, 165 data rates, 6, 11–12, 21–23
channel-select, 44, 46, 47, 52, 104 history, 6–8
front-end, 48, 104 MAC layer, 6, 22, 24
high pass, 36, 50, 54, 58, 77, 78, overview, 6–8
165–166, 169 PHY extensions, 6–8, 24
RF, 102–106 structure, 6–8
time-constant calibration techniques, system requirements, 24–33
176–177 working groups, 7–8
Flicker noise, 79–83 IEEE 802.11a:
Frame error rate (FER), 88 channel allocations, 13–15
Frequency control, automatic (AFC), constellation diagrams, 34, 35, 36, 37
165–171 extension, 6, 7, 8–10, 12, 21–23
Frequency conversion. See Mixers OFDM coding, 15, 20–21
Frequency errors, effect on OFDM systems, OFDM packet construction, 24, 25
132–135 IEEE 802.11b:
Frequency hopping spread spectrum channel allocations, 10–12
(FHSS), 6, 11 extension, 6–7, 8–12
Front-end filters, 48, 104 IEEE 802.11g:
channel allocations, 10–12
GaAs (gallium arsenide) devices, 68, 70, extension, 7, 8–10, 12, 21–23
123, 149–150, 153 OFDM coding, 15, 20–21
Gain control: OFDM packet construction, 24, 25
in CMOS 802.11a transceiver case study, IEEE 802.11n:
183–185 need for, 195–200
implementing in low-noise amplifiers, working group, 7–8
141–142 IF (intermediate frequency). See also Low
providing in transmitters, 118–119 IF receivers
switched-resistance scheme, 141–142 choosing in superheterodyne receivers,
Gilbert quads, 143, 144, 146 47–51
GSM (Global System for Mobile) and image rejection, 104
communication, 54, 55, 58, 75, 83, zero, 43
90 IIPs. See Input IPs (IIPs); Intercept points
(IPs)
HD (harmonic distortion), 30, 83–84, Image rejection:
119–121, 151, 159–160 direct-conversion receivers, 106–107
236 INDEX
Image rejection (continued) in direct-conversion receivers, 55, 56, 57,

filter use, 45–46, 47 59, 106
in low IF architecture, 104–106 in IEEE 802.11 standards, 22
and quadrature balance, 107–109 implementing gain control, 141–142
relationship to EVM, 114–116 linearity, 139–140, 141, 142, 143, 144,
superheterodyne receivers, 45–46, 47, 145–146
102–104 in low IF receivers, 52, 53, 104–105
IMD (intermodulation distortion): overview, 137–138
characterizing circuit nonlinearity, as receiver building block, 137–142
83–84 in superheterodyne receivers, 44–46,
product nonsymmetry, 121 102–104
and spectral regrowth, 30–31, 32 and transceiver impairments, 75, 76, 77,
Inductors, 138–139, 141, 146 79, 91, 102–106, 117
Input IPs (IIPs), 86–87 LO generation circuitry, 57, 111, 114, 157,
Intercept points (IPs), 59, 84–96, 144, 145 167–169, 173, 175, 203, 207–209
Intermediate frequency (IF). See also Low Local oscillators (LOs):
IF receivers and automatic frequency control,
choosing in superheterodyne receivers, 167–168
47–49 buffers for mixers, 146–147
and image rejection, 104 in direct-conversion receivers, 106
zero, 43 leakage and DC offsets, 75
Intermodulation distortion (IMD): leakage and receiver DC offsets, 75–79
characterizing circuit nonlinearity, 83–84 PLLs pulling, 124–126
product nonsymmetry, 121 in superheterodyne receivers, 102
and spectral regrowth, 30–31, 32 LOFT (LO feedthrough):
IPs. See Intercept points (IPs) calibration case study, 189–196
IS-95 CDMA standard, 11. See also CDMA direct-conversion transmitter issue,
(cellular code division multiple- 117–119
access) standard and MI>IQ imbalances, 174–175
and quadrature error, 172–175
LANs (local area networks), wired vs. as transmitter impairment, 116–119
wireless, 1–3. See also Wireless LOGEN, 60, 147–148, 157, 159
LANs Low IF receivers:
LC-based oscillators, 153–154 advantages and disadvantages, 52, 54
Linearity: and band-select filters, 77
in circuit building blocks, 158–160 examples, 52–53
feedback techniques vs. open-loop image rejection, 104–106
transductance, 158–160 overview, 44, 51–52
in low-noise amplifiers, 139–140, 141, suitability for WLAN systems, 55
142, 143, 144, 145–146 Low IF transmitters, 44, 64
in power amplifiers, 148, 150, 153 Low-noise amplifiers. See LNAs (low-noise
as receiver issue, 91–96 amplifiers)
as transmitter issue, 121–124
LNAs (low-noise amplifiers): MAC layer, 6, 22, 24, 70, 181, 188, 205,
in CMOS 802.11a/b/g/n MIMO 218–219
transceiver case study, 203 Maximum ratio combining (MRC), 200,
in CMOS 802.11a transceiver case study, 214, 217
178 MIMO (multi-in, multi-out) systems, 200,
defined, 137 201, 202–217
INDEX 237
Mixers: modulated signals, 88–89

as building block in wireless transceivers, and multipath propagation, 15–21
142–148 overview, 15
CMOS, 143–144 packet construction, 24, 25
LO generation, 167–168 and quadrature signals, 107, 109,
multifrequency, 157–158 110–111
role of Gilbert quad, 142–148 and subcarrier overlaps, 18–21
stacked, 157–158, 169 and transmitter spectral masks, 32
symbol, 142 OIPs. See Output IPs (OIPs)
transmit-side variable gain, 145–146 OOBs (out-of-band blockers), 103
MOSFET (MOS field effect transistor) Open-loop calibration, 164–165
devices: Orthogonal frequency division
comparison with bipolar devices, 81–82, multiplexing. See OFDM
154–155 (orthogonal frequency division
flicker noise, 80–81 multiplexing)
and power consumption issues, 93 Oscillators, LC-based, 153–154. See also
in VCO design, 154–155 Local oscillators (LOs); VCOs
MRC (maximum ratio combining), 200, (voltage-controlled oscillators)
214, 217 Out-of-band blockers (OOBs), 103
Multi-in, multi-out (MIMO), 200, 201, Out-of-band phase noise, 130–131
202–217 Output IPs (OIPs), 86–87
Multifrequency mixers, 157–158
Multipath propagation, 15–21 P1dB compression point, 95–96, 98, 99,
Multiple antennas, 199–204, 214, 216 123
PAPR (peak-to-average power ratio), 12.
NF (noise figure): See also PAR (peak-to-average
in CMOS 802.11a transceiver case study, ratio)
180–181 PAR (peak-to-average ratio):
and flicker noise, 83 defined, 121
impact of band-select filter, 45 OFDM signals, 19–20, 88, 121, 148,
impact of image-reject filter, 46 182
linearity tradeoff, 26 overview, 19–20, 29, 31, 32
and low-noise amplifiers, 137–140, 142 and polar modulators, 67
and receiver impairments, 92, 93 relationship to transmitter linearity and
and receiver sensitivity, 73–75 efficiency, 121–124
and superheterodyne receiver image signal differences, 88, 96, 97–98
rejection, 102–104 PAs (power amplifiers):
NMOS devices, 81–82, 144, 146, 155 analyzing signal distortion, 97–98, 99,
Noise figure. See NF (noise figure) 100–102
Nonconstant envelope signals, 29, 30–31, CMOS devices in, 149–151
121 designing for WLAN applications,
149–153
OFDM (orthogonal frequency division linearity, 148, 150, 153
multiplexing): linearization and efficiency enhancement
comparison with CDMA, 18 techniques, 123–124
data rates, 21–23 overview, 148
effect of frequency errors, 132–135 as radio building block, 148–153
effect of phase noise, 131–132 three-stage CMOS example, 148–149
and IEEE 802.11n, 199, 200–201 PD (phase distortion), 96, 97
238 INDEX
Peak-to-average power ratio (PAPR), 12. automatic frequency control, 165–172

See also PAR (peak-to-average in CMOS 802.11a/b/g/n MIMO
ratio) transceiver case study, 202–205
Peak-to-average ratio (PAR). See PAR in CMOS 802.11a transceiver case study,
(peak-to-average ratio) 181–183
PGAs (programmable gain amplifiers), 44, comparison of architectures, 49–51,
52, 56, 82 59–60, 76–77
Phase distortion (PD), 96, 97 DC offsets, 75–79
Phase-locked loops (PLLs): direct-conversion, 44, 55–59, 76–79,
block diagram, 186 91–92
in CMOS 802.11a transceiver case study, flicker noise, 79–83
186–189 frequency offsets and multipath
local oscillator pulling, 124–126 distortion, 169–172
measured phase noise, 184–185 image rejection, 45–46, 47, 102–107
phase noise behavior, 126–130 linearity issue, 91–96
Phase noise: LO leakage, 75–79
close-in vs. far-out, 129–130 low IF, 44, 51–55, 104–106
effect on OFDM systems, 131–132 noise figure, 73–75, 92, 93, 102–104
far-out, 130–131 nonlinearities, 83–102
out-of-band, 130–131 PLL and PCO phase noise, 129
in PLLs, 126–130, 186–187 sensitivity, 24, 26, 73–75
in VCOs, 154–155 superheterodyne, 43, 44–51, 60, 76, 77,
PHY layer, 6–8, 24 102–104
PLLs. See Phase-locked loops (PLLs) Reciprocal mixing, 128, 129, 130–131
PMOS devices, 81, 144, 145, 155 RF filters:
Polar modulators, 66–67 in low-IF architecture, 51, 104–106
Power amplifiers. See PAs (power in superheterodyne architecture, 48,
amplifiers) 102–104
Power detectors, 174–175, 184 Root-mean-square (RMS) delay, 17, 18, 28,
Programmable gain amplifiers (PGAs), 44, 116, 154, 169
52, 56, 82 RSSIs (receive signal strength indicators),
26, 182, 205
Quadrature balance:
calibrating imbalances, 172–175 SAW (surface acoustic wave) filters, 44, 46,
constellation diagrams, 110–114 52, 56, 60
and direct-conversion receivers, Semiconductors. See also CMOS
106–107 (complementary metal-oxide-
in low IF architecture, 104, 106 semiconductor); SiGe (silicon
relationship to error vector magnitude, germanium) devices
109–116 BiCMOS, 67–71
relationship to image rejection, 102, 104, WLAN chipset market, 3–6
107–109 SiGe (silicon germanium) devices:
in WLAN transmitter case study, in bipolar buffers, 147
189–196 in power amplifiers, 67–69, 70, 123, 139,
149, 150, 153
Receive signal strength indicators (RSSIs), Signal-to-noise plus interference ratio
26, 182, 205 (SNIR), 104, 130
Receivers: Signal-to-noise ratio (SNR), 11, 23, 73–75,
architectural overview, 43–44 79, 137, 198–201
INDEX 239
Silicon germanium (SiGe) devices: in WLAN transmitter case study,

in bipolar buffers, 147 189–196
in power amplifiers, 67–69, 70, 123, 139, Transmitters:
149, 150, 153 architectural overview, 43–44
SIMO (single-in, multi-out) systems, 200 baseband blocks, 65–66, 119
SISO (single-in, single-out) systems, in CMOS 802.11a/b/g/n MIMO
200–201 transceiver case study, 205–207
Sliding IF architecture, 48–49, 63 in CMOS 802.11a transceiver case study,
SNIR (signal-to-noise plus interference 183–186
ratio), 104, 130 constellation diagrams, 66–67, 110–114,
SNR (signal-to-noise ratio), 11, 23, 73–75, 185–186
79, 137, 198–201 current leakage problem, 116–119
Spectral masks, 10, 13, 28–33, 61, 64, 98, direct-conversion, 44, 64–66, 117–119
100–101, 184–185 error vector magnitude, 26–28
Spurious emissions, 33, 129–130 gain control, 118–119
SSB (single-sideband) NF vs. DSB (double- in high performance WLAN case study,
sideband) NF, 46, 103 187–194
Stacked mixers, 157–158, 169 impairments, 116–121
Superheterodyne receivers: and LO feedthrough, 116–119
advantages and disadvantages, 49–51 low IF, 44, 64
band-select filters, 44, 45–46, 47, 48, 77 PLL and PCO phase noise, 129
baseband filters, 44–45, 47, 49, 51 and polar modulators, 66–67
channel-select filters, 44, 46, 47, 52, 104 relationship of PAR to transmitter
choosing intermediate frequency, 47–51 linearity and efficiency, 121–124
comparison with direct-conversion spectral mask passing, 28–33
receivers, 60, 76, 77 superheterodyne, 43–44, 60–64
and flicker noise, 82 transmit output power vs. data rate,
image rejection, 45–46, 47, 102–104 182–183
overview, 44–45
role of filters, 44–45 U.S. Federal Communications Commission
sliding IF option, 48–49 (FCC), 10, 13, 31, 33, 75, 77, 104,
Superheterodyne transmitters: 119, 129
advantages and disadvantages, 62
example, 62–64 VCOs (voltage-controlled oscillators):
overview, 43–44, 60 in automatic frequency correction, 167,
role of filters, 61 168
Surface acoustic wave (SAW) filters, 44, buffers for mixers, 146–147
46, 52, 56, 60 calibration techniques, 163–165
in CMOS 802.11a/b/g/n MIMO
Temperature sensors, 177 transceiver case study, 207–209
Through-wafer via technology, 150 CMOS design topology, 155–156
Transceivers. See also Receivers; in direct-conversion receivers, 57
Transmitters in direct-conversion transmitters, 65
in CMOS 802.11a/b/g/n MIMO case fully integrated, 153–157
study, 200–215 in low IF transmitters, 64
in CMOS 802.11a case study, 178–189 in multifrequency stacked mixers,
Transconductance: 157–158
in CMOS power amplifier design, phase noise overview, 154–155
151–153 and PLL phase noise, 126–129
240 INDEX
VCOs (continued) Wireless CDMA (cellular code division

and PLL pulling phenomenon, 124–126 multiple-access) standard, 31, 61,
in superheterodyne transmitters, 62, 63 90, 91, 129
tuning range requirements, 156 Wireless LANs:
Vector signal analysis (VSA): advantages and disadvantages, 1–3
constellation diagrams, 34–41 communication speed issues, 2, 8, 15, 17
defined, 34 comparison with wired LANs, 1–3
overview, 33–34 defined, 1
Viterbi decoding, 21, 22, 23, 24, 74, 181 market trends, 3–6
VoIP (voice-over-Internet Protocol), 5, 7 network example, 1, 2
Voltage-controlled oscillators. See VCOs overview, 1–3
(voltage-controlled oscillators) radio design trends, 218–219
VSA. See Vector signal analysis
About the Author
Arya Behzad, Broadcom Distinguished Engineer, is a director of engineer-

ing working on radios for current and future generation wireless products
and product-line manager for all wireless LAN radio products. Also at
Broadcom, he is recognized as one of the most influential contributors to
CMOS RF R&D efforts and his product shipments have surpassed the 200-
million unit mark. Mr. Behzad has more than 100 patents issued and pend-
ing, as well as many publications in the areas of precision analog circuits,
cellular transceivers, integrated tuners, gigabit Ethernet, and wireless LANs.
He has taught courses and presented technical seminars at various confer-
ences and at several universities. This book and his IEEE Expert Now
course on wireless LAN radio design are both derived from his popular
IEEE ISSCC course on the same topic. Mr. Behzad is serving a sixth year as
a member of the IEEE International Solid State Circuits Conference Wire-
less Technical Committee. In the past, he has served as a guest editor of the
IEEE Journal of Solid State Circuits and is currently an associate editor of
the journal. He is a Senior Member of the IEEE. In 1994, he earned a Master
of Science degree in Electrical Engineering from the University of Califor-
nia at Berkeley.

Wiley Wireless Lan Radios Dec 2007

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Wiley Wireless Lan Radios Dec 2007

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Wiley Wireless Lan Radios Dec 2007

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Wireless LAN Radios

System Definition to Transistor Design

John B. Anderson, Series Editor

IEEE Press Series on Microelectronic Systems

IEEE Solid-State Circuits Society, Sponsor

John B. Anderson, Series Editor

John B. Anderson Joachim Hagenauer

Rolf Johannesson Norman Beaulieu

Books in the IEEE Press Series on Digital & Mobile Communication

John B. Anderson, Digital Transmission Engineering, Second Edition

John B. Anderson, Series Editor

IEEE Press Series on Microelectronic Systems

IEEE Solid-State Circuits Society, Sponsor

IEEE Press Editorial Board

R. Abari T. Chen R. J. Herrick

Kenneth Moore, Director of IEEE Book and Information Services (BIS)

IEEE Solid-State Circuits Society, Sponsor

Copyright © 2008 by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.

Wiley Bicentennial Logo: Richard J. Pacifico

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data is available.

Printed in the United States of America.

CHAPTER 1 802.11 Flavors and System Requirements 1

2.1.6 Low IF Transmitter 64

5.5 Filter Time-Constant Calibration (RC Calibration) 176

Annotated Bibliography 223

About the Author 241

AACI Alternate adjacent channel interferer

fpBGA Fine-pitch ball grid array

What is a wireless local area network (WLAN)? A WLAN system, shown

Wireless LAN Radios: System Definition to Transistor Design. By Arya Behzad 1

LAN cell phone

the flexibility of connectivity anywhere in the home, without an a priori re-

1.2 WLAN MARKET TRENDS

2002 and 2003:

2002: Severe price

2003 & 2004: Price

of new products with

2005 to 2007: Price

to be prioritized over other types of network traffic. An example of such la-

1.3 HISTORY OF 802.11

앫 802.11e Tasked to improve QOS. The inclusion of a QOS protocol

to be fully backward compatible with the 802.11a and 802.11g stan-

Table 1.1 Relative Advantages and Disadvantages of 802.11a, b, and g

where L is the propagation loss, d is the distance between the transmitter

dio front end or a sophisticated signal processing baseband. In particular, an

1.5 802.11b STANDARD

As shown in Figure 1.3a, there are a total of 11 designated channels in the

CH7 CH6 CH11

2401 2412 2423 2426 2437 2448 2451 2462 2473

throughput of channel 11. Different countries have differing regulations that

Table 1.2 IEEE 802.11b/g Allowed Data Rates, Associated

1.6 802.11a CHANNEL ALLOCATION

As mentioned earlier the 802.11g channel allocation is identical to that of

5725 5745 5765 5785 5805 5825

1.7 802.11a AND 802.11g: OFDM MAPPING

The 802.11a and g utilize a technique known as orthogonal frequency divi-

1.7.1 Multipath Fading

5180 5320 5745 5805 MHz

4920 4980 5040 5080 5500 5700 MHz